Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 485

D800001X232

March 2014

Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation


System
Printed in the Republic of Singapore.

Emerson Process Management 1996 - 2014. All rights reserved. For Emerson Process Management trademarks and service marks,
go to Emerson Process Management Trademarks and Service Marks. All other marks are property of their respective owners. The
contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their
accuracy, they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, expressed or implied, regarding the products or services
described herein or their use or applicability. All sales are governed by our terms and conditions, which are available on request. We
reserve the right to modify or improve the design or specification of such products at any time without notice.

See the CE statement in Chapter 2.

Emerson Process Management Distribution Ltd. Process Systems and Solutions


Meridian East
Meridian Business Park
Leicester, LE19 1uX, UK

Emerson a.s.
European System and Assembly
Pietansk 1202/44
Nov Mesto nad Vhom 91528
Slovakia

Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. an Emerson Process Management company


1100 W. Louis Henna Blvd.
Round Rock, TX 78681
Contents

Contents
Welcome ......................................................................................................................vii
Chapter 1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1
The DeltaV System .................................................................................................................................. 1
DeltaV System Equipment .......................................................................................................................2
DeltaV Control Network ...............................................................................................................3
DeltaV Remote Network .............................................................................................................. 6
Chapter 2 Installing Your DeltaV System ...................................................................................... 11
CE Statement ........................................................................................................................................ 12
Important Information about Hazardous Live Voltages ..........................................................................12
Installation Planning .............................................................................................................................. 12
Tools Required for Installation ................................................................................................... 13
Site Preparation ......................................................................................................................... 13
Wiring Guidelines ...................................................................................................................... 14
Power Guidelines ....................................................................................................................... 14
Torque Limits .............................................................................................................................14
Getting Started with DeltaV Hardware .......................................................................................15
Installing the System ............................................................................................................................. 16
Installing the DIN Rails and Carriers ............................................................................................16
DIN Rail Recommendations ....................................................................................................... 17
Installing the 2-Wide Power Controller Carrier ........................................................................... 18
Installing the 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier .................................................................................. 19
Connecting Bussed Field Power ................................................................................................. 21
Extending Bussed Field Power ....................................................................................................22
Installing Extender Cables .......................................................................................................... 26
Installing the DeltaV I/O Interface .............................................................................................. 27
Installing the DeltaV Controller ..................................................................................................31
Installing the DeltaV System Power Supply ................................................................................ 32
Installing the DeltaV Workstation .............................................................................................. 36
Installing the DeltaV Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) .......................................................... 37
Setting up the DeltaV Control Network ......................................................................................37
Connecting Power to the System ............................................................................................... 43
Setting Up the DeltaV Remote Network .....................................................................................45
Setting Up a Network Time Server ............................................................................................. 46
Installing the Fault-Tolerant Server ............................................................................................ 47
Chapter 3 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System ............................................... 49
Checking Out Your System .................................................................................................................... 49
Step 1. Checking the Cable Connections ....................................................................................49
Step 2. Checking the Power Supply Voltages ............................................................................. 50
Step 3. Checking the LED Indicators on Each Device ...................................................................50
Step 4. Testing the Field Wiring Connections ............................................................................. 81
Troubleshooting Your System ............................................................................................................... 82
Using the DeltaV Explorer .......................................................................................................... 82
Using the Workstation Diagnostics ............................................................................................ 83
Using DeltaV Diagnostics ...........................................................................................................83
Troubleshooting Guide .............................................................................................................. 84

i
Contents

Getting Help ..........................................................................................................................................87


Hazardous Area Installation Manuals, NAMUR Installation Manuals, and ATEX Instruction Sheets ..........87
Technical Service ................................................................................................................................... 88

Appendices and reference


Appendix A Environmental Specifications ....................................................................................... 89
Environmental Specifications for the DeltaV System ..............................................................................89
Appendix B Carrier Specifications ................................................................................................... 93
2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier .......................................................................................... 94
2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier ........................................................................................................... 95
8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier ..................................................................................................96
1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders and Cables .................................................................................... 97
Add External Power at the Left Carrier Extender ......................................................................... 99
Cabling Examples .......................................................................................................................99
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier .....................................................................................102
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier ......................................................................................................103
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier ...................................................................................... 104
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier ............................................................................................ 105
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders ................................................................................................ 106
4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier ................................................................................. 107
8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier ........................................................................................ 108
Fieldbus H1 Carrier .............................................................................................................................. 110
Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Carrier ................................................................................................. 112
Intrinsically Safe 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier ..........................................................................................113
Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator Carrier ............................................................................................ 114
Appendix C Interface Specifications .............................................................................................. 117
I/O Cards ............................................................................................................................................. 117
DeltaV Series 2 I/O ................................................................................................................... 118
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA ............................................................................................................120
AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC ............................................................................................................ 126
AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART ............................................................................................... 128
AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA .......................................................................................................... 131
AS-Interface .............................................................................................................................134
DeviceNet ................................................................................................................................137
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact .........................................................................................138
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated ............................................................................................... 142
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact ....................................................................................... 144
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated ............................................................................................. 145
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact ....................................................................................... 147
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated ............................................................................................. 148
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact .......................................................................................149
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side .......................................................................................... 151
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated ............................................................................................. 155
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side ..........................................................................157
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated .............................................................................159
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side ........................................................................................ 161
Fieldbus H1 and Series 2 H1 ..................................................................................................... 163
Isolated Input .......................................................................................................................... 166
Multifunction ...........................................................................................................................170

ii
Contents

Profibus DP .............................................................................................................................. 173


RTD, ohms ............................................................................................................................... 174
Sequence of Events ..................................................................................................................177
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 ............................................................................................180
Thermocouple, mV ..................................................................................................................183
VIM 2 card ............................................................................................................................... 186
Intrinsically Safe I/O Cards ................................................................................................................... 187
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART ............................................................................................188
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA .....................................................................................................189
I.S. DI, 16-Channel ................................................................................................................... 192
I.S. DO, 4-Channel ....................................................................................................................194
Terminal Blocks ................................................................................................................................... 195
I/O Terminal Blocks ..................................................................................................................196
Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block ...................................................................................................... 197
Series 2 H1 Terminal Block ....................................................................................................... 198
Interface Terminal Block .......................................................................................................... 199
Isolated Input Terminal Block ...................................................................................................200
Profibus DP Terminal Block ...................................................................................................... 201
RTD, ohms Terminal Block ....................................................................................................... 202
Thermocouple Terminal Block ................................................................................................. 203
32-Channel Terminal Block ...................................................................................................... 204
16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block ................................................................................. 205
4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block .......................................................................207
Redundant Terminal Blocks ................................................................................................................. 208
Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block .................................................................................. 209
Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block ............................................................................... 210
Redundant Discrete Terminal Block ......................................................................................... 211
Redundant H1 Terminal Block ..................................................................................................212
Redundant Interface Terminal Block ........................................................................................ 213
Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block .................................................................................... 214
Mass Termination Blocks ..................................................................................................................... 216
10-Pin Mass Termination Block ................................................................................................ 218
16-Pin Mass Termination Block ................................................................................................ 218
24-Pin Mass Termination Block ................................................................................................ 219
40-Pin Mass Termination Block ................................................................................................ 220
Mass Connection Boards ..................................................................................................................... 222
DI Mass Connection Board (single) ...........................................................................................222
DO Mass Connection Board (single) ......................................................................................... 226
Connecting DI and DO Mass Connection Boards ...................................................................... 229
Intrinsically Safe Terminal Blocks ......................................................................................................... 230
I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block ...................................................................................................231
I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block .................................................................................................232
I/O Interface Keying .............................................................................................................................233
Intrinsically Safe I/O Interface Keying ....................................................................................... 237
Appendix D DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit .......................................................239
Controller Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 239
Remote Interface Unit ......................................................................................................................... 240
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) .................................................................................................... 241
Fiber-Optic Media Converter ............................................................................................................... 243
Appendix E System Power Supply Specifications ...........................................................................247
System Power Supply (AC/DC) .............................................................................................................247

iii
Contents

System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) .................................................................................................... 249


Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply ................................................................................................ 252
Appendix F Workstation and Server Specifications ....................................................................... 255
Primary and Secondary Channel Ethernet Card Specifications - Plant LAN Interface Card .....................255
Fault-Tolerant Server ........................................................................................................................... 255
Multiple Monitors ................................................................................................................................ 256
Touch Screens ..................................................................................................................................... 256
Appendix G Control Network Specifications .................................................................................. 257
Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable ................................................................................................. 257
8-Port 10Mbit Ethernet Hub .....................................................................................................258
8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Port ........................................... 258
24-Port 100Mbit Fiber Switch .................................................................................................. 259
24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports ....................................................... 260
24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch ......................................................................................................261
12-Port SFP Managed Switch ................................................................................................... 262
24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots ............................................................262
24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots .................................................263
8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch ................................................................................... 264
8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One Fiber Port .....................................................265
8-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 1 Gigabit Multi-Function Port .................................................. 265
24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 RJ45 Ports .......................................................................... 266
24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 Gigabit Multi-Function Ports .............................................. 267
48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 RJ45 Ports .......................................................................... 268
48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 Gigabit Multi-Function Ports .............................................. 269
Fiber-Optic Gigabit Transceivers .............................................................................................. 269
Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers ............................................................................................ 270
Twisted Pair Gigabit Transceiver .............................................................................................. 271
DeltaV Fiber Switches .......................................................................................................................... 272
DeltaV Smart Switches and Media Modules ......................................................................................... 274
DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches and Media Modules ............................................................... 275
Power Specifications for the MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches ................................................ 285
DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches and Media Modules ......................................................... 286
Power Specifications for the DeltaV RM Smart Switches ...........................................................290
DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches .................................................................................................... 291
Power Specifications for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches ........................................................ 294
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules ............................................................................ 294
Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications .............................................................................................. 295
Cable Accessory Specifications ................................................................................................ 295
Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies ....................................................................................296
Straight-Through Cable Pin Outs ............................................................................................. 297
Crossover Cable Pin Outs ......................................................................................................... 298
DeltaV Control Networks .....................................................................................................................298
Extending a DeltaV Control Network with Media Converters ....................................................299
10Mbit Hub Example ............................................................................................................... 300
10/100Mbit Network Examples ............................................................................................... 301
Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Star ............................................................................... 301
Twisted Pair Network Star Using Twisted Pair Switches ............................................................ 304
Twisted Pair Cascaded Network Using Twisted Pair Switches ................................................... 306
Twisted Pair Cascaded Networks with Fiber Links .................................................................... 308
100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network ................................................................................. 310
Gigabit Twisted Pair Network Cascade ..................................................................................... 312

iv
Contents

Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Cascade ...................................................................................... 314


Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 3750 Switches .....................................................316
100Mb Fiber-Optic Star ............................................................................................................318
100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network ................................................................................. 321
Gigabit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network ...................................................................................322
Gigabit Fiber-Optic Cascaded Network .................................................................................... 324
Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star ............................................................................................. 326
100Mbit Fiber-Optic Network Star ........................................................................................... 328
100Mbit Multimode Fiber-Optic Network ............................................................................... 330
Example Networks with DeltaV Smart Switches ...................................................................................332
DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network with a Twisted Pair Uplink ............................332
DeltaV Smart Switches in Twisted Pair Network with SFP and Fiber-Optic Uplinks .................... 335
DeltaV Smart Switches with Fiber and Twisted Pair Uplinks ..................................................... 337
DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network .................................................................... 340
DeltaV Controller Firewall ....................................................................................................................343
DeltaV Controller Firewall Network Examples .......................................................................... 346
The Management Station .................................................................................................................... 352
Connecting the Management Station ...................................................................................... 353
Managing Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall ........................................................................ 353
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses ..............................................................................................................354
DeltaV Zones .......................................................................................................................................357
1420 Wireless Gateway ....................................................................................................................... 358
Appendix H DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies ............................................................................ 359
Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supplies ...........................360
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC .......................................................363
Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC ............................................................................................................ 365
Appendix I Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines ............................................................... 367
Selecting an Enclosure .........................................................................................................................367
Power Dissipation Considerations ........................................................................................................371
Example Enclosure Selection Calculations ........................................................................................... 374
Appendix J System Power Guidelines ........................................................................................... 375
System Power Supply (AC/DC) .............................................................................................................375
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) .................................................................................................... 376
Sizing the I.S. System Power Supply .....................................................................................................376
Legacy Bulk Power Supplies for System Power ..................................................................................... 376
Sizing the Legacy Bulk Power Supply for Bussed Field Power and System Power .................................. 377
Using Multiple System Power Supplies ................................................................................................ 377
System Power Supply (AC/DC) ................................................................................................. 377
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) .........................................................................................381
Using Multiple Legacy Bulk Power Supplies ..........................................................................................382
OR-ing Diodes ..........................................................................................................................383
Appendix K Bussed Field Power Guidelines ....................................................................................389
Implementing Bussed Field Power for Applications using DI and DO Cards .......................................... 389
Sizing R-C Snubbers .............................................................................................................................392
Appendix L Controller Redundancy ...............................................................................................395
Installing a Redundant Controller ........................................................................................................ 395
Powering Redundant Controllers .........................................................................................................396
Appendix M DeltaV Vertical Carriers .............................................................................................. 399
VerticalPLUS Carriers ........................................................................................................................... 400

v
Contents

4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carriers ................................................................................... 400


4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carriers .....................................................................................401
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carriers .................................................................................................... 401
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carriers ...........................................................................................402
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders and Cables .............................................................................. 404
Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers ............................................................................................................ 406
Installing the DIN Rail Stop .......................................................................................................406
Installing and Removing the Carriers ........................................................................................407
Extending LocalBus Power to Other Carriers .............................................................................408
Inserting System Power ........................................................................................................... 411
Using Bussed Field Power with VerticalPLUS Carriers ................................................................412
Legacy Vertical Carriers ............................................................................................................416
Appendix N Installation Worksheets ............................................................................................. 431
Installation Information Checklist ........................................................................................................ 431
Worksheets for Calculating Power Requirements ................................................................................ 432
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power ...........................433
Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power .............................................................................. 438
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input ......................................................440
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input ................................................................ 442
Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements .............................................................................................444
Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements ..............................................................446
Appendix O Intrinsically Safe I/O ................................................................................................... 449
Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator ........................................................................................................451
Intrinsically Safe Carrier Extenders ....................................................................................................... 452
Appendix P Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware ................................................. 455
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 459
Units Used in This Manual .................................................................................................................... 459
Acronyms Used in This Manual ............................................................................................................ 460
Terms Used in This Manual .................................................................................................................. 461

Index ................................................................................................................................................465

vi
Welcome

Preface

Welcome
Welcome to the Emerson Process Management DeltaV digital automation system. The
DeltaV system offers easy-to-install hardware and powerful, user-friendly software for
advanced process control scaled to the system size you need

About This Manual

This manual is designed to help you install your DeltaV system and get it started up
quickly. It is divided into three chapters, 15 appendices, a glossary, and an index.

Chapter 1, Overview, provides general information on the DeltaV system hardware.


Chapter 2, Installing Your DeltaV System, provides recommendations for system
installation preparation, lists the required tools, provides a brief description of the
steps required for system installation, and includes detailed instructions and
diagrams for system installation.
Chapter 3, Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System, provides
guidelines to help ensure that your system is installed properly and to help you
troubleshoot hardware problems.
The Appendices include specifications, wiring diagrams, and other detailed
information on the system devices.
The Glossary defines the units, abbreviations, and terms used in this manual. A more
complete glossary can be found in the DeltaV Books Online.

Related Documentation

The Release Notes KBA has important updates for system installation.

Books Online contains a System Administration and Maintenance manual for help in
troubleshooting and the Installing Your DeltaV Zone 1 Intrinsically Safe Hardware manual.

The Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV Automation Systems contains instructions for properly
preparing your site for electrical power and grounding.

The Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Digital Automation System manual contains important
information about installing a fieldbus system.

The Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual contains
information about installing DeltaV SIS hardware.

Refer to Chapter 3 for information on locating Hazardous Area Installation manuals,


NAMUR NE 21 Installation manuals and ATEX Instruction sheets.

vii
Welcome

Assumptions

It is assumed that you have read the Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV Automation Systems
and have followed the instructions for properly preparing your site for electrical power and
grounding before installing your DeltaV system. The Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV
Automation Systems is available from your Emerson Process Management representative or
sales office.

This manual, Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System, shows factory tested and
supported wiring connections. If your system requires a different configuration, contact
your Emerson Process Management representative or sales office for help with design or
review. It is assumed that all installation and maintenance procedures described in this
document are performed by qualified personnel and that the equipment is used only for
the purposes described

Conventions

WARNING!
A warning describes a critical procedure that must be followed to prevent a safety risk or
equipment damage.

CAUTION!
A caution describes a procedure that must be followed to prevent equipment malfunction.

Note
A note is a procedure, condition, or statement that will help you understand and operate your
system.

viii
Overview

1 Overview
Topics covered in this chapter:
The DeltaV System
DeltaV System Equipment

This chapter provides general information on the DeltaV system hardware. Refer to the
appendices for specifications and guidelines.

The DeltaV System


The DeltaV automation system consists of the following components:

One or more I/O subsystems that process information from field devices
One or more controllers that perform local control and manage data and
communications between the I/O subsystem and the Control Network
Power supplies
One or more workstations that provide a graphical user interface to the process
A Control Network that provides communication between system nodes

Figure 1-1 shows an overview diagram of the DeltaV system.

Figure 1-1: DeltaV System Overview Diagram

1
Overview

DeltaV System Equipment


The DeltaV system uses DIN rail-mounted interconnecting carriers and components that
are designed for installation in an enclosure. The carriers provide power and
communication connections. The I/O subsystem and the controllers are modular; they
simply plug onto the carriers for installation. DeltaV system equipment consists of:

Power Controller Carriers and I/O Interface Carriers that mount horizontally or
vertically on DIN rails. The number in the carrier name (such as 8-wide I/O interface
carrier) refers to the number of slots available for connecting the equipment to the
carrier. Refer to Appendix B for carrier specifications and to Appendix M for
information on vertical carriers.
LocalBus that consists of an internal power bus on the Power Controller Carrier,
busses on the associated I/O interface carriers, and connecting cables. The LocalBus
supplies power to the controller and the I/O subsystem and provides
communications connections between cards. System power (12 VDC) can be shared
along the length of the LocalBus. The length of the LocalBus, including all cabling,
cannot exceed 6.5 m (21.3 ft.). The LocalBus at this length can support eight, 8-wide
carriers, two, 2-wide carriers, and three carrier extenders. The length requirement is
the same for vertically mounted systems.

Figure 1-2: LocalBus

DeltaV I/O subsystem that includes I/O terminal blocks and I/O cards. Terminal
blocks snap onto the I/O interface carrier to provide screw terminations for field
wiring. I/O cards snap over the I/O terminal block on the carrier and convert field
signals to a digital format for control and communications. You can install the I/O

2
Overview

terminal blocks and connect field wiring before installing the other devices, thus
reducing installation and maintenance costs. Many of the DeltaV Series 2 cards
support redundancy. Series 2, redundant capable cards are configured, autosensed,
upgraded, and operated just like the pre-Series 2 cards. Series 2 simplex cards can
function as drop-in replacements for pre-Series 2 simplex cards of the same type.
Refer to Appendix C for more information on the I/O subsystem.
DeltaV Controller that performs local control and manages communication
between the I/O subsystem and the Control Network. It mounts on the right slot of
the 2-wide Power Controller carrier for horizontal installations and to the right of a
power supply on the 4-wide Power Controller carrier for vertical installations. You
can add an additional controller for controller redundancy. Refer to Appendix D for
DeltaV controller specifications.
DeltaV system power. The DeltaV system supports a system power supply (AC/DC)
and a system power supply (Dual DC/DC) as well as an Intrinsically Safe system
power supply. Refer to Appendix J for system power guidelines.
DeltaV Workstations that provide graphical user interfaces to help you configure
your system, perform extensive diagnostic checks, operate your process, and gather
reporting and historical data. The DeltaV System Identifier, shipped in your License
Pack, is a connector that plugs into the parallel printer port or Universal Serial Bus
(USB) on your ProfessionalPLUS workstation. It gives each DeltaV system a unique
identification that allows you to install or download changes to the system. The
system identifier is not required for the system to continue running or to restart the
system after it has been running. Refer to Appendix F for workstation specifications.
Fault-tolerant server that provides fault-tolerance through redundancy of the
major hardware sub-systems. The fault-tolerant server can be used as the hardware
platform for DeltaV Application stations. Refer to Appendix F for information on the
fault-tolerant server.
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) that backs up the DeltaV controller and the
DeltaV workstations during short-term power outages. The UPS allows the
controller and workstations to continue operating and to maintain current process
data when AC main power is down.
Bulk power supplies supply power to the system or to field devices. Power to the
system is isolated from power to field devices. Refer to Appendix H for legacy bulk
power supply specifications.

Related information

I/O Cards
System Power Guidelines
Workstation and Server Specifications
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

DeltaV Control Network


The Control Network is an isolated Ethernet local area network (LAN) that provides
communication between the controllers and workstations. It uses standard Ethernet hubs
and switches for communications connections. An optional 10Base-T/100Base-TX switch
can be added for networks with more than 20 controllers and 32 nodes.

3
Overview

The Control Network is dedicated to the DeltaV system. A separate Ethernet interface is
provided via the DeltaV ProfessionalPLUS and Application Station to connect the DeltaV
system to a plant-wide LAN. The primary way to connect a plant LAN to the DeltaV system
is through either or both the ProfessionalPLUS and Application station. The only way to run
non-DeltaV applications (other than Microsoft Excel) is through a DeltaV Application
Station.

CAUTION!
Connecting unapproved non-DeltaV equipment to the DeltaV Control Network can cause
unpredictable operation of the system.

The DeltaV Control Network has been designed to be redundant for communications
reliability. The Control Network is composed of Primary and Secondary communication
channels that are implemented with separate Ethernet NIC cards as well as separate
network hubs and switches for each channel.

Standard Category 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable must be used for Control
Networks with distances of up to 100 meters (328 feet) between Ethernet ports. Refer to
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules for cable specifications. For distances
of up 2 kilometers (6562 feet) between Ethernet ports, 19 inch rack-mounted switches
with a fiber-optic interface or small form factor switches with fiber-optic ports can be used.
Refer to DeltaV Fiber Switches for information on a small form factor switch with fiber-
optic ports. Be sure to specify the fiber-optic option when ordering the 19 inch rack-
mounted switch. Also, fiber-optic communication channels are preferable when:

Possible electromagnetic noise interference might exist and standard cable does not
provide sufficient protection.
Ground isolation and protection from near lightning strikes are required for building
to building communication links.

The following sections contain network diagrams that provide an overview of possible
network configurations for DeltaV systems. Refer to Appendix G Control Network
Specifications for detailed installation diagrams and instructions including requirements
for Ethernet shield orientations, rules for connecting switches in cascade and star
topologies, identification of fiber-optic and twisted pair cable connectors, switch
configuration, and other important installation requirements.

If your DeltaV system consists of one workstation and one controller only, you can connect
the DeltaV network without using a hub. The cable must be routed directly from the
workstation to the controller. Figure 1-3 shows an example of a no hub system. Refer to
Appendix G Control Network Specifications for the cable pinouts in a no hub system.

4
Overview

Figure 1-3: No Hub System Example

Note
The no-hub cable is for systems with no Control Network Hub. Its wiring is different from that of the
standard Ethernet cables used with DeltaV Control Network Hubs.

Figure 1-4: Control Network Example (2 nodes)

5
Overview

Figure 1-5: Control Network Example (8 nodes)

Related information

Control Network Specifications


Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
DeltaV Fiber Switches

DeltaV Remote Network


The DeltaV Remote Network is an Ethernet 10/100BaseT local area network (LAN) that
provides communications between remote workstations and the DeltaV system. The
DeltaV Remote Network can be a dedicated LAN that contains only DeltaV remote
workstations, or it can be the plant-wide LAN that contains other personal computers or
ethernet devices such as printers. A DeltaV Remote Network uses one or more Ethernet
hubs or switches for communications connections. A router must be used to minimize
network traffic between the plant-wide LAN and the DeltaV system.

The DeltaV Remote Network is connected to the DeltaV system through a DeltaV
Application Station or the ProfessionalPLUS workstation running DeltaV Remote Access
Services (RAS) server. To support the engineering applications and the DeltaV Guardian
application on remote workstations and to upload displays from any workstation, the
remote network must also be connected to the ProfessionalPLUS workstation. To support
accessing batch data or to control batches from any workstation, the remote network
must also be connected to the Application station.

6
Overview

Note
The Application Station and ProfessionalPLUS nodes are not automatically designated as remote
servers during the installation process. If you enable remote network redundancy for your remote
nodes when you configure the workstation in DeltaV Explorer, you must also enable remote network
redundancy (in DeltaV Explorer) for the ProfessionalPLUS and any of the Application Station nodes
that are connected to the remote network. If remote network redundancy is not enabled, you will be
unable to view the data remotely if the Primary network connection is lost.

The DeltaV Remote Network can be simplex or redundant. Additional Ethernet interface
cards, separate from the control network interfaces, can be added to the Application
Station and ProfessionalPLUS workstations to support the DeltaV Remote Network.

The wiring and installation for the remote network should follow the same guidelines as
the control network.

The remote network is also designed to support various network connectivity options,
such as Microwave or leased line type connections as well as standard direct LAN
connections. When using a slow network link option, remote workstations can be
connected through a Remote Application Station. The Remote Application Station is
connected through an Application Station on the DeltaV Control Network. This type of
connection increases communication performance through the slow network link.

There are many possible remote network layouts for various system sizes and connection
options. Figure 1-6 shows a remote network dedicated to the DeltaV system. Both the
Application Station and the ProfessionalPLUS workstation are functioning as RAS servers.
Appendix G contains information on other switches supported by the DeltaV system.

7
Overview

Figure 1-6: Dedicated Remote Network

Remote operator station Remote operator station Remote operator station


Primary
remote Secondary
network remote
network

Cisco 2950 Cisco 2950


twisted pair switch twisted pair switch

Operator Operator
Primary
Pro Plus station station App station
control
network Secondary
control
network
Cisco 2950 Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch twisted pair switch

Figure 1-7 shows the use of a router to minimize network traffic between the DeltaV
system and a remote plant LAN. Both the Application Station and the ProfessionalPLUS
workstation are functioning as RAS servers. Appendix G contains information on other
switches supported by the DeltaV system.

8
Overview

Figure 1-7: Remote Plant-Wide LAN Connected to a DeltaV System

Remote Remote
operator operator
station station
Plant LAN

Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch

Router
Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch

Primary Operator Operator


control Pro Plus station station App station
network

Cisco 2950 Cisco 2950


twisted pair switch twisted pair switch

Secondary
control network

Related information

Control Network Specifications


Wiring Guidelines

9
Overview

10
Installing Your DeltaV System

2 Installing Your DeltaV System


Topics covered in this chapter:
CE Statement
Important Information about Hazardous Live Voltages
Installation Planning
Installing the System

This chapter provides detailed instructions and diagrams for system installation. It includes
recommendations for planning the installation and provides a brief overview of the steps
required for system installation.

This chapter describes installations that are mounted vertically on horizontal carriers. For
installations that are mounted on vertical carriers, refer to Appendix M.

For Class I Division 2 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Scalable Process System,
Class I Division 2 Installation Instructions, (12P1293) on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD.

For Zone 2 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Scalable Process System, Zone 2
Installation Instructions, (12P2046) on the DeltaV Documentation Library DVD.

For NAMUR NE 21 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Digital Automation System
Namur NE 21 Installation Instructions, (12P2822) on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD.

For Marine Certified DeltaV installations, refer to the following installation requirements.
These requirements allow the DeltaV system to support the reduced EMC interference
requirements at the Marine Navigation Frequencies. Marine certification is approved for 24
V powered systems only. For additional requirements and for a list of the specific DeltaV
equipment that is approved for marine installation, refer to the specific certifying agency.

For all exposed deck locations:

Install the DeltaV system in an IP66/NEMA 4 enclosure with EMC-reduction shielding


(15 dB minimum) such as the Stahl Series 8125/8126 enclosures. The Stahl Series
8125/8126 enclosures are Emerson Alliance Program products.
Include an EMC power line filter such as a Tyco S series or equivalent on all DC input
leads at the DeltaV system's enclosure with the filter grounded at the enclosure.

For non-exposed deck locations:

Install the DeltaV system in an enclosure suitable for your environment with EMC-
reduction shielding (15 dB minimum).
Include an EMC power line filter such as a Tyco S Series or equivalent on all DC input
leads at the DeltaV system's enclosure with the filter grounded at the enclosure.

11
Installing Your DeltaV System

Note
All electrical installations must conform to applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
All installation and maintenance procedures described in this document must be performed by
qualified personnel and all equipment must be used only for the purposes described. If the
equipment is used in a manner not specified, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.

Related information

DeltaV Vertical Carriers

CE Statement
Note
This manual describes installation and maintenance procedures for products that have been tested
to be in compliance with appropriate CE directives. To maintain compliance, these products must be
installed and maintained according to the procedures described in this document. Failure to follow
the procedures may compromise compliance.

Important Information about Hazardous Live


Voltages
WARNING!
The AC input and output I/O cards and carriers may have hazardous live voltages present on the
input or output terminals. These devices switch or sense the presence of 120 VAC or 250 VAC
field power. Ensure that proper safety precautions, such as de-energizing field power, are
observed during installation, maintenance, or any time wiring changes are made to any of the
following devices:
KJ4001X1-BE1: 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier
KJ4002X1-BA1 and BB1: Left and Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carriers
KJ4003X1- BA1 and BB1: Left and Right VerticalPLUS Carriers
KJ3207X1: Series 2 AC input Cards
KJ3209X1 and KJ3210X1: Series 2 AC output cards
KJ4001X1-CA1: I/O Terminal Block
KJ4001X1-CB1: Fused I/O Terminal block

Installation Planning
The appendices in this manual contain reference information to help you plan system
installation.

Appendix A Environmental Specifications

12
Installing Your DeltaV System

Appendix B Carrier Specifications


Appendix C Interface Specifications
Appendix D Controller Specifications
Appendix E System Power Supply Specifications
Appendix F Workstation and Server Specifications
Appendix G Control Network Specifications
Appendix H Bulk Power Supply Specifications
Appendix I Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
Appendix J System Power Guidelines
Appendix K Bussed Field Power Guidelines
Appendix L Controller Redundancy
Appendix M DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Appendix N Installation Worksheets
Appendix O Intrinsically Safe I/O

Tools Required for Installation


You need the following tools to install a DeltaV system:

Standard electrical tools (voltmeter, wire cutter, wire stripper, pliers, screwdriver)
Standard installation tools (screwdrivers, drill with standard bits)
Ethernet cable tools (crimper, cable tester)

Please see the workstation instructions for information on the tools needed to install the
workstation and its peripherals.

Site Preparation
Properly designed and installed power distribution, ground networks, and signal wiring are
part of site preparation and are extremely important for optimum DeltaV system
operation. Even the best control system can only perform as well as the electrical
foundation on which it is built. Clean input power, single-point grounding, and adequate
shielding from outside electrical interference are a must.

Power distribution, ground networks, and signal wiring should be installed before the
system is installed. Use the manual, Site Preparation and Design for DeltaV Digital
Automation Systems, as your resource for proper site preparation. This manual is included
on the DeltaV Documentation Library disk, on the DeltaV WebCD, and on the Foundation
Support website. It can also be ordered separately as a printed manual.

This manual, Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System, provides details for installing
specific DeltaV products including specific designation of wiring terminals. It also shows
some power, ground, and signal wiring, but these are shown for reference only. Always
refer to the site preparation manual for details on power, ground, and signal wiring, not
the installation manual. Always refer to the installation manual for information on
installing DeltaV hardware.

13
Installing Your DeltaV System

Note
Some images in this manual show bullet style wiring connections. This style is used for reference only
and splicing wires into wires to emulate bullet connections is never recommended by Emerson
Process Management. Always use terminal-to-terminal wiring as shown in the Site Preparation and
Design for DeltaV Digital Automation Systems manual.

Wiring Guidelines
The power and grounding terminals and field termination points on the I/O subsystem and
the system power supplies are designed to accept 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) stranded or solid
wire. To select wire, calculate the maximum current limit expected for each wire. Local
electrical codes define the wire size required for a specific current.

Shielded twisted pair wiring is recommended for low-level signal wiring to reduce
susceptibility to noise. You can order an I/O carrier with a shield bar (to terminate the
shields from field wiring) or without a shield bar (where termination is not necessary).

Power Guidelines
The removable connectors on the System Power Supplies and legacy Bulk Power Supplies
are not designed to interrupt current flow in circuits under load and can be damaged if
used for this purpose. If you need to disconnect power, use a separate component such as
a knife blade fuse terminal block or breaker that is designed for this purpose. Multiple
manufacturers make knife blade fuse terminal blocks that provide a disconnect function
and fusing for the supply. If you use a fuse or breaker in the disconnect circuit, size it
appropriately for the load.

Torque Limits
When you install the DIN rails and DeltaV equipment, do not exceed the maximum torque
limits for the mounting screws.

Table 2-1: Maximum Torque Limits on Mounting Screws

Item Torque Limit on Mounting Screw(s)


Bulk power supply 2.84 Nm (25 in- 2.84 Nm (25 in-lb)
lb)
DIN rail latching 1.32 Nm (12 in-lb)
DIN rail stop 0.9 Nm (8 in-lb)
I/O terminal block field terminations 0.45 Nm (4 in-lb)
I/O terminal block protection cover 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)
I/O card 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)
Controller 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)
Media Converter 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)
System Power Supply 0.11 Nm (1 in-lb)

14
Installing Your DeltaV System

Getting Started with DeltaV Hardware


This section provides a brief description of the steps required for system installation.
Specific information on installation steps 17 is included in this chapter. Specific
information on step 8 is included in the topic "Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your
DeltaV System". The appendices in this manual include product specifications and detailed
information. Refer to Appendix M for information on installing DeltaV hardware on vertical
carriers.

The following steps for installation are listed in the most common order. You can elect to
perform these steps in another order that is more convenient for your project.

CAUTION!
The DeltaV I/O Cards and Controller must be mounted vertically on the horizontal carrier for
cooling purposes.

1. Install the DIN rails and DeltaV Carriers.

a. Install the DIN rails.


b. Install the power/controller carrier and I/O interface carrier on the DIN rails.
2. Install the DeltaV I/O Interface.

a. Check the key settings on the I/O terminal blocks and install them on the I/O
interface carrier.
b. Connect field wiring.
c. Install the I/O cards on the I/O interface carrier.
3. Install the DeltaV Controller.

a. Install the controller on the power/controller carrier.


4. Install the DeltaV System Power Supply.

a. Install the system power supply on the power/controller carrier.


b. Connect the supply inputs. Refer to Appendix J for more information on the
system power supply.
5. Install the DeltaV Workstation and Servers.

a. Follow the instructions supplied with your workstation and Server.


b. Install the system identifier.
c. Follow the instructions supplied with your printer and UPS
6. Set up the DeltaV Control Network.

a. Install the hub or switch.


b. Install the network cables between nodes.
7. Connect power to the system and power up.

a. Install the bulk power supply and connect the supply inputs.
b. Power up the system.

15
Installing Your DeltaV System

8. Check out the installation.

a. Check cable connections.


b. Check power supply voltages.
c. Check indicators on the devices and cards.
d. Test field wiring connections.
9. Read the manual Getting Started with your DeltaV Digital Automation System for
information on the software applications for the DeltaV system.

Related information

DeltaV Vertical Carriers


Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
System Power Guidelines
Installing Your DeltaV System

Installing the System


The DeltaV system is designed for installation in an enclosure suitable for the location in
which the equipment is installed.

The following sections describe how to:

Install the DIN rails and carriers


Connect bussed field power
Install the DeltaV I/O interface, Controller, System Power Supply, Workstations, and
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Setup the DeltaV Control Network
Connect power to the system
Setup the DeltaV Remote Network
Setup a Network Time Server

Installing the DIN Rails and Carriers


The power/controller carriers and 8-wide I/O interface carriers install on standard 35 mm
(1.38 in.) T- or G-type DIN rails. If you use T-type rails, use the heavier (15mm-deep) rails
because they better accommodate the weight distribution of DeltaV equipment. The
optional carrier shield bar provides a connection point for field shield wires for the I/O
interface carrier. You cannot connect a vertical carrier to a horizontal carrier or a horizontal
carrier to a vertical carrier. You must choose one carrier configuration. Refer to Appendix
M DeltaV Vertical Carriers for information on installing vertical DIN rails and carriers.

CAUTION!
The DeltaV I/O Cards and Controller must be installed vertically on the horizontal carrier for
cooling purposes.

16
Installing Your DeltaV System

Related information

DeltaV Vertical Carriers

DIN Rail Recommendations


Figure 2-1 shows suggested spacing for DIN rail installation on your mounting surface. To
avoid clearance problems with the heads of mounting screws, avoid using screws at the
following locations, as shown in Figure 2-2

An area 1.3 cm (0.5 in.) wide, centered 4.5 cm (1.75 in.) from the left side of a 2-
wide power/controller carrier.
An area 1.3 cm (0.5 in.) wide, centered 8.3 cm (3.25 in.) from either side of an 8-
wide I/O interface carrier.

If more than one carrier is needed, connect carriers end-to-end on one rail or stack them
on separate rails by using a DeltaV LocalBus Cable. Refer to Appendix B for carrier
specifications.

Figure 2-1: DIN Rail Installation

17
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-2: Screw Clearance Guidelines for DIN Rail Mounting

Related information

Carrier Specifications

Installing the 2-Wide Power Controller Carrier


To install the 2-wide power/controller carrier

Refer to Figure 2-3.

1. Install the DIN rail at the appropriate location.


2. Connect each power/controller carrier to any adjacent carriers by sliding the 48-pin
connectors on the sides of the carriers together.
3. Turn the screws counter-clockwise on the power/controller carrier to disengage the
latch. Place the carrier on the rail and tighten the screws clockwise to latch.

Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the upper and lower screws are for T-rail
mounting.

18
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-3: 2-Wide Power/Controller Carrier Installation

Note
2-wide carriers should be installed to the left of any 8-wide carriers.

Installing the 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier


To install the 8-wide I/O interface carrier

Refer to Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-4: 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier Installation

19
Installing Your DeltaV System

1. Install the DIN rail at the appropriate location.


2. Connect each I/O interface carrier to any adjacent carriers by sliding together the
48-pin connectors on the sides of the carriers.
3. Turn the screws counter-clockwise on the I/O interface carrier to disengage the
latch. Place the carrier on the rail and tighten the screws clockwise to latch. The
middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the upper and lower screws are for T-
rail mounting.
4. If you are installing I/O interface carriers on separate rails, connect them with the
LocalBus cable from the 48-pin connector on the right side of one carrier to the 48-
pin connector on the left side of the next carrier.
5. Install the carrier ground wiring as shown in Figure 2-5.

Note
The figures in this manual depict a DeltaV system that occupies a single enclosure and show
the carrier shield bar connected to an isolated common ground reference. If multiple
enclosures are used, connect the carrier shield bar to the enclosure frame. Refer to the Site
Preparation Guide for DeltaV Automation Systems for detailed information on system
grounding.

CAUTION!
The screw connection labeled DC Reference Ground in Figure 2-5 is to be used for
reference ground only. Do not use the other three connections.

Figure 2-5shows the carrier ground wiring diagram for the System Power Supplies.

20
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-5: Carrier Ground Wiring Diagram Example 1


Isolated Common
Ground Reference

Dedicated Plant
Ground Grid Point

DC Reference Ground

2-Wide
Power/
Controller 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier
Carrier

Optional Carrier Shield Bar Connect to


Shield Bar on
Next I/O Carrier

Connecting Bussed Field Power


The carrier type determines how bussed field power is provided. The bussed field power
connectors on the horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers differ from those on the
VerticalPLUS carriers. The following section explains how to connect bussed field power to
the three carrier types. Refer to Appendix M for additional information on vertical carriers.

Horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers

Each pair of slots on the Legacy Vertical and horizontal I/O carriers have four screw
terminals for bussed field power. Two of the terminals are for the supply connection and
two of the terminals are for the supply return connection.

Each bussed field power connection routes power to two adjacent I/O cards. You can use a
different bulk power supply for each bussed field power connection or you can extend
power to another pair of I/O cards.

The bussed field power connection provides power to two adjacent I/O cards to power
field devices. Cards 1 and 2 are paired together and must use the same field voltage level.
Similarly, cards 3 and 4 must use the same field voltage level, although this level can be
different from cards 1 and 2.

21
Installing Your DeltaV System

VerticalPLUS Carriers

Each slot on the VerticalPLUS carrier has four screw terminals for bussed field power. Two
of the terminals are for the + field power connection and two of the terminals are for the -
field power connection. Refer to "Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers"
for the bussed field power terminal assignments.

Each bussed field power connection routes power to one slot. You can use a different
power source for each bussed field power connection or you can extend power to another
slot. Jumpers are pre installed at the factory to extend field power to slots 1-4. With these
jumpers installed, the I/O cards installed in slots 1-4 must use the same field voltage level.
Similarly, slots 5-8 have jumpers pre installed at the factory to extend field power to slots
5-8 and the I/O cards installed in slots 5-8 must use the same field voltage level. It is
recommended that you use a separate power feed to each field power connector. A field
power connector is the connector that connects to a bank of four I/O cards.

CAUTION!
Ensure that the bussed field power connection to each carrier slot is correct for the card being
installed in the slot. Card damage can result if there is a mismatch between the field power
voltage at the carrier slot and the card installed in the slot.

Related information

DeltaV Vertical Carriers


Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers

Extending Bussed Field Power


Note
The decision to extend bussed field power depends on plant standards and procedures. However, if
separate power supplies, breakers, or shutdown switches are required, it is not recommended that
bussed field power be extended.

For all carrier types, supply the same voltage at bussed field power to all cards on a carrier
whenever possible. Supply clean bussed field power to the I/O carriers and use inductive
noise reduction techniques on I/O signals. Refer to Appendix K for bussed field power
guidelines.

WARNING!
If more than one bussed power source is used, place a label near the bussed field power
connectors containing the following English and French statements: WARNING: MORE THAN
ONE LIVE CIRCUIT. SEE INSTALLATION DIAGRAM. AVERTISSEMENT: CT EQUIPMENT
RENFERME PLUSIEURS CICUITS SOUS TENSION. VOIR LE SCHMA DINSTALLATION.

22
Installing Your DeltaV System

Extending Bussed Field Power to Horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers

This section explains how to extend bussed field power to the horizontal and Legacy
Vertical carriers. For VerticalPLUS carriers, refer to the Extending Bussed Field Power to
VerticalPLUS Carriers topic.

Bussed field power can be extended to horizontal carriers and Legacy Vertical carriers if the
addition of the next two I/O cards does not exceed the 6.5 A rating of the connection to
the source. Figure 2-6 shows the screw terminal assignments on the bussed field power
connector on horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers.

WARNING!
For Legacy Vertical and horizontal carriers, field power for one I/O card can be extended to
additional pairs of I/O cards only if they have the same field voltage requirements.

WARNING!
If extending bussed field power to Legacy Vertical and horizontal carriers, removing the
connector will remove power from all extended connectors.

Figure 2-6: Bussed Field Power Connector on Horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers

Keys supplied with the two-part connector on the horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers
prevent damage to the cards if an incorrect power source is connected after the cards are
installed. Install the keys in each field power connector based on the power source you

23
Installing Your DeltaV System

connect to that connector. Because bussed field power can be supplied separately to each
half of a connector, make sure you install keys in each side. As an example, Figure 2-7
shows bussed field power keying connections for horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers
for 120 VAC only.

Figure 2-7: Bussed Field Power Keying Connections for 120 VAC Only

You can set up any standard that meets your needs for the keying scheme. Figure 2-8
shows an example keying scheme.

24
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-8: Bussed Field Power Keying Scheme Example for Horizontal and Legacy
Vertical Carriers

Note
This connector can be used for both DC and AC power.

Wire the bulk power supply for bussed field power

The following information pertains to horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers. For
VerticalPLUS carriers refer to Appendix M.

If the bussed field power supplies one pair of I/O cards only and is not extended to
additional I/O cards, connect wiring to the assigned screw terminal connection on
the top of the I/O interface carrier as shown in Figure 2-9.

Note
You might prefer to remove the screw terminal connector to install wiring and replace it on
the I/O interface carrier after wiring is installed.

Figure 2-9: Bussed Field Power Wiring Diagram

25
Installing Your DeltaV System

If the bussed field power is extended to additional I/O cards, connect wiring to the
assigned screw terminal connection on the top of the I/O interface carrier as shown
in Figure 2-10.

WARNING!
When power is extended, removing the connector will break the connection between the
power supply and downstream devices.

Figure 2-10: Bussed Field Power Wiring Diagram (Extended Power)

Refer to Appendix J for power supply overviews.

Related information

Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers


Bussed Field Power Guidelines

Installing Extender Cables


This section applies to horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers. For VerticalPLUS carriers,
refer to Extending LocalBus Power to Other Carriers.

When carriers are installed on separate DIN rails, extender cables are used to extend
LocalBus power. Extender cables connect to one-wide carriers on the left and right sides of
the 2-wide and 8-wide carriers.

Note
The 8-wide carriers must be left-aligned when using extender cables.

A standard installation uses one extender cable; however, dual extender cables can also be
used. The following procedure is for a standard installation that uses one carrier extender
cable.

To install carrier extender cables

26
Installing Your DeltaV System

1. Install the right and left-side one-wide extender cable carriers by sliding together the
48 pin connectors on the sides of the carriers.
2. Connect the 44-pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the top D-
shell connector labeled A on the right-side carrier and fasten the retainer screws.
3. Connect the 44-pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the top D-
shell connector labeled A on the left-side carrier and fasten the retainer screws.

Related information

Extending LocalBus Power to Other Carriers

Installing the DeltaV I/O Interface


To install the I/O interface, install the I/O terminal blocks on the I/O interface carrier and
connect field wiring to the I/O terminal blocks. Next, install the I/O cards on the I/O
interface carrier. The steps for installing both simplex and redundant terminal blocks are
discussed in the following procedures.

Refer to Appendix C for interface specifications and to Appendix M for information on


installing the I/O interface on vertical carriers.

Related information

DeltaV Vertical Carriers


Interface Specifications

Installing an I/O Terminal Block


1. Check the key settings on the corresponding I/O card, and set the keys on the I/O
terminal block to match.
2. Locate the assigned slot location on the I/O interface carrier. Place the tabs on the
back of the I/O terminal block through the slots on the carrier and push the I/O
terminal block up to lock it into place as shown in the following figure.

27
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-11: I/O Terminal Block Installation

3. Connect field wiring for the I/O terminal block as shown in Figure 2-12 or in the I/O
card wiring diagrams in Appendix C Interface Specifications.

Note
Field wiring connections are specific to the I/O card type associated with the I/O terminal
block.

28
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-12: I/O Terminal Block Channel Assignments

Note
The channel assignments in the preceding image pertain to the I/O terminal block, the fused
I/O terminal block, and the 4-wire terminal block. For all other terminal block applications,
refer to Appendix C Interface Specifications.

Related information

I/O Interface Keying


Interface Specifications

Installing an I/O Card

WARNING!
Before installing a card in a carrier slot, ensure that the bussed field power voltage at the slot
matches the field power requirements for the card. Card damage can result during installation
if there is a mismatch between the field power voltage at a carrier slot and the card installed in
the slot.

Refer to Figure 2-13.

1. Locate the assigned slot on the I/O interface carrier.

WARNING!
I/O cards are designed to be installed on terminal blocks. If you temporarily install a card
on the carrier without a terminal block, be sure to carefully align the pins on the card
with the connector on the carrier to prevent damage to the pins.

29
Installing Your DeltaV System

2. Align the connectors on the I/O card with the connectors on the I/O carrier and the
I/O terminal block and push to attach
3. Tighten the mounting screw.

Figure 2-13: I/O Card Installation

Installing a Redundant Terminal Block


Read the information in DeltaV Series 2 I/O before installing a redundant terminal block.

1. Check the key settings on the corresponding Series 2 cards and set the keys on the
terminal block to match. Refer to I/O Interface Keying for information on key
settings.
2. Locate the assigned slot location on the I/O interface carrier. Remember that the
lower slot number must be odd and the upper slot number must be the next higher
even number. Place the tabs on the back of the I/O terminal block through the slots
on the carrier and push the I/O terminal block up to lock it into place.
3. Connect the field wiring for the redundant I/O terminal blocks as shown in the Series
2 card wiring diagrams and redundant terminal block figures in Appendix C Interface
Specifications.

Related information

I/O Interface Keying


Interface Specifications
DeltaV Series 2 I/O

30
Installing Your DeltaV System

Installing a Redundant I/O Card


A redundant I/O card consists of two Series 2 cards installed in a redundant terminal block.
Read DeltaV Series 2 I/O before installing a redundant I/O card.

1. Locate the assigned slots on the I/O interface carrier.


2. Align the connectors on the I/O card with the connectors on the I/O carrier and the
redundant I/O terminal block and push to attach.
3. Tighten the mounting screws.

Related information

DeltaV Series 2 I/O

Installing the DeltaV Controller


For simplex controller systems, the controller mounts on the right slot of the 2-wide
power/controller carrier. Refer to Appendix D for controller specifications. For redundant
controller systems, refer to Appendix L Controller Redundancy.

Note
You can use an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to back up the controller power during short-
term power outages. The UPS allows the controller to continue operating and to maintain current
process data even when AC main power is down. Refer to Appendix D Controller Specifications for
installation information. Refer to the UPS manufacturers specifications for all other UPS information.

1. Align the connectors on the back of the controller with the connectors on the right
slot of the 2-wide power/controller carrier and push to attach.
2. Tighten the mounting screw.

31
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-14: Controller Installation

Related information

Controller Specifications
Controller Redundancy

Installing the DeltaV System Power Supply


The system power supply takes line power or power from a bulk power supply and
converts it to 12 VDC power to drive the controller and I/O cards. The system power supply
mounts on either slot of the 2-wide power/controller carrier. For mounting on a 4-wide
power/controller carrier refer to Appendix M DeltaV Vertical Carriers.

This section describes the connections for a simplex system power supply. Refer to
Appendix E System Power Supply Specifications for system power supply specifications
and for details on redundancy.

Refer to the figures following the steps for more information.

1. Connect the input supply wires to the input power connection on the top of the
system power supply. Figure 2-15 shows input supply wiring for the system power
supply (AC/DC). Figure 2-15 shows the input supply wiring for the system power
supply (Dual DC/DC). If you have secondary system power supplies, connect the
input supply drops to each system power supply as shown in Appendix E System
Power Supply Specifications.

32
Installing Your DeltaV System

WARNING!
Always remove input power to the supply before connecting or disconnecting the input
power connection. The connector should not interrupt current flow and could be
damaged if actuated under a load condition. Refer to Appendix J Power Guidelines for
more information.

Figure 2-15: Simplex Wiring Diagram for System Power Supply (AC/DC)

Refer to Appendix J Power Guidelines for power supply and grounding overviews.

33
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-16: Simplex Wiring Diagram for System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)

2. Install alarm contact wiring as shown in the following figure.

34
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-17: System Power Supply Alarm Contact Wiring (Unpowered


Condition)
Example: Optional
Alarm relay contact First system additional
normally open power supply system
(shelf condition) power supplies

+
DI 24 VDC
isolated card

24 VDC external +
power supply

Note
The alarm relay contact is closed during normal operation. The alarm relay is shown open
(unpowered condition) in the following figure.

3. Align the system power supply with the connector on the 2-wide power/controller
carrier and push to attach, as shown in the following figure. Tighten the mounting
screw.

Figure 2-18: System Power Supply Installation

35
Installing Your DeltaV System

Related information

DeltaV Vertical Carriers


System Power Supply Specifications
Power Guidelines

Installing the DeltaV Workstation


To install the DeltaV Workstation, connect the workstation components, install the DeltaV
System Identifier (one per system), install the printer (if used), and install the UPS (if used).
Connect the workstation and its associated peripherals to one power distribution and
system ground.

After hardware installation, refer to the DeltaV Release Notes KBA for information on
installing DeltaV software on the workstation.

To install the workstation

1. Follow the instructions supplied with your workstation to connect the monitor,
keyboard, and mouse to the central processing unit (CPU). Refer to the
documentation supplied with your workstation for details on the I/O ports
2. If the DeltaV label is not installed on your workstation monitor, apply it to the lower
right corner of the monitor faceplate.

Figure 2-19: Monitor Label Installation

3. Install the system identifier on the parallel printer port or Universal Serial Bus (USB).

36
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-20: Workstation Installation

4. Refer to the documentation supplied with your printer for hardware installation
information.

Installing the DeltaV Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)


The DeltaV UPS backs up the DeltaV Workstation during short-term power outages. The
UPS allows the workstation to continue operating and to maintain current process data
even when AC main power is down.

The UPS must be mounted upright on a level surface, such as a floor or a work surface, for
proper operation. The UPS is not rack-mountable or DIN rail-mountable. We recommend
that you use a separate UPS for each device to provide maximum backup time.

If you use the UPS to provide backup for your workstation, follow the instructions included
with the UPS to connect it to the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and to the monitor. Refer
to Appendix D for UPS specifications.

If you use the UPS to provide backup for your controller, refer to Appendix D Controller
Specifications for installation information.

Note
Refer to the UPS manual for hold time and LED/Alarm indications.

Related information

DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

Setting up the DeltaV Control Network


The standard Control Network is an isolated Ethernet local area network (LAN) that
provides communication between the controllers and workstations. It uses one or more
Ethernet hubs or switches for communications connections. The Control Network is
dedicated to the DeltaV system; no other devices can be attached. A separate Ethernet
interface is provided through the DeltaV Application Station or ProfessionalPLUS to

37
Installing Your DeltaV System

connect the DeltaV system to a plant-wide LAN. To minimize the traffic on the plant-wide
LAN, configure a router to filter the IP addresses. Refer to the DeltaV Books Online for
more information on configuring a router.

This section provides basic hub installation examples and includes cable-specific
information and requirements for installing the Control Network. Appendix G provides
details on cable shield orientations and contains diagrams that show switches connected
in cascade and star topologies, fiber-optic and twisted pair cable connections, and switch
configuration.

To set up the Control Network, install the hub and connect network communication cables
between nodes (controllers and workstations). The hubs can stand alone or can be linked
(cascaded) to other hubs. Each hub is equivalent to a single IEEE 802.3 repeater (1 hop).
The number of hops that are allowed and the maximum distance between each hop varies
with the type of hub and whether the link is 10Mbit or 100Mbit. 10Mbit links allow four
hops and 100Mbit links allow two hops.

If your DeltaV system consists of one workstation and one controller only, you can connect
the DeltaV network without using a hub. The cable must be routed directly from the
workstation to the controller. Figure 2-21 shows an example of a no hub system.

Figure 2-21: No Hub System Example

Note
No-hub cable, also called crossover cable, is for systems with no Control Network Hub. Its wiring is
different from that of the straight-through Ethernet cables used with DeltaV Control Network Hubs.

Related information

Control Network Specifications

Control Network Installation Requirements


The Control Network installer must ensure that the following requirements are met:

All Cat5-Twisted Pair (TP) and fiber-optic cables should be made, installed, and
tested by an experienced LAN installer.
A DeltaV system can have a maximum of four repeater hops on the Control Network
(a maximum of four hubs can be linked together in series). 10Mbit networks allow
four repeater hops and 100Mbit networks allow two repeater hops.
For Cat5 TP cables be sure that:

38
Installing Your DeltaV System

- All cables are made from screened Category 5 cable with a maximum length of
100 m (328 ft) and an insulated conductor diameter of 0.89 to 0.99 mm (0.035
to 0.040 in).
- Straight-through cables are terminated with RJ45 connectors to EIA/TIA 568B
pin-outs at both ends.
- Crossover cables are terminated with RJ45 connectors to 568B pinouts on one
end and 568A pinouts on the opposite end.
- Cables used to cascade hubs and switches have an unshielded connector on one
end and a shielded connector on the opposite end. Refer to Building Twisted
Pair Cable Assemblies.
- Unshielded RJ45 connectors are used at all workstation connections.
- Shielded RJ45 connectors are used at all controller connections and all hub and
switch connections to nodes.
- All cables are tested with the Microtest PentaScannerTM testing tool.
- Ethernet wall outlets, punchdown blocks, and patch panels are not supported.

Fiber-Optic Cables

For fiber-optic cables, use the cable and connector type specified by the equipment
manufacturer for the fiber-optic ports on their equipment. The type of fiber-optic cable
required could be multimode or single-mode and depends on the equipment's port
specifications, the site's physical layout, and the distance between fiber-optic ports from
device to device. The equipment manufacturer also specifies a fiber-optic loss budget. The
acceptable loss per kilometer for the fiber-optic cable can be determined from the loss
budget so that the overall cable loss does not exceed the equipments loss budget. The
loss budget must include all fiber-optic splices and fiber-optic connector losses from end
to end. The following list provides some guidelines for using fiber-optic cable:

A multimode fiber-optic cable is generally used for 100MB/S 100BASE-FX fiber-optic


communications for up to 2 Kilometers and either 50/125 micron or 62.5/125
micron multimode fiber can be used depending upon the equipment
manufacturers specification for the fiber-optic ports. Refer to the manufacturer's
specifications for cable type and loss budget.
A single-mode fiber-optic cable is generally used for 1000MB/S 1000BASE-LX/LH
(gigabit) fiber-optic communications for distances beyond 2 Kilometers and 9/125
micron single-mode fiber can be used depending upon the equipment
manufacturers specification for the fiber-optic ports. Refer to the manufacturer's
specifications for cable type and loss budget.
A multimode fiber-optic cable is generally used for 1000MB/S 1000BASE-SX
(gigabit) fiber-optic communications for distances up to approximately 500 meters
and 50/125 micron or 62.5/125 micron multimode fiber can be used depending
upon the equipment manufacturers specification for the fiber-optic ports. Refer to
the manufacturer's specifications for cable type and loss budget.
Multimode fiber-optic cable has a Modal Bandwidth specification (MHz/km) which is
a distance limiting factor for gigabit communications on multimode fiber. Refer to
the manufacturer's specifications for distances supported for gigabit
communications over multimode fiber.

39
Installing Your DeltaV System

Fiber-optic cables are terminated with ST, SC, MTRJ, or LC connectors depending
upon the physical port that is used on the fiber-optic device. Refer to the
manufacturer's specifications for the fiber-optic port type used on their equipment.
All fiber-optic links should be tested for attenuation (light loss) with an optical power
meter. The entire link, including all assembled cables, connectors and splices from
end to end should be measured. This measurement should not exceed the
equipment manufacturer's loss budget specification and at least a 3dB margin
should be left.

CAUTION!
Substandard cables can create serious communication problems. Make sure all cables meet the
specifications listed in Appendix G Control Network Specifications.

Related information

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies

Install the Control Network Cables


1. Make and test the required Control Network cables. See Appendix G for cable
guidelines and specifications. Select the appropriate cable type on the cable test
tool and follow the detailed instructions in the test tools manual.

You must connect the test equipment to both ends of the cable to test it properly.
The testing tool checks each cable based on its type and issues a Pass or Fail reading.
Make sure the cable passes each test. The tests supported by the Microtest
PentaScanner testing tool include the following:
Cable mapping
Length
Crosstalk
Attenuation
Attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio
Impedance
Loop resistance
Capacitance

CAUTION!
Substandard cables can create serious communication problems. Make sure all cables
meet the specifications listed in Appendix G Control Network Specifications.

2. If you have a simplex Control Network, connect the unshielded end of a network
cable to the twisted pair port on the primary Network Interface Card (NIC) and
connect the shielded end of the cable to the primary hub as shown in the following
figure.

40
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-22: Simplex Control Network Cable Connections

Shielded
connector

Unshielded
connector

Note
For hub-to-hub connections, one end of the cable must have unshielded connectors.

For redundant Control Networks, be sure to verify the NIC binding order to
differentiate between the primary and secondary NICs.

3. If you have a redundant Control Network, connect the unshielded end of a network
cable to the twisted pair port on the workstations primary NIC and connect the
shielded end of the cable to the primary hub as shown in Figure 2-23. Connect
another cable from the twisted pair port on the workstations secondary NIC to the
secondary hub. It is helpful to identify the Control Network cables with color-coded
boots. Emerson Process Management recommends the following conventions: a
yellow color-coded boot for the primary Control Network cable and a black color-
coded boot for the secondary Control Network cable.

Note
Make sure you are consistent in your primary and secondary network connections so they are
not crosswired.

41
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-23: Redundant Control Network Cable Connections

Primary hub

Shielded
connector

Primary NIC
unshielded
Secondary hub connector

Secondary NIC
unshielded connector
Shielded connector

Note
For hub-to-hub connections, one end of the cable must have unshielded connectors

4. Connect network cables from the hub(s) to the RJ45 connectors on the bottom of
each controller. The front connector is for the primary Control Network and the rear
connector is for the secondary Control Network. Refer to the following figure to
locate the connectors.

Figure 2-24: Control Network Cable Connections for a Simplex Controller

Shielded connectors

Secondary Primary

42
Installing Your DeltaV System

Connecting the Control Network to a Plant LAN


A plant LAN can be connected to the DeltaV system through the third Network Interface
Card (NIC) on the Application Station to provide a gateway between the DeltaV Control
Network and other networks. It is highly recommended that you use a firewall such as the
Emerson Smart Firewall to protect the DeltaV network from potential security issues and
to help ensure reliable operations.

To improve the security of the DeltaV system, Emerson recommends that you do not
connect the DeltaV Professional, Operator, and Base workstations to a plant LAN or
gateway. Because the engineering database is on the ProfessionalPLUS station and should
be protected from possible unauthorized external access, Emerson also recommends that
you do not connect the ProfessionalPLUS station to the plant LAN.

The following image shows the recommended network architecture.

Figure 2-25: Plant LAN Network Connections

Connecting Power to the System


The method of connecting power to the DeltaV system depends on your existing power
supply and distribution scheme. A bulk power supply converts AC or DC power to the
power required for the system power supply and, optionally, for field devices.

The following section describes the connections for a simplex bulk power supply. Refer to
Appendix H for bulk power supply specifications and dimensions.

To install a bulk power supply

43
Installing Your DeltaV System

1. Install the bulk power supply. Refer to "Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk
AC to 12 VDC" for dimensions and the drill hole spacing for the mounting plate. The
AC connector terminals use # 6 screws. The bus bar has a 6.7 mm (0.265 in.) hole for
a 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) stud.

CAUTION!
To prevent accidental shorting, cover the positive bus bar with a 2.5 cm (1 in.) piece of
1.9 cm (0.75 in.) heat-shrink tubing.

2. Connect the bulk power supply to input power distribution as shown in the following
figure. If you have secondary bulk power supplies, connect each one to the input
power distribution as shown in Appendix J System Power Guidelines.
3. Install common system supply and ground wiring.

Figure 2-26: Simplex Power and Ground Wiring Diagram for Bulk AC to 12 or
24 VDC Power Supply
Optional Isolation Transformer
L

N Wired to plant power source

G N L
Bulk AC Power
Distribution/UPS

Bulk AC to 12 VDC
or Bulk AC to 24 VDC
Power Supply

G N L
AC Connector

Dedicated
Plant Ground
Grid Point

Isolated
Common
Ground
Reference

Wire and Connector Legend


A G Ground (AC)
B N Neutral (AC)
C L Line (AC) DC Return (Ground) 12 VDC or 24 VDC

Refer to Appendix J for power supply and grounding overviews.

44
Installing Your DeltaV System

Figure 2-27: Simplex Power and Ground Wiring Diagram for Bulk 24 VDC to 12
VDC Power Supply

DC Power
Distribution
Hard Wired to

Plant Power Supply

(+) (-)

Isolated
Common
Ground 24 VDC DC Return Ground
Reference

(+)

(+)

Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC

Dedicated Plant (-)


Power Supply

Ground Grid Point

(-)

12 VDC (+)

Power Return (-)

Related information

DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies


System Power Guidelines
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC

Setting Up the DeltaV Remote Network


Refer to DeltaV Remote Network for overview information and to Appendix G Control
Network Specifications for detailed installation information. To set up the Remote
Network, install the switches for the remote network connections and connect the
network communications cables between the remote workstations and the DeltaV RAS
Applications Stations and ProfessionalPLUS workstation.

Users must assign their own PC names and IP addresses to the remote workstations before
installing DeltaV software. If the remote workstation is already on the plant-wide LAN, it
has been assigned a name and IP address that can be used for communications with the
DeltaV system. If you are building a dedicated DeltaV Remote Network, then workstation
node names and IP addresses must be assigned before the workstations are set up in the

45
Installing Your DeltaV System

DeltaV Explorer. These assigned node names must be used as the workstation names in
the DeltaV Explorer. Refer to the online help for the DeltaV Workstation Configuration
application for information.

The cable installation requirements for the DeltaV Remote Network are the same as the
installation requirements for the DeltaV Control Network. Refer to Control Network
Installation Requirements for cable requirements and to Appendix G Control Network
Specifications for detailed installation information.

Related information

Control Network Specifications


Control Network Installation Requirements
DeltaV Remote Network

Setting Up a Network Time Server


DeltaV supports Symmetricom GPS Network Time Server equipment (consult your
Emerson Process Management representative or sales office for current specifications and
requirements). Refer to the documentation for the GPS network time server for
installation and configuration information. Refer to the next section for the specific
network settings that are required for configuring a GPS network time server for use with a
DeltaV system.

After establishing a serial connection between the setup computer and the GPS network
time server, configure the network and timing parameters. Use the IP addresses and
subnet mask described in the following sections and set up the time server for broadcast
mode.

IP Addresses
The DeltaV system supports both a primary and an optional backup Network Time Server
on the control network. The Network Time Servers can be attached to either the primary
or the secondary control network. It is recommended that the primary Network Time
Server be attached to the primary control network and the backup Network Time Server
be attached to the secondary control network in a redundant control network system. If
the system is simplex (has only a primary control network) attach both Network Time
Servers to the primary control network.

For the primary Network Time Server use the following IP addresses:

10.4.128.1 (for attaching to the primary control network)


10.8.128.1 (for attaching to the secondary control network)

For the backup Network Time Server use the following IP addresses:

10.4.128.2 (for attaching to the primary control network)


10.8.128.2 (for attaching to the secondary control network)

The DeltaV system also supports both a primary and backup Network Time Server on the
DeltaV Remote Network. If you are attaching a Network Time Server to a DeltaV Remote
Network, the IP address is not predefined in the DeltaV system. Your network

46
Installing Your DeltaV System

administrator must assign the Network Time Server a valid IP address for the remote
network segment and this address must be used in the Remote Network properties dialog
box in the DeltaV Explorer.

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask for the Network Time Servers attached to the control network is:

255.254.0.0

The subnet mask for the Network Time Servers attached to the remote network(s) must be
assigned by your network administrator.

The route (default gateway for the devices on a different subnet) is not required.

Broadcast Mode
To work with the DeltaV system, the Network Time Server must be setup for broadcast
mode and the broadcast interval must be set to 16 seconds. Establish a telnet or serial
connection between the setup computer and the Network Time Server and enter the
following sequence of commands at the command shell. (Type the question mark (?) at
any command prompt for a list of command options.)

1. root
2. net
3. ntp
4. broad 8 (this sets the broadcast timer for 16 seconds)
5. bcast
6. show
7. The show command should display the address 255.255.255.255. If it does display
this address, go to the next step. If it does not, enter Add 255.255.255.255.
8. exit

Installing the Fault-Tolerant Server

WARNING!
The Stratus ftServer 4500 fault-tolerant server hardware requires special expertise and
product knowledge. Trained and experienced Stratus personnel should be consulted before
the server is installed and set up. Contact the Emerson Process Management Global Service
Center for assistance before installing your Stratus server.

The Stratus ftServer 4500 can be used as a hardware platform for DeltaV Application
stations. Refer to the current DeltaV Fault-Tolerant server Product Data Sheet for the latest
information on the DeltaV applications supported on this server. The server is either a
pedestal system that is placed on the floor or a rack-mounted system that is installed in a
customer-supplied rack.

47
Installing Your DeltaV System

Emerson Process Management has arranged for a Stratus representative to assist you to
unpack and install the system. Contact the Emerson Global Service Center to obtain the
current Stratus contact information to arrange for this pre-paid service. It is highly
recommended that you use this service; however, if time constraints prevent you from
doing so, you can attempt to set up the system without this service. As soon as possible,
arrange for the Stratus install service to inspect the server and to provide training on
correctly using and maintaining the server.

To install without the Stratus service, unpack the system, following the directions that
accompany the shipping container, and carefully inspect the hardware for damage. If the
hardware is undamaged, find the installation manual in the shipping container and use it
to install the system. If the hardware is damaged, contact the Emerson Global Service
Center. For information on configuring the ftServer software to run the DeltaV system,
refer to Books Online. For complete technical information on the fault-tolerant servers,
visit the Stratus website and refer to the Stratus hardware and software manuals and to the
electronic documentation installed on the servers.

48
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

3 Checking Out and Troubleshooting


Your DeltaV System
Topics covered in this chapter:
Checking Out Your System
Troubleshooting Your System
Getting Help
Hazardous Area Installation Manuals, NAMUR Installation Manuals, and ATEX
Instruction Sheets
Technical Service

This chapter provides guidelines to help ensure that your system is installed properly and
to help you troubleshoot hardware problems. The System Administration and
Maintenance manual in Books Online and the Release Notes KBA provide updated
maintenance and troubleshooting information.

After installing, it is recommended that you check out the hardware to ensure a smooth
startup.

After checkout, start up the DeltaV software following the instructions in the manual
Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System. You can then verify and
troubleshoot your hardware installation by using:

DeltaV Explorer to view the overall structure and layout of your system
Diagnostics utilities to check workstation hardware
DeltaV Diagnostics to view diagnostics data for DeltaV hardware

Checking Out Your System


Follow these steps to check out your system after installing the hardware:

Check the cable connections for all cables.


Check the power supply voltages.
Check the LED indicators on devices and I/O cards.
Test the field wiring connections.

Step 1. Checking the Cable Connections


Verify that all power, ground, and carrier connections are correctly installed and that all
network cables are correctly installed. For network cables, use the Microtest PentaScanner
cable testing tool to test all cables to the specifications in Appendix G. The test equipment
must be connected to both ends of the cable. Make sure all cable passes each test.

49
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Related information

Control Network Specifications

Step 2. Checking the Power Supply Voltages


Check power supplies and connections and check power supply voltages. Verify that the
voltages are in the proper range at all associated screw terminal connections.

For 12 VDC systems verify that:

The voltage at the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is 12.1-12.3 volts.
The voltage at the last carrier is greater than 11 volts.
Bussed field power is 24 VDC or 115/230 VAC as applicable.

For 12 VDC systems with redundant System Power Supplies, remove one power supply
before verifying the voltage.

For 24 VDC systems verify that:

The voltage at the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is 24.2-24.6 volts.
The voltage at the last carrier is greater than 11 volts.
Bussed field power is 24 VDC or 115/230 VAC as applicable.

For 24 VDC systems with redundant System Power Supplies, remove one power supply
before verifying the voltage.

Check output loading and verify that the voltages (where present) are in the proper range
at all associated screw terminal connections. Also, verify that the expected load is within
the capacity of the unit by checking the calculations in the installation worksheets.

Related information

Installation Worksheets

Step 3. Checking the LED Indicators on Each Device


The LED indicators on the system devices show important basic operating data. Following
are tables that describe the LEDs for each hardware component and provide corrective
action for faults.

System Power Supply LEDs


This table describes the LED indicators for the System Power Supply (AC/DC) and the
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC).

50
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-1: System Power Supply LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Conditions Fault Indications Probable Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. Power is not 1. Check supply
supplied to unit. power and con-
Possible line pow- nections.
er problem.
2. Internal fault 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Error Off On 1. Outputs are Verify loading cal-
outside of toler- culations.
ance.
2. Input over volt- 2. Check input
age. Unit shuts supply voltages.
down.

Controller LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs for the MD, MD Plus, MX, and MQ controllers.

Table 3-2: Controller LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Probable Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Error Off On (continuous) Internal fault Contact technical
support.
On for one sec- Unit went Contact customer
ond followed by through RESET support.
all LEDs on for five due to an unre-
seconds. coverable soft-
ware error.
Flashing The controller is Commission the
decommissioned. controller.
Green Active On Off 1. Controller is a 1. None - Green
Standby. Standby is on.
2. Controller not 2. Commission
commissioned. controller.
3. Internal fault. 3. Contact techni-
cal support.

51
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-2: Controller LEDs (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Probable Cause tion
Flashing Controller is not Download con-
configured. troller configura-
tion.
Green Standby Off On Controller is a None
Standby.
Flashing Controller is not Download con-
configured. troller configura-
tion.
Yellow - Pri. CN Communications Off Communi- Controller lacks Check primary
attempted and in- cations attemp- active Ethernet network cable
dicator flashing ted and indicator communications connections and
not flashing. on primary Con- hub connections.
trol Network con-
nection.
Yellow - Sec. CN Communications Off Communi- Controller lacks Check secondary
attempted and in- cations attemp- active Ethernet network cable
dicator flashing ted and indicator communications connections and
not flashing. on secondary hub connections.
Control Network
connection.

Remote Interface Unit LEDs


The following table describes the LED indicators for the Remote Interface Unit.

Table 3-3: Remote Interface Unit LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Probable Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support
Red Error Off On (continuous) Internal fault. Contact technical
support
On for one sec- Unit went Contact customer
ond followed by through RESET support.
all LEDs on for five due to an unre-
seconds. coverable soft-
ware error.

52
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-3: Remote Interface Unit LEDs (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Probable Cause tion
Flashing The Remote Inter- Commission the
face Unit is de- Remote Interface
commissioned. Unit.
Green Active On Off 1. Remote Inter- 1. Commission
face Unit is not the Remote Inter-
commissioned. face Unit.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Flashing Remote Interface Download config-
Unit is not config- uration.
ured.
Green Standby Off (Redundancy
not supported)
Yellow - Pri. CN Communications Off Communi- Remote Interface Check primary
attempted and in- cations attemp- Unit lacks active network cable
dicator flashing ted and indicator Ethernet commu- connections and
not flashing. nications on pri- hub connections.
mary Control Net-
work connection.
Yellow - Sec. CN Communications Off Communi- Remote Interface Check secondary
attempted and in- cations attemp- Unit lacks active network cable
dicator flashing ted and indicator Ethernet commu- connections and
not flashing. nications on sec- hub connections.
ondary Control
Network connec-
tion.

Media Converter LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the Media Converter.

Table 3-4: Media Converter LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power On Off Power is not sup- Check power sup-
plied to unit. Pos- ply and connec-
sible line power tions.
problem.
Red Error Off On Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

53
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-4: Media Converter LEDs (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Pri. F Lnk On Off Fiber-optic cable Check fiber-optic
is incorrectly con- cable connection.
nected. (Connects trans-
mit to receive.)
Green Pri. C Lnk On Off Twisted pair cable Check cable pin-
is incorrectly con- outs.
nected.
Green Sec. F Lnk On Off Fiber-optic cable Check fiber-optic
is incorrectly con- cable connection.
nected. (Connects trans-
mit to receive.)
Green Sec. C On Off Twisted pair cable Check cable pin-
Lnk is incorrectly con- outs.
nected.

DeltaV Fiber Switches LEDs


The following tables describe the LEDs on the Fiber Switches.

Table 3-5: Fiber Swtiches' Power LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. nections.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Error Off On (continuous) Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

Table 3-6: Fiber Switches' Twisted Pair Port LEDs

LED Status
Link Act On - Link
Blinking - Activity
Off - No link. Check the cable connection.

FD COL On - Full Duplex


Blinking - Collision
Off - Half Duplex

54
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-6: Fiber Switches' Twisted Pair Port LEDs (continued)

LED Status
100 10 On - 100 MHz
Off - 10 MHz

LED Status
Link Act On - Link
Blinking - Activity
Off - No link.

DeltaV Controller Firewall LEDs


The following tables describe the LEDs on the DeltaV Controller Firewall

Table 3-7: DeltaV Controller Firewall Power LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power On Off System power is Check supply
Supply 1 (P1), not supplied to power and con-
Power Supply 2 unit or voltage is nections.
(P2) less than 9.6 VDC
Red Fault Off On Internal fault. Contact technical
support.

Table 3-8: DeltaV Controller Firewall Device Status LEDs

LED Status
STATUS - Device Flashing green - device is initializing
status Solid green - Device is operational

LED Status
LS/DA 1, 2, V.24 - Solid green - valid link
Link status Blinking green - port is disabled
Running light - initialization phase after a reset
Off - no link. Check the cable connection.

55
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

AI 8-Channel Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the pre-Series 2 and Series 2 AI, 8-channel, 420
mA card; the AI, 8-channel, 420 mA, HART card; and the AI, 8-channel, 1-5 VDC card.

Table 3-9: AI Card LEDs

Correct Operating Fault Indica- Corrective Ac-


LED Condition tion Possible Cause tion
Green Power pre-Series 2 - On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/Ac- Series 2 Simplex is not supplied to power and con-
tive - On unit. Possible line nections.
Series 2 Redun- power problem.
dant: 2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
- Active - On cal support.
- Standby -
Flashing
Red-Error Off pre-Series 2 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
and Series 2 power. field power and
On (continu- connections.
ous) 2. Controller is 2. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
3. Unit failed self- 3. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
pre- Series 2 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
Flashing not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Redundant 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
Series 2 Flash- power. field power and
ing connections. Use
the DeltaV Diag-
nostics Clear
Saved Fault Infor-
mation command
when problem
fixed.
2.Controller is not 2. Check control-
scanning card. ler operation.

56
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-9: AI Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operating Fault Indica- Corrective Ac-


LED Condition tion Possible Cause tion
3. Hardware er- 3. Replace card
ror. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Simplex Series Controller is not Check controller
2 Flashing scanning card. operation.
Yellow - Ch.1 to On Off 1. Input is out of 1. Check input
Ch. 8 range and chan- source and con-
nel is disabled. nections.
(See specifica-
tions in Appendix
C.)
2. No bussed field 2. Check bussed
power. field power and
connections.
3.Internal fault. 3. Contact techni-
cal support.
Flashing 1. Input is out of 1. Check input
range and chan- source and con-
nel is disabled. nections.
(See specifica-
tions in Appendix
C for correct
range.)
2. No bussed field 2. Check bussed
power. field power and
connections.
3. Channel is con- 3. Check HART in-
figured for HART, put source and
but there is no connections.
HART communi-
cation.
4. Channel is con- 4. Check input
figured for NA- levels compared
MUR limits and to NAMUR limits
they have been
exceeded.

Refer to the Configuration manual in Books Online or more information on


troubleshooting HART devices.

57
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Related information

Interface Specifications

AI 16-Channel Card LEDs


The following table describes the LED indicators for the Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 40-20 mA,
HART card in Simplex mode.

Table 3-10: AI 16-Channel Card LEDS

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green-Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red - Error Off On 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
power. field power and
connections.
2. Controller is 2. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
3. Unit failed self- 3. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
power. field power and
connections.
2. Controller is 2. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
3. Hardware er- 3. Replace card
ror. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.

AO 8-Channel Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the pre-Series 2 and Series 2 AO, 8-channel 420
mA card and the AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART card.

58
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-11: AO 8-Channel Card LEDs

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power pre-Series 2 - Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ On is not supplied to power and con-
Active Series 2 Redun- unit. Possible line nections
dant: power problems.
Active - On 2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
Standby - Flash- cal support.
ing
Red-Error Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Unit failed self- 1. Contact techni-
Series 2 On (con- test. cal support.
tinuous) 2. Controller is 2. Check control-
not scanning ler operation
card.
pre-Series 2 Flash- 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
ing not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
3. Address con- 3. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Redundant Series 1. No bussed field 1. Check bussed
2 Flashing power. field power and
connections. Use
the DeltaV Diag-
nostics Clear
Saved Fault Infor-
mation command
when the prob-
lem is fixed.
2. Controller is 2. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
3. Hardware er- 3. Replace with
ror. known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.
Simplex Series 2 Controller is not Check controller
Flashing scanning card. operation.

59
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-11: AO 8-Channel Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Yellow - Ch1. to On Off 1. No output de- 1. Check output
Ch. 8 vice (load) and connections.
channel is disa-
bled.
2. Bussed field 2. Check bussed
power not sup- field power and
plied to unit. communications.
3. Internal fault. 3. Contact techni-
cal support.
Flashing 1. No output de- 1. Check output
vice (load) and connections.
channel is ena-
bled.
2. Bussed field 2. Check bussed
power not sup- field power and
plied to unit. connections.
3. Channel is con- 3. Check HART in-
figured for HART, put source and
but there is no connections.
HART communi-
cation.
4. Internal fault. 4. Contact techni-
cal support.

Refer to the Configuration manual in Books Online for more information on


troubleshooting HART devices.

AS-Interface Card LEDs

Table 3-12:

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.

60
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-12: (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow Port 1 On Off No communica- Check connec-
and Port 2 tions. tions, cable, and
external device.
Flashing Communications Check connec-
error on this port. tions, cable, and
external device.

DeviceNet Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the DeviceNet and Series 2 DeviceNet cards.

Table 3-13: DeviceNet Card LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green - Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.

61
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-13: DeviceNet Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Port 1 On Off 1. No communi- 1. Check connec-
Port 2 (reserved) cations. tions, cable, and
external device.
2. Port not ena- 2. Enable port.
bled
3. No configura- 3. Configure port.
tion for this port.
Flashing Communication Check connec-
error on this port. tions, cable, and
external device.

DI 8-Channel Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the pre-Series 2 and Series 2 8-channel DI cards
(24 VDC isolated and dry contact, and 120/230 VAC isolated and dry contract).

Table 3-14: DI 8-Channel Card LEDs

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green - Power pre-Series 2 - Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ On is not supplied to power and con-
Active Series 2 Sim- unit. Possible line nections.
plex -On power problem.
Series 2 Redun- 2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
dant: cal support.
- Active - On
- Standby -
Flashing
Red - Error Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
Series 2 On (con- not scanning ler operation.
tinuous) card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
pre-Series 2 - 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
Flashing not scanning ler operation.
card.

62
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-14: DI 8-Channel Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
2. Address con- 2. Replace with
flict. known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.
Series 2 - Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Hardware er- 2. Replace card
ror. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Ch.1 to On = input >
Ch. 8 detection level.
Off = input <
detection level.
Refer to the specifi-
cations in Appendix
C for detection lev-
els for each DI card
type.

Related information

Interface Specifications

DI Mass Connection Board LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs on the Series 2 DI Mass Connection Board and the
Series 2 Plus DI Mass Connection Board.

Table 3-15: DI Mass Connection Board LEDs

Type of LED Status Meaning


Power (green) On (green) The mass connection board is
receiving power.
Off The mass connection board is
not receiving power.
Channel (yellow for Series 2; or- On (yellow for Series 2; orange/ The channel signal is available.
ange/brown for Series 2 Plus) brown for Series 2 Plus)

63
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-15: DI Mass Connection Board LEDs (continued)

Type of LED Status Meaning


Off The channel signal is not availa-
ble.

DO 8-Channel Card LEDs

Table 3-16: DO 8-Channel Card LEDs

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green-Power pre-Series 2 - On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ Series 2 Simplex - is not supplied to power and con-
Active On unit. Possible line nections.
Series 2 Redun- power problem.
dant: 2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
- Active - On cal support.
- Standby -
Flashing
Red Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
Series 2 On (con- not scanning ler operation.
tinuous) card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
pre-Series 2 Flash- 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
ing not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace with
flict. known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.
Series 2 Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Hardware er- 2. Replace with
ror. known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.
Yellow - Ch. 1 Depends on setpoint
to Ch. 8 and configuration.

64
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

DO 32-Channel Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the DO, 32-channel, 24 VDC, high-side and
Series 2 DO, 32-channel, 24 VDC, high-side cards.

Table 3-17: DO 32-Channel Card LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green-Power On Off 1. Power is not 1. Check supply
supplied to unit. power and con-
nections.
2. Internal fault 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) Communications Check connec-
error. tions, cable, and
external device.
Flashing Address conflict. Replace card with
known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.

DO Mass Connection Board LEDs

Table 3-18: DO Mass Connection Board LEDs

Type of LED Status Meaning


Power (green) On (green) The mass connection board is
receiving power.
Off The mass connection board is
not receiving power.
Channel (yellow) On (yellow) The channel is turned on.
Off The channel is turned off.

Fieldbus H1 Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the Fieldbus H1 and Series 2 Fieldbus H1 cards.

65
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-19: Fieldbus H1 Card LEDs

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green-Power pre-Series 2 - Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ On is not supplied to power and con-
Active Series 2 Sim- unit. Possible line nections.
plex - On power problem.
Series 2 Redun- 2. Internal fault 2. Contact techni-
dant: cal support.
- Active - On
- Standby - pre-Series 2 and Incorrect terminal Install redundant
Flashing Series 2 Flashing block for config- terminal blocks
Series 2 Red: ured card type for Series 2 redun-
Active-Flash- dant cards and
ing simplex terminal
Stby-Flashing blocks for simplex
and/or pre-Series
2 cards.
Red - Error Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
Series 2: On (con- not scanning ler operation.
tinuous) card.
2. Unit failed self- 2.Contact techni-
test. cal support.
pre-Series 2 Flash- 1. Controller is 1.Check control-
ing not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Series 2 Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Hardware er- 2. Replace card
ror. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Port 1 On Off 1. No communi- 1. Check connec-
and Port 2 cations. tions, cable and
external devices.
2. Port not ena- 2. Enable port.
bled.

66
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-19: Fieldbus H1 Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
3. Configuration 3. Fix configura-
mismatch. (Such tion errors.
as redundant card
configured in da-
tabase and sim-
plex card instal-
led.)
Flashing 1. Communica- 1. Check connec-
tion error on this tions, cable, and
port. external device.
2. No configura- 2. Configure port.
tion for this port.

Isolated Input Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the Series 2 Isolated Input card.

Table 3-20: Series 2 Isolated Input Card LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Error Off On (Continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.

67
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Multifunction Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the Multifunction card.

Table 3-21: Multifunction Card LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green - Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning card ler operation.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.

Profibus DP Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the Profibus DP, Series 2 Profibus DP (Simplex)
and Series 2 Plus Profibus DP (Simplex and Redundant) cards.

Table 3-22: Profibus DP Card LEDs

Correct Operating Con- Corrective Ac-


LED dition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green - Profibus DP and Sim- Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Power plex Series 2 Profi- is not supplied to power and con-
bus DP- On unit. Possible line nections.
Series 2 Plus Profibus power problem.
DP Redundant: 2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
- Active - On cal support.
- Standby - Flash-
ing
Red - Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning card ler operation.

68
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-22: Profibus DP Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operating Con- Corrective Ac-


LED dition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - On Off 1. No communi- 1. Check connec-
Port 1 cations. tions, cable, and
Port 2 (re- external device.
served) 2. Port not ena- 2. Enable port.
bled.
3. No configura- 3. Configure port.
tion for this port.
Flashing Communication Check connec-
error on this port. tions, cable, and
external device.

RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV Cards LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV cards.

Table 3-23: RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV Cards LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.

69
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-23: RTD, ohms and Thermocouple, mV Cards LEDs (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow Ch. 1 to On Off 1. Channel not 1. Enable channel
Ch. 8 configured. and download
card.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Flashing 1. Invalid configu- 1. Check configu-
ration. ration.
2. Input is out of 2. Check input
range. (See speci- source and con-
fications in Ap- nections.
pendix C for cor-
rect range.)
3. Internal fault. 3. Contact techni-
cal support.

Related information

Interface Specifications

Sequence of Events Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the Sequence of Events card.

Table 3-24: Sequence of Events Card LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green - Power On Off 1. Power is not 1. Check supply
supplied to unit. power and con-
nections.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) Communications Check connec-
error. tions, cable, and
external device.

70
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-24: Sequence of Events Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Flashing Address conflict. Replace card with
known good card
of same type;
contact technical
support.

Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 LEDs

Table 3-25: Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 LEDs

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green - Power pre-Series 2 - Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
Green Power/ On is not supplied to power and con-
Active Series 2 Sim- unit. Possible line nections.
plex - On power problem.
Series 2 Redun- 2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
dant cal support.
- Active - On
- Standby -
Flashing
Red - Error Off pre-Series 2 and 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
Series 2 - On (con- not scanning ler operation.
tinuous) card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
pre-Series 2 Flash- 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
ing not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Series 2 Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Hardware er- 2. Replace card
ror. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.

71
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-25: Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 LEDs (continued)

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Yellow - Port 1 On Off No communica- Check connec-
and Port 2 (con- tions. tions, cable, and
figured as Mas- external device.
ter) Flashing Communications Check connec-
error on this port. tions, cable, and
external device.
Yellow - Port 1 On - Communi-
and Port 2 (con- cating
figured as Slave) Off - No com-
munication
Flashing - Inter-
mittent com-
munication

VIM 2 card LEDs


The VIM 2 card has 6 LEDs. The LEDs can have 3 states: On, Off, or Blink (only used for the
VIMNet network communications LED). From top to bottom the LEDs are:

Power: should always be On (green). If the power LED is off, provide power to the
card.
Error: Whenever the Fault LED is on (red), the VIM 2 is in error; all other LED states
are not significant.
Active: When lit (green) indicates that the card is commissioned and operating as
the active card in a redundant pair.
Standby: When lit (green) indicates that the card is commissioned and operating as
the standby card in a redundant pair. The Standby LED is always off in simplex mode.
Network: When lit (amber) indicates valid VIMNet network communications.
Ctlr Comm: When lit (amber) indicates valid LocalBus communications.

LED pattern when the VIM 2 is decommissioned

The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is decommissioned.

LED State Corrective action


Active Off A decommissioned VIM 2 does
Standby Off not have an IP address. Use the
VIMNet Explorer to configure a
Network Blinking placeholder that contains the
Ctlr Comm Off IP address for your network,
then commission the VIM 2.
Power On

72
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Example LED patterns when the VIM 2 is commissioned

The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned and
communicating with both the DeltaV controller and with external devices. Note that if the
Active LED is on and the Standby LED is off, the redundancy role is Active. If the Active LED
is off and the Standby LED is on the redundancy role is Standby.

Table 3-26: VIM 2 is commissioned and communicating on both networks

LED State
Active On
Standby Off
Network On
Ctlr Comm On
Power On

The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned but not
communicating on the LocalBus and there is a VIMNet network error. The redundancy role
is Active. If the Standby LED is On and the Active is Off with all other LED states the same,
the redundancy role is Standby.

Table 3-27: VIM 2 is commissioned but not communicating on the LocalBus; VIMNet
network error

LED State Corrective action


Active On Verify that the DeltaV control-
Standby Off ler is downloaded. Also verify
that the external device config-
Network Blink uration has been uploaded to
Ctlr Comm Off the VIM 2 from the VIMNet Ex-
plorer
Power On

The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned and
communicating on the LocalBus but there are errors on the VIMNet network. The
redundancy role is Active. If the Standby LED is On and the Active is Off with all other LED
states the same, the redundancy role is Standby.

Table 3-28: VIM 2 is commissioned, communicating on the LocalBus, VIMNet


network errors

LED State
Active On
Standby Off
Network Blink
Ctlr Comm On

73
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-28: VIM 2 is commissioned, communicating on the LocalBus, VIMNet


network errors (continued)

LED State
Power On

I.S. AI 8-Channel HART Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA HART card.

Table 3-29: I.S. AI 8-Channel HART Card LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Ch.1 - Ch. On Off 1. Input is out of 1. Check input
8 range. (See speci- source and con-
fications in Ap- nections.
pendix C for cor-
rect range.)
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Flashing 1. Input is out of 1. Check input
range. See specifi- source and con-
cations in Appen- nections.
dix C for correct
range.)

74
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-29: I.S. AI 8-Channel HART Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
2. Channel is con- 2. Check HART in-
figured for HART, put source and
but there is no connections.
HART communi-
cation.
3. Channel is con- 3. Check input
figured for NA- levels compared
MUR limits and to NAMUR limits.
they have been
exceeded.

Related information

Interface Specifications

I.S. AO 8-Channel HART Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the I.S. AO 8-Channel HART card.

Table 3-30: I.S. AO 8-Channel HART Card LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problems.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Error Off On (continuous) Unit failed self- Contact technical
test. support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
3. Address con- 3. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow Ch.1 to On Off 1. No output de- 1. Check output
Ch. 8 vice (load). connections.

75
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-30: I.S. AO 8-Channel HART Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Flashing 1. No output de- 1. Check output
vice (load). connections.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
3. Card is config- 3. Check HART in-
ured for HART but put source and
there is no HART connections.
communication.

I.S. DI 16-Channel Card LEDs


The following table describes the LEDs for the I.S. DI 16-channel card.

Table 3-31: I.S. DI 16-Channel Card LEDs

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green - Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red - Error Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Ch.1- On = input > de- Flashing Line fault detec- Check field wir-
Ch.16 tection level. ted. ing.
Off = input < de-
tection level.

76
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-31: I.S. DI 16-Channel Card LEDs (continued)

Correct Operating Corrective Ac-


LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
See specifications in Running light No terminal block Make sure that
Appendix C for detec- from Channel 1 - installed or incor- the correct termi-
tion levels for each Channel 16 with rect terminal nal block is instal-
card type. Red Error On. block used. led.

Related information

Interface Specifications

I.S. DO 4-Channel Card LEDs

Table 3-32: I.S. DO 4-Channel Card LEDs

Correct Operat- Corrective Ac-


LED ing Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause tion
Green - Power On Off 1. System power 1. Check supply
is not supplied to power and con-
unit. Possible line nections.
power problem.
2. Internal fault. 2. Contact techni-
cal support.
Red Off On (continuous) 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Unit failed self- 2. Contact techni-
test. cal support.
Flashing 1. Controller is 1. Check control-
not scanning ler operation.
card.
2. Address con- 2. Replace card
flict. with known good
card of same
type; contact
technical support.
Yellow - Ch. 1 - Depends on set- Flashing Line fault detec- Check field wir-
Ch. 4 point and config- ted. ing.
uration.

77
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

MD20 and MD30 Smart Switch LEDs


There are two types of LEDs on the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches: device status
LEDs that describe the status of the MD20 and MD30 base switches and display status LEDs
that describe the status of the ports on the media modules that plug into the base
switches.

Table 3-33: MD20 and MD30 Device Status LEDs

Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Green P (Power) On Off Internal supply voltage
is too low.
Green P1 (Power 1) On Off Supply voltage 1 is less
than 18 V.
Green P2 (Power 2) On Off Supply voltage 2 is less
than 18 V.
Green/yellow LOCK On (green continu- Off Device is in an un-
ous) - The device is locked state.
locked.
On (yellow contin-
uous) - The device
is temporarily un-
locked but will be
locked down after
the lockdown tim-
er has expired.
Flashing (green) -
Device passes into
the lockdown
state.
Red/yellow RL1 (Relay Off - Signal contact is Red On (continuous) Signal contact is open;
1) closed; not reporting reporting an error.
an error. Yellow On (continu- Signal contact is open;
ous) the Manual Setting is
active.
Red/yellow RL2 (Relay Off - Signal contact is Red On (continuous) Signal contact is open;
2) closed; not reporting reporting an error.
an error Yellow On (continu- Signal contact is open;
ous) the Manual Setting is
active.
Green RUN On (continuous) - Off Device is in reset
The device is ready mode.
for operation.
On (flashing) - The
device is booting.
Green TEST On - LED test activa- Off LED test not activated.
ted.

78
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-33: MD20 and MD30 Device Status LEDs (continued)

Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Green ACA/Flash Ac-
cess - displays the ACA
flash access with the
Run LED.

Every DeltaV media module has one LED per port. The meaning of the media modules
port status LED depends upon the item selected on the MD20 or MD30 base Smart
Switches. Press the Select button to cycle through the items on the base switch. The
following table describes the display status LEDs on the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart
Switches and the meaning of the port LEDs on the media modules

Table 3-34: Display Status LEDs on MD Base Smart Switches and Meaning on Media
Modules

Display Status LED on MD Base


Smart Switches Meaning on Media Module
Green L/D (Data/link status) Ports glowing green - valid connection.
The port LEDs on the media Ports not glowing green- no valid connection.
modules display the connection Ports flashing green once a period - port is switched to
status. standby.
Ports flashing green three times a period - port is locked by
the One-Click Lockdown application (DeltaV version 10.3) or
the Smart Switch Command Center (DeltaV version 11.3 or
higher).
Ports flashing yellow - port is receiving data.
Green FDX (full duplex) Ports glowing green - Full-duplex is active.
The port LEDs on the media Ports not glowing green - Half duplex is active.
modules display the half duplex
or full duplex connection status.
Green 1000 (10/100/1000Mbit/ Ports glowing green - 100Mbit/sec is active.
sec) Ports not glowing green - 10/Mbit/sec is active.
The port LEDs on the media Ports glowing yellow - 1000Mbit/sec is active.
modules display the transmis-
sion speed.
Green AN (autonegotiation) Ports glowing green - autonegotiation is active.
The port LEDs on the media Ports not glowing green - autonegotiation is inactive.
modules display the autonego-
tiation setting.
Green TP (twisted pair/fiber-op- Ports glowing green - twisted pair ports.
tic) Ports glowing yellow - fiber-optic ports.
The port LEDs on the media
modules display the media type.

79
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-34: Display Status LEDs on MD Base Smart Switches and Meaning on Media
Modules (continued)

Display Status LED on MD Base


Smart Switches Meaning on Media Module
Green PoE status Ports not glowing - No PoE port or PoE disabled.
The port LEDs on the media Ports glowing yellow - PoE port searching for terminal device
modules display the Power over (PD); PoE status is searching.
Ethernet status. Ports glowing green - PoE port supplying terminal device
(PD); PoE status is delivering power.

RM100 and FP20 Smart Switch LEDs


The following table describes the device status LEDs on the DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart
Switches.

Table 3-35: Device Status LEDs on DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches

Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Green/yellow P (Pow- On (green continu- Off Supply voltage is off or
er) ous) - Supply vol- too low.
tages are on.
On (yellow contin-
uous) - Only one
supply voltage is
on.
Green RUN On (green continu- Off Device is in reset
ous) - Device is mode.
ready for opera-
tion.
Flashing (green) -
Device is booting.
Green/yellow LOCK On (green continu- Off Device is in an un-
ous) - Device is locked state.
locked.
On (yellow contin-
uous) - Device is
temporarily un-
locked but will en-
ter the locked state
after the lockdown
timer expires.
Flashing (green) -
Device passes into
the locked state.

80
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Table 3-35: Device Status LEDs on DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches (continued)

Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Red FAULT Off - not reporting an On (red continuous) Reporting an error.
error.

The following table describes the port status LEDs on the DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart
Switches

Table 3-36: Port Status LEDs on DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches

Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Green/LS (Link Status) On (green continu- Off No valid link or con-
ous) - Valid link or nection.
connection.
Flashing green
once per second -
Port is in standby.
Flashing green
three times per
second. - Port is
locked by the One-
Click Lockdown ap-
plication (DeltaV
version 10.3) or the
Smart Switch Com-
mand Center (Del-
taV version 11.3 or
higher).
Yellow/DA (Data) Flashing yellow - Re- Off Not receiving data.
ceiving data.

Step 4. Testing the Field Wiring Connections


To troubleshoot field wiring connection problems, test access points are located on the I/O
terminal blocks. The access point for each wire connection is located in the square hole
above the corresponding field screw terminal. To contact the field signals, use a test probe
at least 25 mm (1 in.) long and 2 mm (0.08 in.) or less in diameter.

To determine the expected voltage levels for your application, refer to the:

Wiring diagrams for the specific I/O card type in Appendix C


Connection information supplied with your field device

81
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

CAUTION!
The test probe is not retained within the access hole. It can fall out and short across field wiring
if it is not held in place.

Troubleshooting Your System


After checkout, start up the DeltaV software and verify and troubleshoot your hardware
installation with the DeltaV Explorer, workstation diagnostics utilities, and DeltaV
Diagnostics. To start the DeltaV Explorer, click Start > All Programs > DeltaV > Engineering >
DeltaV Explorer. To start DeltaV Diagnostics, click Start > All Programs > DeltaV > Operator >
Diagnostics.

Using the DeltaV Explorer


The DeltaV Explorer presents a view of the overall structure and layout of your system. The
tree view shows your control strategies and the hierarchy of the nodes on your Control
Network. These nodes can be physically connected to the system, or they can be
placeholders configured prior to the installation of the actual hardware.

When you check out your system, remember that the DeltaV Explorer gives you a view of
your database, but this may not necessarily match what is actually installed on the
network. For example, before connecting controllers, you can define them as controller
placeholders in the Control Network. The icons for the placeholders appear in the DeltaV
Explorer but are not bound to any device. Then, when the controllers are available and
connected, you drag and drop them from the Decommissioned Controllers section to the
controller placeholder icons in the Control Network.

Resolving system problems is often a matter of making sure the database and the network
match and making sure all the nodes on the network have information about all other
nodes. The Download commands in the DeltaV Explorer provide the nodes with all the
information they need to operate and interact with other nodes.

See the manual Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System for information
on:

Downloading Setup Data


Downloading Controllers and Installing Workstations
Dragging decommissioned controllers to the Control Network

Status Indicators
After you have completed the above steps and the controllers are listed in the Control
Network, look for these indicators next to the nodes:

Indicates the downloading node (the workstation) does not have all the infor-
mation about this node.

82
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Indicates the node is not communicating. This indicator occurs if there is a bad
connection, if the controller is not powered up, or if the controller is decom-
missioned. It also occurs for a few seconds after a controller is commissioned.
Indicates the node is communicating but has an integrity problem. Integrity
problems can occur if there is a mismatch between the I/O configuration and
the installed I/O or if the node is configured for network redundancy but does
not have the necessary connections to support it.
Indicates that the node does not have a configuration. This can occur if the
node has never been downloaded. For controllers, this can occur if there is a
power failure and cold restart was not enabled for the node.

Note
If a node shows a status indicator, check for hardware faults shown in the Troubleshooting Guide
before changing your configuration.

You can automate the comparison between the physical I/O and the configured I/O with
the Autosense I/O cards command. To use the command, click on the I/O for the node,
click the right mouse button, and then select Autosense I/O Cards. The Autosense Cards
dialog lists the card sensed in the controller and the card listed in the database for each
slot.

For example, if you add a card to the controller, the dialog displays:

The type of card sensed in the Auto-sensed Type


<empty> in the database column

Click OK to add the configuration to the database. (Clicking OK does not affect existing
cards.) Click Cancel to decommission the controller and close the dialog.

Using the Workstation Diagnostics


The documentation supplied with your workstation describes the diagnostics programs
available for the workstation hardware and operating system software. If you need to test
the workstation subsystems (memory, processors, video, keyboard, mouse, disk
controller, ports), use the diagnostics disk and follow the instructions in the manual
supplied with your workstation.

Using DeltaV Diagnostics


The DeltaV Explorer allows you to launch the DeltaV Diagnostics application and view
diagnostics data for any selected DeltaV Explorer object. This provides useful diagnostic

information for nodes that have good status or show the indicator. To investigate
integrity problems for a node or subsystem, select its icon, click the right mouse button,
and then click Diagnose. Information about DeltaV Diagnostics is located in online help.

83
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Troubleshooting Guide
The following information can be used to help you detect system hardware problems with
the DeltaV Explorer and correct them.

Problem: Controller not listed in the Decommissioned Controllers tree.

Possible Cause Corrective Action


Node is not connected to the hub. Check the LEDs on the controller (see the LED
Checklists).
Control network cable is not working correctly. Test the cable between the controller and the
hub. If the cable is not working correctly, repair
or replace it.
Node is not connected correctly to the network. Make sure cables are connected to the correct
ports on the hub and the controller.
Connection on the carrier is not secure. Remove the controller from the 2-wide power/
controller carrier for at least 15 seconds and re-
place it onto the carrier.
DeltaV Explorer is not connected to the active Exit the DeltaV Explorer and restart the connec-
database, or the DeltaV Database Server tion to the active database.
(DvDbServer) is not running.

Problem: The controller has an indicator.

appears for nodes that are not communicating. Typically, this indicator occurs if there
is a bad connection or the controller is not powered up. To clear this indicator, go to the
node and make sure it is connected, the wiring is correct and sound, and the node is
powered up. This indicator also occurs for a few seconds after a controller is commissioned

Possible Cause Corrective Action


Node is not connected to the hub. 1. Check the LEDs on the controller.
2. Check the Control Network cables to make
sure they are connected to the correct ports on
the hub and controller.
Control network cable is not working correctly. Test the cable between the controller and the
hub. If the cable is not working correctly, repair
or replace it.
You are looking at the wrong controller. Make sure you are looking at the correct con-
troller by selecting DeltaV Explorer Controller Proper-
ties > Controller > Flash Lights.

84
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Possible Cause Corrective Action


Primary and secondary Control Network con- 1. Use DeltaV Explorer Node Properties > Identify
nections are crossed. Controller to flash the controller LEDs. If the LEDs
flash, use the Check Node Integrity function in Del-
taV Diagnostics and verify that a Not Connected
status is returned.
2. Verify that the primary Control Network ca-
bles are connected to the correct primary ports
on the controller, workstation, and hub.
3. Verify that the secondary Control Network ca-
bles are connected to the correct secondary
ports on the controller, workstation, and hub.

Problem: The workstation has an indicator.

appears for nodes that are not communicating. Typically, this indicator occurs if there
is a bad connection or if the workstation is not powered up. To clear this indicator, go to
the node and make sure it is connected, the wiring is correct and sound, and the node is
powered up.

Possible Cause Corrective Action


Workstation is not set up properly. Make sure the workstation is powered up. Look
in Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and
verify that DeltaV Services are running.
Node is not connected to the hub. Check the Control Network cables to make sure
they are connected to the correct ports on the
hub and workstation.
Control network cable is not working correctly. Test the cable between the workstation and the
hub. If the cable is not working correctly, repair
or replace it.
Workstation address is set to a default value or 1. Look at the Internet Protocol (IP) address and
an incorrect address. verify that the address matches the DeltaV Ex-
plorer address for the node. If the address is not
correct, run Workstation Configuration.
2. Use the Utilities from the 3Com Install disk to
verify that the Plug N Play feature is turned off
for the workstation Control Network card.

Problem: A node has an indicator.

85
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Possible Cause Corrective Action


Installing node (the workstation) does not have Click the node with the indicator, click the right
all the information on the node. mouse button, and then click Install Setup Data.
This transfers setup data from the database to
the physical node. It also updates the installing
workstation node so that the workstation has all
the information it needs to manage the new
node.

This indicator can appear on controllers that are physically connected to the network or on
controller placeholders. Note that you cannot install setup data for a controller
placeholder; the physical node must be connected first.

Problem: A node has a indicator.

Possible Cause Corrective Action


Node is communicating but has an integrity Most integrity problems are due to hardware
problem. problems. Check the LEDs on the nodes (refer to
the LED tables in this chapter) and correct the
hardware problem.

Occasionally, integrity problems occur if there is a mismatch between the I/O


configuration and the installed I/O. In this case, compare the controller I/O configuration in
the DeltaV Explorer with the actual I/O cards connected to the controller. This comparison
can be accomplished by viewing either the I/O Auto-Sense dialog in DeltaV Explorer, or by
examining the I/O hierarchy in Diagnostics.

Integrity problems can occur if the controller is configured for network redundancy but
does not have the necessary connections to support it. Verify that the controller is
configured to support network redundancy. If it is, make sure the controller is connected
to the network correctly.

This indicator also occurs if workstations have Event Chronicle problems (configured for a
directory that does not exist, for example), or if workstations are not communicating with
the controller.

If the indicator persists, use DeltaV Diagnostics to pinpoint the problem.

Problem: The node has a indicator.

Possible Cause Corrective Action


The node has never been downloaded or has Download the node.
lost its configuration.

86
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

Getting Help
The DeltaV Books Online provides information on the DeltaV system and the Online Help
for the DeltaV applications provides procedural help on using the applications and popup
help for dialog boxes.

Online Help

All DeltaV applications have online help that provides instructions on using the application.
To access help for any application, open the application, and select the help topics
command under the Help menu on the applications menu bar. For example to start
DeltaV Diagnostics and then access the help, click Start | DeltaV | Operator | Diagnostics
and then select Diagnostics Help Topics from the Help menu. To search the help for
information on specific topics, click the left mouse button on the Index tab or the Search
tab on the Help Topics dialog box, and follow the directions. For help on dialogs, click the
question mark in the upper right hand corner of the dialog, drag it to the field for which
you want help, and click the left mouse button.

Books Online

Books Online provides reference information and detailed information on installing,


configuring, operating, and troubleshooting your DeltaV system. Click Start > DeltaV > Help >
Books Onlineand then click on the title of the book that you want to read. The System
Administration and Maintenance manual in Books Online contains helpful technical
information related to hardware troubleshooting.

DeltaV Installation and Instruction Manuals

Most DeltaV product information is in Books Online. You can print any of that information
or you can order a paper copy from Emerson Process Management. The Getting Started
with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System manual and the Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV
Digital Automation System are also available in printed form. The Getting Started with Your
DeltaV Digital Automation System contains general information about the software and
helps you get started with configuration and the Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Digital
Automation System provides important information about installing a fieldbus system.

Hazardous Area Installation Manuals, NAMUR


Installation Manuals, and ATEX Instruction
Sheets
The following files related to Hazardous Area installations and NAMUR compliant
installations are on the DeltaV Documentation Library DVD. The files are in Portable
Document Format (.PDF). A letter (A-Z) is appended to the filenames that begin with 12P
and is incremented for each release of the document.

12P1293 DeltaV Scalable Process System, Class I Division 2 Installation Instructions


(Part Number - 12P1293)
12P1892 DeltaV Scalable Process System, Class I Div. 2 with Class I, II, III Div. 1 Field
Circuits Installation Instructions (Part Number - 12P1892)

87
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System

12P1990 DeltaV Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits Installation
Instructions (Part Number - 12P1990)
12P2046 DeltaV Scalable Process System, Zone 2 Installation Instructions (Part
Number - 12P2046)
12P2524 DeltaV IS I/O Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance in Zone 2
Hazardous Areas (Part Number - 12P2524)
12P2822 DeltaV Digital Automation System Namur NE 21 Installation Instructions
(Part Number - 12P2822)
12P3292 DeltaV Type KJ7000 Series Zone 1 I/O System Installation Instructions
12P3517 DeltaV KJ1710 Single Port Fiber Switch Installation Instructions
ATEX Instruction Sheets The DeltaV ATEX Instruction Sheets (in PDF format) can
also be found on the DeltaV web site.

Technical Service
There are several options available for technical service, including help desk support,
remote diagnosis, 24-hour emergency support, and software update service. Please
complete the SureService registration process.

If the information presented in this manual does not solve your problem, visit Emerson
Process Managements Reach Us website at www.emersonprocess.com/systems/reach/
and follow the directions for your world area.

Make sure you have the following information ready:

System Identification Number


Software Version Number
Description of the problem

If you are calling, be at your DeltaV system if possible. This enables the Technical Support
Representative to step you through the proper problem solving procedures.

88
Environmental Specifications

Appendix A
Environmental Specifications
All DeltaV system products meet the appropriate European standards for Electromagnetic
Compatibility and carry the CE mark. All products meet CSA requirements. Contact the
factory for details.

Environmental Specifications for the DeltaV


System
The following tables list the environmental specifications for normal operation of DeltaV
system devices: The first table lists temperature and relative humidity specifications and
the second lists airborne contaminants, vibration, and shock specifications

Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices

Operating Tempera-
Device ture Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
Workstation 10C to 35C (50F to -20C to 60C (-4F to 20% to 80%, non-con-
95F) maximum 10C 140F) densing
(18F) change per hour
3Com 3C16700A 8- 0C to 40C (32F to -30C to 60C (-22F to 0% to 90%, non-con-
Port (TP) Unmanaged 104F) 140F) densing
Hub
Allied Telesyn 0C to 40C (32F to -25C to 70C (-13F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
switches: 104F) 158F) densing
AT-FS708 8-Port
(TP) Unmanaged
AT-FS709FC 8-Port
(TP) Unmanaged
with 1 100BASE-FX
Fiber Port

89
Environmental Specifications

Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)

Operating Tempera-
Device ture Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
Cisco switches: 0C to 45C (32F to -25C to 70C (-13F to 10% to 85% non-con-
2940 8-Port (TP) 113F) 158F) densing
Managed with 1
100BASE-FX Fiber
Port
2950 24-Port (TP)
Managed
2950C 24-Port (TP)
Managed with 2
100BASE-FX Fiber
Ports
2960 8-Port (TP)
with 1 gigabit mul-
ti-function port
2960 24-Port (TP)
with 2 RJ45 ports
2960 24-Port (TP)
with 2 gigabit mul-
ti-function ports
2960 48-Port (TP)
with 2 RJ45 ports
2960 48-Port (TP)
with 2 gigabit mul-
ti-function ports
3550FX 24-Port
(FO) Managed with
24 100BASE-FX Fi-
ber Ports and 2
GBIC gigabit slots
3750-24FS 24-Port
(FO) Managed with
24 100BASE-FX Fi-
ber Ports and 2 SFP
Gigabit slots
3750-24TS-S 24-
Port (TP) Managed
with 2 SFP Gigabit
slots
3750G-12S-S 12
Slot (SFP) Managed
DeltaV MD20 and 0C to 60C (32F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 10% to 95%, non-con-
MD30 base Smart 140F) 185F) densing
Switches and media
modules, and DeltaV
FP20 Smart Switches
(non ES versions)

90
Environmental Specifications

Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)

Operating Tempera-
Device ture Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
DeltaV MD20 and -40C to 70C (confor- -40C to 85C (-40F to 10% to 95%, non-con-
MD30 base Smart mal coating) (-40F to 185F) densing
Switches and media 158F)
modules, and FP20
Smart Switches (ES
versions)
DeltaV RM100 base 0C to 50C (32F to -20C to 85C (-4F to 10% to 95%, non-con-
Smart Switches and 122F) 185F) densing
media modules
MD Controllers, and 0C to 60C (32F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
pre-Series 2 I/O 140F) 185F) densing
MD Plus Controllers -40C to 70C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
158F) 185F) densing
MX Controllers -40C to 60C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
140F) 185F) densing
Single Port Fiber -40C to 70C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
Switch 158F) 185F) densing
Four Port Fiber Switch
Remote Interface Unit
Pre-Series 2 Profibus, 0 to 55C (32F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
Pre-Series 2 DeviceNet 131F) 185F) densing
Series 2 I/O (except -40C to 70C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
Series 2 As-Interface) 158F) 185F) densing
Series 2 As-Interface -25C to 70C (-13F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
158F) 185F) densing
System power supplies 0 to 60C (32F to -40C to 70C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
140F) 158F) densing
System Power Supply -40 to 70C (-40F to -40C to 70C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
(Dual DC/DC) 158F) 158F) densing
Legacy DIN rail-moun- -40 to 70C (-40F to -40C to 70C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
ted bulk power supply 158F) 158F) densing
Legacy Panel-mounted 0 to 60C (32F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
bulk power supply 140F) at 300 W and al- 185F) densing
titude < 914 m (3000
ft)
DeltaV Controller Fire- 0 to 55C (32F to -40C to 80C (-40F to 10% to 95%, non-con-
wall 131F) 176F) densing
Fiber-Optic Media Con- 0 to 60C (32F to -40C to 70C (-40F to 5% to 95%
verter 140F) 158F)
Fieldbus H1 Carrier -40C to 70C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
158F) 185F) densing

91
Environmental Specifications

Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)

Operating Tempera-
Device ture Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
Round ribbon cable 0C to 60C (0F to -20C to 70C (-4F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
140F) 158F) densing

Table A-2: Airborne Contaminants, Vibration, and Shock Specifications for DeltaV
Devices

Airborne Contami-
Device nants Vibration Shock
Workstation Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur-
ers specifications ers specifications ers specifications
8-port hub Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur-
ers specifications ers specifications ers specifications
All switches in the pre- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur-
ceding table. ers specifications ers specifications ers specifications
Fieldbus H1 carrier, ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g -sinehalf-sine
system power sup- borne Contaminants from 5 Hz to 16 Hz, 0.5 wave for 11 ms
plies, controllers, Sin- Class G3 g from 16 Hz to 150 Hz
gle Port Fiber Switch,
Remote Interface Unit,
pre-Series 2 I/O, and
Series 2 I/O
DeltaV Controller Fire- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur-
wall ers specifications ers specifications ers specifications
Legacy Bulk power ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- MIL-STD-810D Method MIL-STD-810D Method
supplies borne Contaminants 514.3, Category 1, Pro- 516.3, Procedure III
Class G2 cedure I

92
Carrier Specifications

Appendix B
Carrier Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier
2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier
8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier
1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders and Cables
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders
4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier
8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier
Fieldbus H1 Carrier
Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Carrier
Intrinsically Safe 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier
Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator Carrier

The DeltaV system supports horizontal carriers, vertical carriers, Intrinsically Safe carriers
and the Fieldbus H1 Carrier. There are two types of vertical carriers: Legacy and
VerticalPLUS. VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for both DeltaV basic process control
systems and DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS). DeltaV SIS is not supported on
Legacy Vertical carriers. Refer to Appendix M for more information on vertical carriers.
Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual for
instructions on installing an SIS system.

Horizontal Carriers

2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier


2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier
8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier
1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders and Cables (left and right)

VerticalPLUS Carriers

4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier


4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier

93
Carrier Specifications

8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carriers


1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders

Legacy Vertical Carriers

4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier


8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier (left and right)

Intrinsically Safe Carriers

Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Carrier


Intrinsically Safe 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier
Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator Carrier

2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier


Table B-1: 2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier Specifications

Item Specification
Capacity One system power supply and one controller or
two system power supplies

94
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-1: 2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier Dimensions

2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier


Table B-2: 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier Specifications

Item Specification
Capacity One or two redundant system power supplies
Maximum current 13 A total output

95
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-2: 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier Dimensions

Side
View Front View 7.0 cm
2
(2.8 in.)

+ 12 VDC output
-
9.1 cm +
(3.6 in.) -
DC reference
ground for 24 VDC power
only
16.5 cm
(6.5 in.)
1
12 VDC
Output
Connector

3.1 cm 8.4 cm 10.0 cm


(3.3 in.) 3
(1.2 in.) (3.9 in.)
10.0 cm
(3.9 in.)

Connect the DC reference ground when using a legacy 24 VDC bulk power supply only.
The DC reference ground connection is not required for a legacy 12 VDC bulk power
supply.

8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier


Item Specification
Capacity Eight I/O cards with terminal blocks.
Maximum current LocalBus (powers I/O cards): 8 A. For large sys-
tems use the LocalBus extenders to add more
power.
Bussed field power bus (shared by multiple I/
O cards): 6.5 A @ 30 VDC or 250 VAC for each
connection
LocalBus cable lengths .87 m (2.8 ft)
1.2 m (3.9 ft) (standard)
1.53 m (5.0 ft)

96
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-3: 8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier Dimensions

Related information

System Power Supply (AC/DC)

1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders and


Cables
The DeltaV system supports left and right 1-wide horizontal carrier extenders. Install the
carrier extenders onto the I/O carriers by sliding together the 48 pin connectors on the
sides of the carriers. The carrier extenders (right side is KJ4001X1-NA1 and left side is
KJ4001X1-NB1) ship with one or two D-shell cables. Typically, one D-shell cable is used;
however, two D-shell cables can also be used. Remember that the length of the LocalBus,
including all cabling cannot exceed 6.5 meters (21.3 feet). Three cable lengths are
available:

Standard cable (KJ4002X1-BF2), including the left and right carrier extenders, is 1.20
meters (3.9 feet). This cable is typically used for a double door cabinet installation.
Refer to "Cabling Examples" for an installation that uses standard cable.
Short cable (KJ4002X1-BF3), including the left and right carrier extenders, is .87
meters (2.8 feet). This cable is typically used for a single door cabinet installation.
The maximum carrier limit is six for this configuration. Figure B-6 on page B-8 shows
an installation that uses short cable.

97
Carrier Specifications

Extended cable (KJ4002X1-BF4), including the left and right carrier extenders, is
1.53 meters (5 feet). This cable is typically used for custom installations. Be sure that
this configuration does not exceed the maximum LocalBus length of 6.5 meters
(21.3 feet). Refer to "Cabling Examples" for a custom installation that uses extended
cable.

Note
If two D-shell cables are used, they must be routed together from the same source to the same
destination.

The following image shows the carrier extenders.

Figure B-4: 1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders

Left carrier extender Side view Right carrier extender


White BNC
connector
(for SIS only) Black BNC
Top D-Shell
connector
connector
Top D-Shell (for SIS only)
(44 pin)
connector C D
(44 pins)
A
A
10.2 cm White
(4.0 in.) BNC
connector
16.5 cm (for SIS only)
(6.5 in.) C

LOCK
D-Shell LOCK

connector
(for dual D-Shell
cables only) 48 48 connector
Pin Pin (for dual
B connector connector B cables only)
Black
BNC
connector
+ + (for SIS only)

Jumper D

4.2 cm 3.1 cm
(1.7 in.) (1.2 in.)
4.6 cm
(1.8 in.)

Related information

Cabling Examples

98
Carrier Specifications

Add External Power at the Left Carrier Extender


Refer to Figure B-5.

1. Remove the jumper on the left carrier extender.

WARNING!
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream carriers.
When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.

Figure B-5: Adding External Power at the Left Horizontal Carrier Extender

2. Insert a 12VDC power supply to the terminal block:

a. + to the center terminal


b. - to the - terminal

Cabling Examples
Figure B-6 shows a single door cabinet installation with short cable (.87 meters/2.8 feet). Be
sure to not exceed the six carrier limit with this type of installation.

99
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-6: Single Door Cabinet Installation with Short Cable

Figure B-7 shows a double door cabinet installation with standard cable (1.20 meters/3.9
feet).

100
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-7: Double Door Cabinet Installation with Standard Cable

Figure B-8 shows a custom installation with extended length cable (1.53 meters/5 feet). Be
sure that this configuration does not exceed the maximum LocalBus length of 6.5 meters
(21.3 feet).

101
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-8: Custom Installation with Extended Length Cable

4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier


Table B-3: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier Specifications

Item Specification
Capacity Two system power supplies and two controllers

102
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-9: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier Dimensions

4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier

Item Specifications
Capacity Two redundant system power supplies
Maximum current 13 A (per output connector)

103
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-10: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier Dimensions

4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier


Table B-4: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier Specifications

Item Specification
Capacity Two (primary and secondary) SISNet Repeaters

104
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-11: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier Dimensions

8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier


Item Specification
Capacity Eight I/O cards with terminal blocks or four Log-
ic Solvers with terminal blocks
Maximum current LocalBus (powers I/O cards): 15.0 A
Bussed field power (shared by multiple I/O
cards): 3.25 A (for each card); 13.0 A (for a set
of 4 cards) @ 30 VDC or 250 VAC
Carrier extender cable (includes 2 carrier ex- 1.1 m (3.6 ft) standard
tenders and cable) .43 m (1.4 ft)

105
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-12: 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier Dimensions

1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders


The 1-wide left and right VerticalPLUS carrier extenders are used to extend power and local
peer bus signals from a left to right 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface carrier and from a
right to left 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface carrier. Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV
Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual for information on the local peer bus.

106
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-13: 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender Dimensions

4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller


Carrier
Table B-5: 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier (Top/Bottom)
Specifications

Item Specification
Capacity Two system power supplies and two controllers
or three system power supplies and one control-
ler

107
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-14: 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier Dimensions

The dimensions for the bottom Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier are the
same as those for the top Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier (shown above).
The carrier connector on the bottom Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier is
located on the top of the carrier.

8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier


Item Specification
Capacity Eight I/O cards with terminal blocks.
Maximum current LocalBus (powers I/O cards): 15.0 A
Bussed field power bus (shared by multiple I/
O card pairs): 6.5 A @ 30 VDC or 250 VAC (for
each connection)

108
Carrier Specifications

Item Specification
LocalBus cable Bottom cable extender: 1.0 m (3.3 ft) nominal
length
Top cable extender: 2.0 m (6.6 ft) nominal
length

Figure B-15: 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier Dimensions


Top View Top View
18.3 cm 18.3 cm
(7.2 in.) (7.2 in.)
9.9 cm 9.9 cm
1 1
(3.9 in.) (3.9 in.)

2.7 cm 2.7 cm
(1.05 in.) (1.05 in.)

Front View Front View

Bussed Field
Power Connector

55.9 cm 55.9 cm
(22.0 in.) (22.0 in.)

3.8 cm 2 3.8 cm
(1.5 in.) (1.5 in.)

Left Side Right Side


Notes:
1 Centerline of mounting screws for DIN rail
2 Clearance recommended on shield bar side of carrier for field wiring

109
Carrier Specifications

Fieldbus H1 Carrier
The fieldbus H1 carrier provides an H1 interface to an 8-channel discrete input card, an 8-
channel discrete output card, and terminal blocks. To function correctly, the two cards
must use the same voltage. The H1 carrier mounts on a DIN rail (T-rail only), wall, or panel
and can be enclosed in the H1 carrier enclosure.

Table B-6: H1 Carrier Power Specifications

Item Specification
Input power rating +24 VDC 20% @ 500 mA (maximum)
Output power rating +12 VDC 5% @ 600 mA (maximum)
Bussed field power (shared by both I/O cards) 6.5 A (maximum)
Fieldbus Port Foundation Fieldbus H1 - 31.25Kbit/second
Fieldbus Power 9 to 32 VDC, 12 mA (maximum)

110
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-16: H1 Carrier Dimensions

The following figure shows the dimensions for the H1 Carrier enclosure (optional).

111
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-17: H1 Carrier Enclosure Dimensions


30.0 cm
(11.81 in.)

23.50 cm 20.0 cm
(9.25 in.) (7.87 in.)

Plate

Carrier

35.0 cm
(13.78 in.)

33.2 cm I/O
(13.07 in.) Card

See Note Door


Enclosure
Mounting Holes (4)
Front View Left Side View
(Looking through Door)

Note
The H1 Carrier Enclosure must be grounded. The Enclosure Ground Kit and instructions for
grounding are included with the enclosure.

Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Carrier


Table B-7: I.S. Power Supply Carrier Dimensions

Item Specification
Capacity One I.S. Power Supply

112
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-18: I.S. Power Supply Carrier Dimensions

Intrinsically Safe 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier


Table B-8: I.S. 8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier Specifications

Item Specification
Capacity Eight I.S. I/O cards with terminal blocks.
LocalBus cable 0.35 m (1.15 ft) nominal length
0.85 m (2.79 ft) nominal length
1.20 m (3.94 ft) nominal length

113
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-19: I.S. 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier Dimensions

Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator Carrier


Item Specification
Capacity One LocalBus Isolator card

114
Carrier Specifications

Figure B-20: I.S. LocalBus Isolator Carrier Dimensions

115
Carrier Specifications

116
Interface Specifications

Appendix C
Interface Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
I/O Cards
Intrinsically Safe I/O Cards
Terminal Blocks
Redundant Terminal Blocks
Mass Termination Blocks
Mass Connection Boards
Intrinsically Safe Terminal Blocks
I/O Interface Keying

This appendix provides specifications and wiring diagrams for all of the I/O cards and
terminal blocks.

I/O Cards
The DeltaV I/O subsystem supports multiple types of I/O cards including analog and
discrete input and output cards, HART input and output cards, serial cards, Thermocouple
mV, RTD, ohms and intrinsically safe analog and discrete input and output cards. Bus cards
such as the Fieldbus H1, Profibus DP, AS-Interface, and DeviceNet are also supported. In
addition, some of the Series 2 versions of the cards are available in Redundant mode for
high-availability applications. The I/O subsystem consists of terminal blocks that snap onto
the carrier to provide screw termination for field wiring and the I/O cards which snap over
the terminal blocks and onto the carrier. The I/O cards convert field signals to the
appropriate format for control and communications.

117
Interface Specifications

Figure C-1: Standard I/O Card

Up to 64 I/O cards are supported by a single I/O subsystem.

To simplify installation and ensure that the I/O interface is suitable for the plant
environment, I/O terminal blocks have field wiring protection keys that correspond to keys
on the I/O cards. The keys ensure that the I/O card and the I/O terminal block match; an I/O
card plugs into an I/O terminal block only if the keys agree.

WARNING!
Be sure that your I/O cards and terminal blocks are compatible before plugging in I/O cards.
Card damage can result if an I/O card and terminal block are incompatible.

Related information

I/O Interface Keying


Intrinsically Safe I/O Interface Keying

DeltaV Series 2 I/O


DeltaV Series 2 I/O cards have a wider operating temperature range than pre-Series 2 cards
and some Series 2 cards support redundancy. Refer to Appendix A for temperature ranges.

The following DeltaV I/O cards are available as Series 2:

AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (Series 2 simplex)


AI, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2 simplex and redundant; 2 and 4 wire)
AI, 16, Channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2 simplex)
AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
AS-Interface (Series 2 simplex)
DeviceNet (Series 2 simplex)
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact (Series 2 simplex and redundant)

118
Interface Specifications

DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated (Series 2 simplex)


DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact (Series 2 simplex)
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated (Series 2 simplex)
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact (Series 2 simplex)
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated (Series 2 simplex)
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side (Series 2 simplex)
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated (Series 2 simplex)
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side (Series 2 simplex)
Series 2 H1 (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
Isolated Input (Series 2 simplex)
Multifunction (Series 2 simplex)
RTD, ohms (Series 2 simplex)
Thermocouple (Series 2 simplex)
Series 2 Profibus DP (Series 2 simplex)
Series 2 Plus Profibus DP (Series 2 simplex and redundant)
Sequence of Events (Series 2 simplex)
Series 2 Serial (Series 2 simplex and redundant)

Series 2 redundant capable cards are configured, autosensed, upgraded, and operated just
like pre-Series 2 cards. Series 2 cards in Simplex mode can function as drop-in
replacements for pre-Series 2 cards of the same type. With the exception of the Simplex
mode Series 2 H1 card, which requires the Series 2 H1 terminal block, no wiring change is
required to replace a pre-Series 2 card. Series 2 cards report their operating mode (simplex
or redundant) to the DeltaV controller based on the type of terminal block on which they
are installed. Redundant terminal blocks provide wiring terminations for the redundant
cards. If a card is installed on a redundant terminal block, it reports itself as operating in
Redundant mode; otherwise, it reports itself as operating in Simplex mode.

Note
Series 2 cards must be used with an MD version of the controller when connected to a redundant
terminal block and operated in Redundant mode.

Other than redundant terminal blocks, no additional software or hardware is required to


support redundancy. A redundant terminal block spans two adjacent slots on the carrier. A
redundant I/O card consists of two Series 2 cards installed in a redundant terminal block.

Note
For both horizontal and vertical carriers, the lower slot number in a redundant pair must be odd and
the upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For example, redundant pairs can be
installed in slots 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 9 and 10. Redundant pairs cannot be installed in slots 6 and 7, 24
and 25. Configuration tools such as the DeltaV Explorer enforce this requirement.

119
Interface Specifications

The double-wide redundant terminal blocks require only a single set of wires for each
redundant channel or fieldbus segment. (The exception is the Redundant Interface
terminal block which uses two sets of wires for the Series 2 Serial card. One set of wires is
used for each interface such as a computer.) The redundant terminal blocks contain screw
terminals appropriate for the card type and signals from the screw terminals are
connected to both cards in a redundant pair.

If all cards are redundant, the controller can support up to 32 redundant pairs. Refer to
DeltaV Books Online for more information on using Series 2 cards in a DeltaV system.

AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA


The DeltaV system supports the following types of AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA cards:

AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA


AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART (2 and 4-wire)
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, Simplex mode (2-wire)
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART, Simplex mode and Redundant mode (2 and
4-wire)

Installation Notes

The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART and the Series
2 AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART cards. Optional terminal blocks are the fused and 4-
wire I/O blocks, the 16 pin mass termination block for 2-wire applications, and the
24-pin mass termination block for 4-wire applications.
The Redundant Analog Input terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for Series 2 Redundant AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART
cards for either 2-wire or 4-wire applications.
To function correctly, the AI cards require that 24 VDC be supplied through the
bussed field power connection. The 4-wire termination block is designed for use
with 4-wire field-powered transmitters. Power for these transmitters must be
provided from an appropriate external power source. See the transmitter
specifications for power source information. For example, if you are using the DeltaV
AI, 420 mA I/O card with a DeltaV 4-wire Termination Block, an external power
source must be connected to the 4-wire transmitter.
The open HART protocol layers digital information on the standard analog 4-20 mA
process signal.
Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal
block and operated in Redundant mode.

Specifications

Table C-1: AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, Specifications (HART and Series 2)

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight

120
Interface Specifications

Table C-1: AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, Specifications (HART and Series 2) (continued)

Item Specification
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 1 to 22.5 mA, with overrange checking
Valid range for LED indication 0.75 to 23 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 120 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Series 2 (for each card in Redundant mode
only(1)):
175 mA typical
250 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 300 mA maximum at 24 VDC (10%)
Field circuit per channel 32 mA maximum
Series 2:
30 mA maximum
Accuracy over temperature range 0.1% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 2.7 Hz, -20.5 dB at one-half the sam-
pling frequency
Calibration None required
Communications Support (only for version with HART pass-through request/response
HART) HART variable report
Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

(1) Double for a redundant pair.

121
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-2: Wiring Diagram for 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA and AI, 8-Channel,
420 mA, HART
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card

Optional fuse Common


connection
(Odd no.) for 8 channels

+ Current
2-Wire analog limiter
and/or HART
field transmitter A/D
T System
Converter

Low
pass
-
(Even no.)
filter
250

I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

122
Interface Specifications

Figure C-3: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

Optional fuse + -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
(Odd no.)
+ Current
limiter

2-wire analog
A/D
and/or HART
Converter
field transmitter
T
System

Low
pass
-
(Even no.)
filter

250

I/O
Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

123
Interface Specifications

Figure C-4: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
2-Wire Primary I/O card
redundant
termination Common
Current connections
limiter for 8 channels
A/D
System
Converter
Low pass
(Odd no.) filter
+
250
2-Wire analog
and/or HART
field transmitter
T
Secondary I/O card

Current
limiter
-
(Even no.) A/D System
Relay Converter
Low pass
filter

Mode
250

Redundant
analog input
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-


Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

124
Interface Specifications

Figure C-5: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 4-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
4-Wire I/O Card Common
termination connection
(Odd no.) for 8 channels
4-Wire analog and/or
HART field transmitter + Low
pass
A/D System
(with user supplied power Converter
and isolated current output) filter

T 250

-
(Even no.)
4-Wire I/O terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

125
Interface Specifications

Figure C-6: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 4-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
4-wire Primary I/O card
Relay redundant
termination Common
connections
for 8 channels
Mode
Low pass A/D
filter Converter System
(Odd no.)
4-Wire analog
and/or HART field + 250
transmitter (with user
supplied power and
isolated current output)
T
Secondary I/O card

-
(Even no.) Low pass A/D
filter Converter System

250

Redundant analog
input terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-


Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related information

16-Pin Mass Termination Block


24-Pin Mass Termination Block
Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block
I/O Terminal Blocks

AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC


Installation Notes

The 4-wire I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for
field wiring for the AI, 8-Channel, 15 VDC card. The 24-pin mass termination block
can also be used.
The AI, 15 VDC card does not provide power to the field transmitter. To function
correctly, the AI cards require that 24 VDC power be connected for field power.

126
Interface Specifications

Specifications

Table C-2: AI, 8-Channel, 15 VDC Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 1 to 5 VDC
Full signal range 0.25 to 5.64 VDC, with overrange checking
Valid range for LED indication 0.18 to 5.77 VDC
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 100 mA (used on card) at 24 VDC (10%)
Input impedance 2 M
Accuracy over temperature range 0.1% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 1.3 Hz
-25 dB at one-half the sampling frequency
Calibration None required
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

127
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-7: Wiring Diagram for AI, 8-Channel, 15 VDC


Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
4-Wire I/O Card Common
termination connection
4-Wire analog and/or (Odd no.) for 8 channels
HART field transmitter
(with user-supplied power
+ Low
pass A/D
Converter
System
filter
and isolated voltage output)
T

-
(Even no.)
4-Wire I/O terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

24-Pin Mass Termination Block


24-Pin Mass Termination Block
I/O Terminal Blocks

AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART


The DeltaV system supports the Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card in Simplex
mode. Only 2-wire transmitters are supported.

Installation Notes

The 16-channel Analog Input terminal block provides screw terminations for field
wiring for the Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card. The 4-wire 16 Channel
Analog Input terminal block can also be used.
To function correctly, the card requires that 24 VDC be supplied through the bussed
field power connection.

Specifications

Table C-3: AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2)

Item Specifications
Number of channels 16

128
Interface Specifications

Table C-3: AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Series 2) (continued)

Item Specifications
Isolation Field to system isolation is factory tested to
1500 VDC. No channel to channel isolation.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 2 to 22 mA
2-wire transmitter power 13.5 V min. at 20 mA (current limited to 29 mA
maximum)
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal) 85 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power (per card) 600 mA maximum at 24 VDC (10%)
Field circuit per channel 30 mA maximum
Accuracy over temperature range 0.2% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Filtering -3 db at 2.7 Hz
-6 db at 4.6 Hz
-20.5 db at 20 Hz
-34 db at 50 Hz
-90 db at 1200 Hz
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 2.7 Hz, -20.5 dB at one-half the sam-
pling frequency
Calibration None required
Communications support HART pass-through request/response
HART variable report
Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

129
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-8: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AI, 16-channel, 4-20 mA, HART
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card
(Odd no.) Common
connection
+ Current
limiter
for 16 channels

2-Wire analog and/or


HART field transmitter A/D
T Converter System
Low
pass
(Even no.)
- filter

250

AI 16-channel Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
terminal block 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

130
Interface Specifications

Figure C-9: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AI, 16-channel, 4-20 mA, HART connected to
a 4-wire device
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
4-wire I/O Card
Termination Common
connection
for 16 channels

A/D
(Odd no.) Converter System
+ Low
pass
filter
4-Wire analog and/or
HART field transmitter
T
250

(Even no.)-
4-wire 16-channel
Analog Input Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
terminal block 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA


The DeltaV system supports the following types of AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA cards:

AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA


AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART (Simplex and Redundant modes)

131
Interface Specifications

Installation Notes

The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field wiring for
the AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART and the Series 2 AO,
8-Channel, 420 mA, HART cards in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the
fused I/O block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
The Redundant Analog Output terminal block is recommended to provide
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART card in
Redundant mode.
The open HART protocol layers digital information on the standard analog 4-20 mA
process signal.
Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal
block and operated in Redundant mode.

Specifications

Table C-4: AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA Specifications (HART and Series 2)

Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 1 mA to 23 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 120 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Series 2 (for each card in Redundant mode
only (2) :)
175 mA typical
250 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 300 mA maximum at 24 VDC (10%)
Accuracy over temperature range 0.25% of span (0 - 60C)
Series 2:
0.25% (0 to 60C)
0.4% (-40 to 70C)
Resolution 12 bits for AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA
14 bits for AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART
14 bits for Series 2 AO, 8-channel, 4-20
mA, HART
Output compliance 20 mA at 21.6 VDC supply into 700 load
Calibration Information stored on card
Communications Support (only for version with HART pass-through request/response
HART) HART variable report
Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel

(2) Double for a redundant pair.

132
Interface Specifications

Table C-4: AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA Specifications (HART and Series 2) (continued)

Item Specifications
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-10: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in Simplex
Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
4-20 mA current source
- +
I/O Card Common Termination
connection
for 8 channels

Optional fuse

D/A
System Converter
(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device and/or HART
Load

-
(Even no.) I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

133
Interface Specifications

Figure C-11: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

- + - +
Primary I/O card Redundant
Common termination
connections
for 8 channels
Mode Relay
System D/A
Converter

(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device
Load and/or HART
Secondary I/O card

-
(Even no.)
System D/A
Converter

Redundant analog
output terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-


Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks


16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block
Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block

AS-Interface
The DeltaV system supports the Actuator Sensor-Interface card (AS-Interface) and the
Series 2 AS-Interface card in Simplex mode.

The AS-Interface is a digital, serial, bi-directional communications protocol and bus system
that interconnects simple binary on/off devices such as actuators, sensors, and discrete
devices in the field. The AS-Interface standard is defined by CENELEC standard EN 50295.

134
Interface Specifications

The two-conductor AS-Interface cable supplies both power and data for field devices. An
AS-Interface network can include branches. The total cable length, (main line and all
branches), cannot exceed 100 meters. Refer to the following table for AS-Interface cable
distance limits and to the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295) for design and engineering
details on AS-Interface cable.

Table C-5: AS-Interface Cable Distance Limits

Item Specification
Recommended cable Unshielded AS-Interface yellow cable(3)
Distance limits 100 meters total length (main line and
branches) without repeater or extender
300 meters total length (main line and
branches) with two repeaters(4)
300 meters total length (main line and
branches) with one extender and one re-
peater

For more information on the AS-Interface and for information on installing AS-Interface
devices, refer to the AS-Interface web site at www.as-interface.com.

Installation Notes

The Interface terminal block provides terminations for field wiring for the AS-
Interface card and the Series 2 AS-Interface card in Simplex mode.
It is recommended that you do not connect the AS-Interface devices directly to the
AS-Interface card terminals. Use one AS-Interface cable to connect the AS-Interface
card to the power supply and use another AS-Interface cable to connect the devices
to the power supply.
If you are using extenders and repeaters, refer to the device data sheet for additional
cabling recommendations.
The AS-Interface bus requires a special AS-Interface power supply (purchased
separately) that provides electrical isolation from the data signals. A standard power
supply can be used but it must have a conditioning module added to its output.
Refer to the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295) for design and engineering details on
the AS-Interface power supply.
Appendix J provides information on extending power to an AS-Interface bus.

Table C-6: AS-Interface Specifications

Item Specification
Number of ports Two
Port Type Actuator Sensor-Interface 167 kb/second

(3) Any other cable, shielded or unshielded, can be used if the installation meets all the impedance requirements specified in the AS-Interface
standard (EN 50295).
(4) Repeaters require an additional AS-Interface power supply on the far side of the repeater.

135
Interface Specifications

Table C-6: AS-Interface Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Isolation Each port is optically isolated from the system
and from each other and factory tested to 1500
VDC.
LocalBus Current 300 mA (max)
24 VDC Field circuit power, per card None
30 VDC AS-Interface field power per port 70 mA (max)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-12: Wiring Diagram for AS-Interface


Carrier

I/O Card Termination

AS-i 1 AS-i ( ) +
Encoder/
decoder 2 AS-i ( ) - Port
1
3, 5, 7 AS-i ( ) +
System
4, 6, 8 AS-i ( ) -

AS-i 9 AS-i ( ) +
Encoder/
decoder 10 AS-i ( ) -
Port
2
11, 13, 15 AS-i ( ) +
12, 14, 16 AS-i ( ) -
Interface terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
AS-i +
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
AS-i -
Port Port
1 2

Related information

Interface Terminal Block


System Power Guidelines

136
Interface Specifications

DeviceNet
The DeltaV system supports the DeviceNet card and Series 2 DeviceNet card in Simplex
mode.

DeviceNet is an all digital, serial, bi-directional communication protocol that interconnects


devices in the field. For information on installing DeviceNet devices, refer to the DeviceNet
web site at www.odva.org.

Installation Notes

The Fieldbus H1 terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field


wiring for the DeviceNet card and Series 2 DeviceNet card in Simplex mode. The key
on the H1 terminal block is set to D6 at the factory. Change the key position to D5 to
match the key on the Series 2 DeviceNet card.
The shield on the terminal block can be grounded at pin 8 if required by the
application. Refer to Figure C-13.
The DeviceNet and Series 2 DeviceNet card in Simplex mode require the MD
controller.
Appendix J provides information on extending power to a DeviceNet network.

Specifications

Table C-7: DeviceNet Interface Specifications (includes Series 2)

Item Specification
Number of Ports One
Port Type DeviceNet
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Field circuit power (24 VDC nominal), per card 40 mA maximum at 24 VDC (10%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

137
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-13: Wiring Diagram for DeviceNet


Carrier

I/O Card Termination

5 +24 VDC
Regulator

1 24 VDC return

3 Shield
System

8 Shield

4 CAN HI

2 CAN LO

Fieldbus H1 terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 block (change key
position to D5)

-
V CL S CH V
+ S

Related information

System Power Guidelines


Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block

DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact


The DeltaV system supports the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card and the Series 2
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card (Simplex and Redundant modes).

Installation Notes

The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for
field wiring for the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact and the Series 2 DI, 8-
Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the I/O
terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
The Redundant Discrete terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
in Redundant mode.

138
Interface Specifications

Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal


block and operated in Redundant mode.
Compatibility with NAMUR Sensors NAMUR sensors that are designed to
operate within an excitation voltage range of 5 to 18 V are compatible with Series 2
DI, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact cards. At 24 VDC, enough wetting current and
excitation voltage is provided to operate NAMUR sensors designed for an excitation
voltage range of 5 to 18 V. NAMUR sensors not designed to operate in the 5 to 18 V
range may not work with Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact cards.
Line Fault Detection The Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact card has line
fault detection for detecting open or short circuits in field wiring. To use this
capability you must:
- Enable line fault detection in your configuration. Enable line fault detection on a
channel-by-channel basis when you configure the channels.
- Connect the dry contact to external resistors. Connect the dry contact to a 6.8
K resistor in parallel (allows the open circuit detection) and a 2.4 KW resistor in
series (allows short circuit detection).

Figure C-14: External Line Fault Detection Resistors

(Odd no.)
+ 2.4K

6.8K

-
(Even no.)

Line Fault Detection Value Detected


Short Circuit <100 for guaranteed short circuit detec-
tion
Open Circuit >100 k for guaranteed open loop detec-
tion

- Line Fault Detection in NAMUR Sensors Line fault detection is built into
NAMUR sensors. Do not use external resistors with NAMUR sensors; however,
you must enable line fault detection in your configuration when using NAMUR
sensors.

Specifications

Table C-8: DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Specifications (includes Series 2)

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight

139
Interface Specifications

Table C-8: DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Specifications (includes Series 2)
(continued)

Item Specification
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for On > 2.2 mA
Detection level for Off < 1 mA
Impedance 5 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA typical
100 mA maximum
Series 2:
90 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 100 mA at 24 VDC (10%)
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-15: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
Optional fuse field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
System

(Odd no.)
+

I/O Terminal block -


(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

140
Interface Specifications

Figure C-16: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
+ -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
(Odd no.)
System
+ 5K

Logic

-
(Even no.)

I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

141
Interface Specifications

Figure C-17: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
Redundant Primary I/O card
termination Common
connections
for 8 channels
Mode
Relay System
5K

(Odd no.) Logic


+

Secondary I/O card

5K System

Logic
-
(Even no.)

Redundant
discrete
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-


Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks


16-Pin Mass Termination Block
Redundant Discrete Terminal Block

DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated


The DeltaV system supports the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI,
8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI, 8-Channel,
24 VDC, Isolated card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the fused I/O
terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block.

142
Interface Specifications

If you use a mass termination block with the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card,
refer to the termination block specifications for the input rating for each block.
Those specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the
following table.

Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and from each other and factory tested to
1500 VDC.
Detection level for On > 10 VDC
Detection level for Off < 5 VDC
Input impedance 5 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA typical
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-18: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated


Optional fuse Carrier

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.) System


+ + 5K
24
VDC
Source
- -
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks

143
Interface Specifications

16-Pin Mass Termination Block

DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact


The DeltaV system supports the DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC Dry Contact card and the Series 2
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC Dry Contact card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact card and the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 120
VAC, Dry Contact card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the I/O block.

Specifications

Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.
Detection level for On > 1.4 mA
Detection level for Off < 0.56 mA
Impedance 60 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 15 mA at 120 VAC
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

144
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-19: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact
Carrier
120 VAC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
L N
Termination I/O Card

Common
(Odd no.) connection
+ for 8 channels

System

-
(Even no.)

I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks

DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated


The DeltaV system supports the DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI,
8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated
card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O block.

Specifications

Table C-9: DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated Specifications

Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight

145
Interface Specifications

Table C-9: DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated Specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC and from other channels at 250
VAC.
Detection level for On 84 VAC to 130 VAC(5)
Detection level for Off 0 VAC to 34 VAC
Input load (contact cleaning) 2 mA at 120 VAC
Input impedance 60 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA typical
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-20: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.)
L + 60K System
120
VAC
Source
N -
(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks

(5) Phase should be considered when applying AC voltage to multiple input channels.

146
Interface Specifications

DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact


Installation Notes

The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact card. An optional terminal block is the
I/O block.

Specifications

Table C-10: DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact Specifications

Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.
Detection level for On > 0.71 mA
Detection level for Off < 0.28 mA
Impedance 238 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 7 mA at 230 VAC
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

147
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-21: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact
Carrier
230 VAC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
L N
Termination I/O Card
Common
(Odd no.) connection
+ for 8 channels

System

-
(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks

DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated


Installation Notes

The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DI, 8-channel, 230 VAC, Isolated card. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O
block.

Specifications

Table C-11: DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC and from other channels at 250
VAC.
Detection level for On 168 VAC to 250 VAC

148
Interface Specifications

Table C-11: DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Detection level for Off 0 VAC to 68 VAC
Input load (contact cleaning) 1 mA at 230 VAC
Input impedance 238 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-22: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse

Termination I/O Card

(Odd no.)
L + 238K System
230
VAC
Source
N -
(Even no.)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks

DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact


The DeltaV system supports the DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card and the Series 2
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card in Simplex mode.

149
Interface Specifications

Installation Notes

The 32-Channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for


field wiring for the DI, 32-channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact and Series 2 DI, 32-channel,
24 VDC, Dry Contact cards. The 40-pin mass termination block also can be used.
The return connection for all 32 channels is the 24 VDC Field Power Ground. You
must supply an external wire to make this connection. However the connection is
internally made if the 40-pin mass termination block is used with the Series 2 DI, 32-
Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card and no external wire is required.

Specifications

Table C-12: DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact (includes Series 2)

Item Specification
Number of channels 32
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA
Detection level for OFF < 0.25 mA
Impedance 5 K
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 50 mA typical
75 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 150 mA at 24 VDC (10%)
Series 2: 150 mA at 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

150
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-23: Wiring Diagram for DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O Card Common
connection
System for 32
channels
32-Channel terminal
block (the numbers
indicate the channel
assigments)
+

1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Related information

32-Channel Terminal Block


40-Pin Mass Termination Block

DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side


The DeltaV system supports the DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card and the Series 2
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card (Simplex and Redundant modes).

Installation Notes

The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for
field wiring for the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side and the Series 2 DO, 8-
channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the
I/O terminal block, and the 10 and 16-pin mass termination blocks.
If you use a mass termination block with the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side I/O
card, refer to the termination block specifications for the output rating for each
block. Those specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in
Table C-13.
The Redundant Discrete terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card.

151
Interface Specifications

Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal


block and operated in Redundant mode.
Line Fault Detection The Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC High-Side card has line
fault detection that can be enabled on a channel-by-channel basis as a configuration
item. When line fault detection is enabled, the card detects open and short line fault
conditions by performing an internal readback of the output to verify its value in
both on and off states. The card tests the opposite state of its current value by
temporarily changing the output to that value, performing the internal readback,
then returning the output to its configured output value. The pulses to the opposite
state are never greater than 200 Secmicrosecond. High speed inputs that connect
to a DO channel with line fault enabled must consider these pulses in the input
software scheme. When line fault detection is not enabled, a more limited detection
of open and short line fault conditions is available on the active redundant card only.
This is accomplished by the internal readback mechanism without pulsing the
output to the opposite state. Therefore, shorts can be detected only when the DO
channel is on, and opens can be detected only when the DO channel is off. When
line fault detection is not enabled, and the card is simplex, line fault tests do not run
and line fault conditions are not reported.

Line Fault Detection Value Detected


Short Circuit < 5 for > 3 seconds
Open Circuit - >25 K for guaranteed open loop detec-
tion
- < 8 K for guaranteed no open loop de-
tection

When pulse testing is enabled, the LED on the output device may be slightly
illuminated.

Note
Line fault detection is not compatible with significant capacitive loading (cable + load > 30 nF) and
must be disabled under these conditions.

Specifications

Table C-13: DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side Specifications (includes Series 2)

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Output range 2 VDC to 60 VDC
Series 2: 24 VDC 10%
Output rating 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 4.0 A for
<100 ms; 6.0 A for <20 ms); 3.0 A maximum per
card

152
Interface Specifications

Table C-13: DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side Specifications (includes Series 2)


(continued)

Item Specification
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A (inrush 5.0 A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cy-
cle)
Off-state leakage 1.2 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Series 2:
90 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.0 A at 24 VDC (10%)
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted
by the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

153
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-24: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
I/O Card Termination Optional fuse
Common
connection
for 8
channels
(Odd no.)
System
+
Load

-
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
- 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

154
Interface Specifications

Figure C-25: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ - + -
Primary Redundant
I/O card termination
Common
connections
for 8 channels
System Relay
Mode

(Odd no.)
+
Secondary
I/O card
Load

System
-
(Even no.)

Redundant discrete
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-


Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks


Redundant Discrete Terminal Block

DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated


The DeltaV system supports the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DO,
8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel,
24 VDC, Isolated card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the Fused I/O
terminal block and 16-pin mass termination block.

155
Interface Specifications

If you use a mass termination block with the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card,
refer to the termination block specifications for the output rating for each block.
Those specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the
following table.

Specifications

Table C-14: DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and from each other and factory tested to
1500 VDC.
Output range 2 VDC to 60 VDC
Output rating 1.0 A (inrush 4.0 A for <100 ms; 6.0 A for <20
ms)
Off-state leakage 1.2 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted
by the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5.0 A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cy-
cle)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

156
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-26: Wiring Diagram for DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated


Carrier Optional fuse

I/O Card Termination


(Odd no.)
System + +
DC
Power
supply
Load
-
(Even no.)
-

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
- I/O Terminal block

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks


16-Pin Mass Termination Block
10-Pin Mass Termination Block

DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side


The DeltaV system supports the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side card and the
Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side card and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel,
120/230 VAC, High-Side card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the I/O
terminal block.

Specifications

Table C-15: DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.

157
Interface Specifications

Table C-15: DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Output range 20 VAC to 250 VAC
Output rating 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A for
< 100 ms; 20 A for < 20 ms)
3.0 A maximum per card up to 5C
2.0 A maximum per card up to 60C
Series 2:
1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A
for < 100 ms; 20 A for < 20 ms)
3.0 A maximum per card
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cycle)
Off state leakage 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC, 4 mA maximum at
230 VAC
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.0 A at 120 VAC or 230 VAC per I/O Interface
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted
by the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

158
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-27: Wiring Diagram for DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side
Carrier
120/230 VAC Bussed AC
field power connection
L N
I/O Card Termination
Optional fuse
Common
connection
for 8 channels (Odd no.)
System +
Load

-
(Even no.)

I/O Terminal block


1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks

DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated


The DeltaV system supports the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card and the Series
2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230
VAC, Isolated card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O block.

Table C-16: DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated Specifications

Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC and from other channels at 250
VAC.
Output range 20 VAC to 250 VAC

159
Interface Specifications

Table C-16: DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated Specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
Output rating 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A for
<100 ms; 20 A for <20 ms)
3.0 A maximum per card up to 50C (122F)
2.0 A maximum per card up to 60C (140F)
Series 2:
1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A
for <100 ms; 20 A for <20 ms)
3.0 A maximum per card
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cycle)
Off state leakage 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC
4 mA maximum at 230 VAC
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted
by the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

160
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-28: Wiring Diagram for DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse

I/O Card Termination

120/230 VAC Power


(Odd no.)
System + L N

Load
-(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks

DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side


The DeltaV system supports the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side card and the Series 2
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The 32-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for


field wiring for the DO, 32-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side and Series 2 DO, 32-Channel,
24 VDC, High Side cards. The 40-pin mass termination block also can be used.
The return connection for all 32 channels is the 24 VDC Field Power Ground. You
must supply an external wire to make this connection. However the connection is
internally made if the 40-pin mass termination block is used with the Series 2 DO,
32-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side card and no external wire is required. A resettable 1A
fuse protects each group of four channels (1-4, 5-8,...29-32) from a short circuit.
Excessive current on any single channel can trip the fuse and disable all four channels
in the group. If the fuse trips, turn off or disconnect the group of four channels and
allow the fuse to cool and reset.

161
Interface Specifications

Specifications

Table C-17: DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side (includes Series 2)

Item Specification
Number of channels 32
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC
Output range 24 VDC (10%)
Series 2: 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Output rating 100 mA per channel
Off-state leakage 0.1 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.2 A at 24 VDC (10%)
Series 2: 3.2 A at 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-29: Wiring Diagram for DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side


Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
I/O Card Termination

Common
connection for
32 channels Load
System

32-Channel terminal
block (the numbers
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 indicate the channel
assigments)
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30

3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

162
Interface Specifications

Related information

32-Channel Terminal Block


40-Pin Mass Termination Block

Fieldbus H1 and Series 2 H1


The DeltaV system supports the following types of H1 cards:

Fieldbus H1
Series 2 H1 (Simplex and Redundant modes)

Fieldbus is an all digital, serial, bi-directional communication protocol that interconnects


devices such as actuators, sensors, discrete devices, and controllers in the field. It is a Local
Area Network (LAN) for instruments that enables basic control and I/O to be moved to the
field device. Refer to the manual Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Digital Automation System
for more information.

Installation Notes

The Fieldbus H1 terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for


field wiring for the H1 card.
The Series 2 H1 terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for
field wiring for the Series 2 H1 card in Simplex mode.
The Redundant H1 terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations
for field wiring for the Series 2 H1 card in Redundant mode.
Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal
block and operated in Redundant mode.
Appendix J System Power Guidelines provides information on extending power to a
fieldbus segment.

Specifications

Item Specification
Number of Ports Two
Port Type Foundation Fieldbus H1 - 31.25 Kbit/second
Isolation Each port is isolated from the system and from
each other and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Series 2:
200 mA typical
300 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Fieldbus power (for Series 2 card) 9 to 32 VDC, 12 mA per port
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

163
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-30: Wiring Diagram for Fieldbus H1


Carrier

I/O Card Termination


1+
System 2+
Port 1
3-

4-

5+

System 6+
Port 2
7-

8-

Fieldbus H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ + - - + + - -
Port Port
1 2

164
Interface Specifications

Figure C-31: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 H1 in Simplex Mode


Carrier

I/O Card Termination

1, 7 (no connection)

2, 8 (no connection)
Port 1
H1
encoder/
decoder
+
3 Port 1 ( )

Port 1

System
-
4 Port 1 ( )

Port 2
+
5 Port 2 ( )
H1 Port 2
encoder/
decoder -
6 Port 2 ( )

Series 2 H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ - + -
Port Port
1 2

165
Interface Specifications

Figure C-32: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 H1 in Redundant Mode


Carrier 24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

Primary Redundant
I/O card termination

Port 1
+ 1, 7 (no connection)
H1 encoder/decoder - 2,8 (no connection)

9, 15 (no connection)
System
10, 16 (no connection)

Port 2 + +
H1 encoder/decoder - 3, 11 +
Port 1
Secondary 4, 12 -
I/O card -

Port 1
+
H1 encoder/decoder -
+
System
5, 13 +
Port 2
6, 14 -
Port 2 + -
H1 encoder/decoder -
Redundant H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2

Related information

Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block


Series 2 H1 Terminal Block
Redundant H1 Terminal Block
System Power Guidelines

Isolated Input
The DeltaV system supports the Series 2 Isolated Input card in Simplex mode.

The Isolated Input card supports Thermocouple, MilliVolt, RTD, ohms, and Voltage input
ranges.

Installation Notes

The Isolated Input Card uses the Isolated Input Terminal Block to provide terminations for
wiring.

166
Interface Specifications

Specifications

Table C-18: Isolated Input Card Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.1010.1 or CAN/ Installation Cat II, Pollution degree 2
CSA-C22.2 No.61010.1 Channel to system - 600 VAC double insula-
tion. Each channel is optically isolated from
the system and factory tested to 5000 VDC.
Channel to channel - 600 VAC basic insula-
tion.Each channel is optically isolated from
each other and factory tested to 3100
VDC.(6)
ADC Resolution 16 bit
-3dB Filter Frequency 2.7 Hz
DC/50/60 Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Input Impedance 10 M
Thermocouple Sensor Types B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, Uncharacterized
RTD Sensor Types PT100, PT200, Ni120, Cu10, Resistance, User
defined
mV and V ranges Refer to Table C-24 and Table C-27.
Input type mix Independently configurable
Ambient temperature -40 to 70C
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
LocalBus power rating 12 VDC, 350 mA, no field power required

Table C-19: Isolated Input Card, Thermocouple and MilliVolt Input Specifications

Item Specification
Linearization error 0.003% Full Scale
Cold Junction Compensation Accuracy 1.0C
Cold Junction Compensation types Off, local, remote
Cold Junction Compensation range -40 to 85C
Temperature scale ITS90
Open circuit detection (Thermocouple only) 0.4 A DC
Detection time 1 second

(6) Warning: When hazardous live voltages are present on a channel, adjacent channel wiring must be inaccessible.

167
Interface Specifications

In the 25C Reference Accuracy column in the following table, total error is made up of
reading accuracy, CJC accuracy, and sensor accuracy.

Table C-20: Isolated Input Card Thermocouple Input Range Specifications

25C Refer-
ence Accura- Temperature Nominal Res- Operating
Sensor Types cy Drift olution Full Scale Range
B 1.2C 0.116C/C 0.09C 250 to 1810C 250 to 1810C
E 0.5C 0.004C/C 0.05C -200 to -200 to
1000C 1000C
J 0.6C 0.005C/C 0.06C -210 to -190 to
1200C 1200C
K 0.5C .013C/C 0.05C -270 to -140 to
1372C 1372C
N 1.0C .015C/C 0.05C -270 to -190 to
1300C 1300C
R 1.7C .083C/C 0.06C -50 to 1768C 0 to 1768C
S 1.8C .095C/C 0.08C -50 to 1768C 0 to 1768C
T 0.7C .025C/C 0.04C -270 to 400C -200 to 400C
Uncharacter- 0.05 mV .0003 mV/C .0031 mV -100 to 100 -100 to 100
ized; no linea- mV mV
rization or CJC

Table C-21: Isolated Input Card MilliVolt Input Range Specifications

25C Reference Temperature Maximum Reso-


Sensor Type Input Ranges Accuracy Drift lution
20 mV 20 mV 0.02 mV 0.001 mV/C 0.0008 mV
50 mV 50 mV 0.03 mV 0.0005 mV/C 0.0017 mV
100 mV 100 mV 0.05 mV 0.0003 mV/C 0.0031 mV

Table C-22: Isolated Input Card, RTD, ohms Input Specifications

Item Specification
Measurement configurations 2, 3, and 4 wire
Excitation current 100 A DC
Temperature scale ITS90
Open sensor detection time 1 second
Short circuit detection time 1 second
Pt 100 and Pt 200 alpha 0.00385

168
Interface Specifications

Table C-23: Isolated Input Card, RTD, ohms Input Range Specifications

25C Reference Temperature Sensor Input


Sensor Type Accuracy Drift Resolution Range
Pt100 0.5C 0.018C/C 0.05C -200 to 850C
Pt200 0.5C 0.012C/C 0.05C -200 to 850C
Ni120 0.2C 0.006C/C 0.02C -70 to 300C
Cu10 2.0C 0.076C/C 0.23C -30 to 140C
Resistance 0.5 0.018 /C 0.02 1 to 1000
User defined 0.4 0.009 /C ~0.05 0 to 1000

Table C-24: Isolated Input Card, Voltage Input Range Specifications

25C Reference Temperature Maximum Reso-


Sensor Type Sensor Range Accuracy Drift lution
0-5V 0-5V 0.005 V 0.0002 V/C 0.00009 V
0 - 10 V 0 - 10 V 0.010 V 0.0004 V/C 0.00016 V
1-5V 1-5V 0.005 V 0.0002 V/C 0.00009 V
1V 1 V 0.0025 V 0.0002 V/C 0.00015 V
5V 5 V 0.005 V 0.0002 V/C 0.00017 V
10 V 10 V 0.010 V 0.0004 V/C 0.0003 V

169
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-33: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 Isolated Input


Carrier

Termination I/O Card

Excitation
1, 5, 9, 13 current

+
2, 6, 10, 14
4 3 2 TC
wire wire wire
mV
V A/D
To
- Conv.
system
3, 7, 11, 15

4, 8, 12, 16

1 5 9 13 4-wire sensor excitation


Isolated input
terminal block
2 6 10 14
+ Sensor +
3 7 11 15
- Sensor -
4 8 12 16
Wire compensation

Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4

Related information

Isolated Input Terminal Block

Multifunction
The DeltaV system supports the Multifunction card and the Series 2 Multifunction card in
Simplex mode.

The Multifunction card uses the 32-channel terminal block to provide terminations for
wiring. The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the Multifunction card.

170
Interface Specifications

Table C-25: 32-Channel Terminal Block used with Multifunction Card

Terminal on Termina- Channel Nomencla- Terminal on Termina- Channel Nomencla-


tion Block ture tion Block ture
Terminal 1 Reserved for future use Terminal 17 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch1+
Terminal 2 Reserved for future use Terminal 18 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch1-
Terminal 3 Reserved for future use Terminal 19 Reserved for future use
Terminal 4 Reserved for future use Terminal 20 Reserved for future use
Terminal 5 Reserved for future use Terminal 21 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch2+
Terminal 6 Reserved for future use Terminal 22 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch2-
Terminal 7 Reserved for future use Terminal 23 Reserved for future use
Terminal 8 Reserved for future use Terminal 24 Reserved for future use
Terminal 9 Reserved for future use Terminal 25 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch3+
Terminal 10 Reserved for future use Terminal 26 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch3-
Terminal 11 +24 VDC Terminal 27 Reserved for future use
Terminal 12 - 24 VDC (return) Terminal 28 Reserved for future use
Terminal 13 Reserved for future use Terminal 29 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch4+
Terminal 14 Reserved for future use Terminal 30 DI or PIN (pulse input),
Ch4-
Terminal 15 +24 VDC Terminal 31 Reserved for future use
Terminal 16 - 24 VDC (return) Terminal 32 Reserved for future use

The Multifunction I/O Card discrete input channel has a switching hysteresis of 80 mV.
Noise signals above this amplitude are detected by the input channel.

Specifications

Table C-26: Multifunction Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and from each other and factory tested to
1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON 4.8 VDC (minimum)
Detection level for OFF 1.0 VDC (maximum)

171
Interface Specifications

Table C-26: Multifunction Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Input impedance 3 to 25 mA at 5 to 24 VDC
Input accuracy 0.1% reading (over 10 Hz - 50 kHz signals)(7)
Input frequency Sine wave - 10 Hz to 50 kHz
Square wave - 0.1 Hz to 50kHz
Resolution 1 pulse
Minimum pulse width 10 S
Maximum input voltage 26.4 VDC
Resolution counter 32 bits
LocalBus current 250 mA maximum
Series 2: 150 mA maximum
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-34: Wiring Diagram for Multifunction 24 VDC


Carrier

Termination I/O Card


System
+ + 750
24
VDC
Source
- -

Ch Ch Ch Ch
Use 32-channel 1 2 3 4
terminal block (refer
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
to table for pin out
connections and
+
channel nomenclature) 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
-
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Related information

32-Channel Terminal Block

(7) For a pulse input channel, filtering may be required to meet the accuracy specification.

172
Interface Specifications

Profibus DP
The DeltaV system supports the Profibus DP card, the Series 2 Profibus DP card in Simplex
mode, and the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card in Simplex and Redundant modes.

Profibus is an all digital, serial, bi-directional communication protocol that interconnects


devices in the field. For information on installing Profibus devices, refer to the Profibus web
site at www.profibus.com.

Installation Notes

The Profibus terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Profibus DP card and Series 2 Profibus DP card in Simplex mode.
The Redundant Profibus DP terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card in Redundant
mode. Do not plug a simplex Profibus DP or Series 2 Profibus DP card into a
Redundant Profibus DP terminal block. For simplex or redundant applications, when
the termination is in the OUT position, pins 1 and 3 and 4 and 6 can be used. When
the termination is in the IN position only pins 1 and 3 can be used.
Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal
block and operated in Redundant mode.

Item Specification
Number of Ports One
Port Type Profibus DP
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.

Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows a wiring diagram for the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card. For a
redundant card, the wiring shown in the I/O Card portion of the image is replicated.

173
Interface Specifications

Figure C-35: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 Plus Profibus DP Card in Simplex or
Redundant Mode
Carrier

I/O Card Termination

1 A1

T in Terminator
System

3 B1

4 A2
T out
6 B2

7 CTS

2, 5, 8 S

Wiring in the area labeled


I/O Card is duplicated Profibus DP or redundant Profibus DP
for redundancy terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (refer to terminal
block specifications for
terminator positions)
A1 S B1 A2 S B2 CTS S

Related information

Profibus DP Terminal Block


Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block

RTD, ohms
The DeltaV system supports the RTD, ohms card and the Series 2 RTD, ohms card in
Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The RTD, ohms terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the RTD, ohms card.

Table C-27: RTD, ohms Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Sensor Types 2-wire, 3-wire, or 4-wire: Resistance, Pt100,
Pt200, Pt500, Ni120, Cu10, user defined

174
Interface Specifications

Table C-27: RTD, ohms Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor. Refer to Table C-28.
LocalBus Power Rating 12 VDC, 160 mA
Ambient Temperature 0 to 60C
Series 2: -40 to 70C
Accuracy over temperature range Refer to Table C-28.
Resolution (Varies with sensor type. Refer to Ta- 16 bits conversion
ble C-32).
Repeatability 0.05% of span
DC/50/60/Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

The following table shows the full scale, operating range, reference accuracy, temperature
drift, and resolution for the RTD, ohms sensor types

Table C-28: RTD, ohms Sensor Type Specifications

Operating 25 Reference Temperature


Sensor Type Full Scale Range Accuracy Drift Resolution
Resistance 0 to 2,000 0 to 2,000 6.2 0.112 /C ~0.02
Pt100 -200 to 850C -200 to 850C 0.5C 0.018C/C ~0.05C
Pt200 -200 to 850C -200 to 850C 0.5C 0.012C/C ~0.05C
Pt500 -200 to 850C -200 to 850C 3.5C 0.063C/C ~0.18C
Ni120 -70 to 300C -70 to 300C 0.2C 0.006C/C ~0.02C
Cu10 -30 to 140C -30 to 140C 2.0C 0.157C/C ~0.23C
Resistance/ 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 0.4 0.009 /C ~0.05
user defined(8)

(8) The Callendar-Van Dusen linearization equation can be used with user defined Pt RTDs. Refer to Recommended I/O Practices in DeltaV
Books online for usage information.

175
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-36: Wiring Diagram for Series 1 RTD, ohms


Carrier

Termination I/O Card


Sensor
excitation Excitation
current

Sensor +
4 3 2 A/D
wire Conv. System
wire wire
Sensor -
Circuit
common
RTD, ohms
Terminal block

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 Sensor
excitation
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+ Sensor

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
- Sensor

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Circuit
common

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

176
Interface Specifications

Figure C-37: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 RTD, ohms


Carrier

Termination I/O Card


Sensor
excitation Excitation
current

Sensor +
4 3 2 A/D
wire Conv. System
wire wire
Sensor -
Circuit
common Excitation
current
RTD, ohms
Terminal block

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 Sensor
excitation
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+ Sensor

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
- Sensor

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Circuit
common

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

RTD, ohms Terminal Block

Sequence of Events
The DeltaV system supports the Sequence of Events card and the Series 2 Sequence of
Events card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The 32-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Sequence of Events card and the Series 2 Sequence of Events card in Simplex
mode. The 40-pin mass termination block also can be used. The following table lists the
cable pin out connections for the Sequence of Events card

177
Interface Specifications

Table C-29: 32-Channel Terminal Block used with Sequence of Events

Channel Nomencla- Channel Nomencla-


Terminal ture Terminal ture
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Terminal 17 Channel 9+
Terminal 2 Channel 1- Terminal 18 Channel 9-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Terminal 19 Channel 10+
Terminal 4 Channel 2- Terminal 20 Channel 10-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Terminal 21 Channel 11+
Terminal 6 Channel 3- Terminal 22 Channel 11-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Terminal 23 Channel 12+
Terminal 8 Channel 4- Terminal 24 Channel 12-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Terminal 25 Channel 13+
Terminal 10 Channel 5- Terminal 26 Channel 13-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Terminal 27 Channel 14+
Terminal 12 Channel 6- Terminal 28 Channel 14-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Terminal 29 Channel 15+
Terminal 14 Channel 7- Terminal 30 Channel 15-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Terminal 31 Channel 16+
Terminal 16 Channel 8- Terminal 32 Channel 16-

An MD controller and Network Time Server are required for a Sequence of Events card.

Specifications

Table C-30: Sequence of Events Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels 16; each channel can be configured for SOE or
DI operation.
Scan rate 0.25 msec for all 16 channels
Time stamp accuracy (for SOE channels only) 0.25 msec on a card; 1 msec in a controller. Ac-
curacy with reference to system clock time after
a 4 msec debounce filter has been applied.
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA
Detection level for OFF < 0.25 mA
Impedance 5K

178
Interface Specifications

Table C-30: Sequence of Events Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 50 mA typical
75 mA maximum
Series 2
75 mA typical
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 75 mA at 24 VDC (10%)
Series 2: 75 mA at 24 VDC (20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-38: Wiring Diagram for Sequence of Events


Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection

+ -
Termination I/O card Common
(Odd no.) connection
for 16 channels
+

System

-
(Even no.)

32-Channel
terminal block Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
+
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
-
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31
+
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Related information

32-Channel Terminal Block


40-Pin Mass Termination Block
Setting Up a Network Time Server

179
Interface Specifications

Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485


The DeltaV system supports the Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 and the Series 2 Serial
Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485.

The DeltaV Serial Card provides an interface to a variety of serial devices, such as PLCs
(Programmable Logic Controllers) that use the Modbus RTU or ASCII protocol. With the
DeltaV Explorer, you can configure each of the two ports provided on the serial card to
support RS232, RS422/485 half duplex, or RS422/485 full duplex signals and you can
configure the baud rate of each port.

Installation Notes

For CE compliance, use shielded cables to connect the serial card to external
devices. Ground the cable shield at one end only. If the external device does not
provide a mechanism to ground the cable shield, connect the shield to the DeltaV
Carrier Shield Bar. If you use the RS422/485 ports, the shield must also provide the
ground reference for the port. Connect the cable shield to the corresponding
ground (GND) terminal on the interface terminal block.
The Interface terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Serial card and the Series 2 Serial card in Simplex mode.
The Redundant Interface terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 Serial card in Redundant mode.
Refer to ANSI TIA/EIA-485-A for RS485 full duplex termination requirements.

The following tables define the terminal assignments for RS232, RS422/485 half duplex,
and RS422/485 full duplex port types.

Table C-31: RS232 Terminal Assignments

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 3 Port 1 TXD
Terminal 5 Port 1 RXD
Terminal 7 Port 1 DTR
Terminal 8 Port 1 DSR
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 11 Port 2 TXD
Terminal 13 Port 2 RXD
Terminal 15 Port 2 DTR
Terminal 16 Port 2 DSR

Table C-32: RS422/485 Half Duplex Terminal Assignments

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND

180
Interface Specifications

Table C-32: RS422/485 Half Duplex Terminal Assignments (continued)

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 2 Port 1 DATA+
Terminal 4 Port 1 DATA-
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 10 Port 2 DATA+
Terminal 12 Port 2 DATA-

Note
RS-485 Full Duplex is not supported when the card is configured as a Modbus slave in a multidrop
environment.

Table C-33: RS422/485 Full Duplex Terminal Assignments

Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 2 Port 1 TXD+
Terminal 4 Port 1 TXD-
Terminal 6 Port 1 RXD+
Terminal 8 Port 1 RXD-
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 10 Port 2 TXD+
Terminal 12 Port 2 TXD-
Terminal 14 Port 2 RXD+
Terminal 16 Port 2 RXD-

Table C-34: Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 Specifications

Item Specification
Number of serial ports Two
Port types RS232, RS422/485 half duplex, RS422/485 full
duplex (configurable with the DeltaV Explorer)
Isolation Each port is optically isolated from the system
and from each other and factory tested to 1500
VDC. The ports must be grounded via the exter-
nal device.
Baud rate Configurable with the DeltaV Explorer
Maximum cable lengths RS232: 15 m (50 ft)
RS422/485: 610 m (2000 ft)
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 200 mA typical, 300 mA maximum

181
Interface Specifications

Table C-34: Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Field circuit power, per card None
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Figure C-39shows a wiring scheme from Port 1 on the Interface terminal block for a Serial
card and a Series 2 Serial card in Simplex mode to a Modicon Model 984 controller.

Figure C-39: Wiring Example, Interface Terminal Block, Serial Card

The following figure shows an example for connecting a primary and secondary computer
to a Redundant Interface terminal block for a Series 2 Serial card in Redundant mode. For
each computer, use the same wiring scheme as shown in Figure C-39.

182
Interface Specifications

Figure C-40: Wiring Example for Redundant Interface Terminal Block

Related information

Interface Terminal Block


Redundant Interface Terminal Block

Thermocouple, mV
The DeltaV system supports the Thermocouple, mV card and the Series 2 Thermocouple,
mV card in Simplex mode.

Installation Notes

The Thermocouple terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations


for field wiring for the Thermocouple, mV card. An optional terminal block is the I/O
terminal block.
When the Thermocouple, mV card is plugged into a Thermocouple terminal block, it
functions as a Thermocouple card; when it is plugged into an I/O terminal block, it
functions as an mV card.

Specifications

Table C-35: Thermocouple, mV Specifications

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Sensor Types: mV Thermocouple Low level voltage source
B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, uncharacterized

183
Interface Specifications

Table C-35: Thermocouple, mV Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC. Channels 1,
2, 3, and 4 are isolated from channels 5, 6, 7, and
8 (verified by 1500 VDC factory test). Thermo-
couples attached to channels 1, 2, 3,and 4 are
not electrically isolated and should be within
0.7 VDC of each other. Thermocouples attach-
ed to channels 5, 6, 7,and 8 are not electrically
isolated and should be within 0.7 VDC of each
other.
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor type. Refer to
Table C-36 .
LocalBus Power Rating 12 VDC, 350 mA
Series 2 12 VDC, 210 mA
Ambient Temperature 0 to 60C
Series 2 -40 to 70C
Accuracy over temperature range (linearized) Thermocouple: Refer to Table C-36 .
mV: Refer to Table C-37 .
Cold Junction Compensation 1C
Resolution (Varies with sensor type. Refer to Ta- 16 bits
ble C-40 ).
Repeatability 0.05% of span
DC/50/60Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

The following table shows specifications for the Thermocouple sensor types.

Note
In the 25 C Reference Accuracy column in the following table, total error is made up of reading
accuracy, CJC accuracy, and sensor accuracy.

184
Interface Specifications

Table C-36: Thermocouple Sensor Type Specifications

25 C Refer-
Operating ence Accura- Temperature
Sensor Type Full Scale Range cy Drift Resolution
Uncharacter- -100 to 100 -100 to 100 0.1 mV 0.002 mV/C ~ 0.003mV
ized (No linea- mV mV
rization, no
cold junction
compensa-
tion.)
B 250 to 1810C 500 to 1810C 2.4C 0.056C/C ~ 0.18C
E -200 to -200 to 0.6C 0.008C/C ~ 0.07C
1000C 1000C
J -210 to -190 to 0.8C 0.011C/C ~ 0.05C
1200C 1200C
K -270 to -200 to 0.5C 0.016C/C ~ 0.18C
1372C 1372C
N -270 to -190 to 1.0C 0.007C/C ~ 0.10C
1300C 1300C
R -50 to 1768C -50 to 1768C 2.1C 0.013C/C ~ 0.14C
S -50 to 1768C -40 to 1768C 2.2C 0.067C/C ~ 0.24C
T -270 to 400C -200 to 400C 0.7C 0.001C/C ~ 0.04C

The following table shows specifications for the mV sensor types

Table C-37: mV Sensor Type Specifications

25 Refer-
Operating ence Accura- Temperature
Sensor Type Full Scale Range cy Drift Resolution
Low Level -100 to 100 -100 to 100 0.1 mV 0.002 mV/C ~ 0.003 mV
Voltage mV mV
Source

185
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-41: Wiring Diagram for Thermocouple, mV


Carrier

Termination I/O Card


(Odd no.)
+
A/D
System
Converter

-
(Even no.)
Thermocouple,
mV terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I/O Terminal Blocks


Thermocouple Terminal Block

VIM 2 card specifications


Installation notes

The VIM 2 card mounts in the right slot of a Power / Controller Carrier.
The VIM 2 card requires a controller and a dedicated system power supply (24 VDC).
The Power / Controller Carrier holding a VIM 2 card and power supply must be
installed to the left of the first 8-Wide I/O Carrier on the DIN rail. It can be installed
either to the left or right of the Power / Controller Carrier holding the controller and
its power supply.
This card supports redundancy.

Specifications

Table C-38: VIM 2 card specifications

Item Specifications
Input power requirement (supplied through the +5 VDC @ 1 A maximum
System Power Supply (24 VDC)
Fuse protection 3.0 A , nonreplaceable internal fuses

186
Interface Specifications

Table C-38: VIM 2 card specifications (continued)

Item Specifications
External connectors VIMNet network: One, 10/100BASE-TX with
RJ45 connector
Redundancy link: One, 10/100BASE-TX with
RJ45 connector
Mounting Right slot of Power / Controller Carrier

Image

Figure C-42: VIM 2 card and power supply on the Power / Controller Carrier

Intrinsically Safe I/O Cards


The I/O subsystem supports the following types of Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) I/O cards:

I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART


I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA and I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
I.S. DI, 16-Channel

187
Interface Specifications

I.S. DO, 4-Channel

I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART


Installation Notes

The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. AI, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART card. An optional block is the I.S. loop
disconnect 8-channel terminal block.

Specifications

Table C-39: I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (includes HART)

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full scale signal range 2 to 22 mA
Valid range for LED indication 0.78 to 21.9 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 600 mA
Line fault detection Short circuit: >21.5 mA
Open circuit: <0.5 mA
Accuracy over temperature range 0.006% of span per C
Accuracy over EMC conditions 1% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Calibration Not required
Communications Support HART pass-through request/response HART var-
iable report Field device status report
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

WARNING!
Hand-held, two-way radios should not be keyed within 0.5 M (1.64 ft., 19.7 in.) of Intrinsically
Safe Analog Input cards as the level of radiated emissions from these units can interfere with
the operation of the system.

188
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-43: Wiring Diagram for I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
I/S Carrier 12 VDC IS
Power

IS Termination I/O Card


Loop
(Odd no.) disconnect
(optional)
+ IS Power
Common
T connection
for 8 channels
A/D System
-
(Even no.)
Converter

I.S. 8-channel
terminal block

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block

I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA


The DeltaV system supports the I.S. AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA card and the I.S. AO, 8-
channel, 4-20 mA, HART card.

Installation Notes

The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the HART and non-HART versions of the I.S. AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA card. An
optional block is the I.S. loop disconnect 8-channel terminal block.

Specifications

Table C-40: I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (includes HART)

Item Specification
Number of channels Eight

189
Interface Specifications

Table C-40: I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (includes HART) (continued)

Item Specification
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full scale signal range 1 to 22 mA
Voltage to load 13 V minimum @ 20 mA
Load resistance 450 maximum 650 maximum with HART
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 630 mA
Open circuit detection threshold 0.7 mA 0.2 mA
Accuracy (@ 25 C) 20 A
Accuracy over temperature range 0.006% of span per C
Accuracy over EMC conditions 0.5% of span
Resolution 12 bits
Output compliance 20 mA stored into 450 load; independent of
supply (non-HART) 20 mA stored into 650
load; independent of supply (HART)
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Calibration Stored on card
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

WARNING!
Before substituting an I.S. AO, 4-20 mA card with an I.S. AO, 4-20 mA, HART card, you must
perform a loop analysis or reassess the field parameters. Refer to the following documents for
valid field parameters:
12P1892, DeltaVTM Scalable Process System Class I Div.2 with Class I, II, III, Div. 1 Field Circuit
Installation Instructions
12P2524, DeltaVTM I.S. I/O Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance in Zone 2
Hazardous Areas
12P1990, DeltaVTM Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits, Installation
Instructions

190
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagrams

Figure C-44: Wiring Diagram for I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA


Carrier 12 VDC IS
Power
I/O Card IS Termination
Loop
disconnect (Odd no.)
(optional)
Common IS Power
+
connection
for 8 channels
Load

System A/D
Converter -
(Even no.)

I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

191
Interface Specifications

Figure C-45: Wiring Diagram for I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART

I/S Carrier 12 VDC IS


power

I/O Card IS Termination


Loop
disconnect (Odd no.)
(optional)
Common IS Power
+
connection
for 8 channels
Load

System A/D
Converter
-
(Even no.)

I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Related information

I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block

I.S. DI, 16-Channel


Installation Notes

The I.S. 16-channel terminal block must be used to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. DI, 16-channel card. If this terminal block is not used, the card will not
communicate with the DeltaV controller.

Specifications

Table C-41: I.S. DI, 16-Channel

Item Specification
Number of channels Sixteen
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Detection level for On >2.1 mA
Detection level for Off <1.2 mA

192
Interface Specifications

Table C-41: I.S. DI, 16-Channel (continued)

Item Specification
Voltage applied to sensor 7.0 to 9.0 V from 1 k 10%
Line fault detection Short circuit: <100
Open circuit: > 50 k
Maximum input frequency 20 Hz
Minimum pulse width detected 45 ms
Output impedance 100 @ > 6 mA (wetting current)
LocalBus current 350 mA
Switching hysteresis 200 A (nominal)
Optional loop disconnect Not offered
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-46: Wiring Diagram for I.S. DI, 16-Channel


Common
connection
for 16 channels

IS IS Carrier
12 VDC IS
Termination
Power

Resistors I/O Card


optional

(Odd no.) System


680
+ Sense
circuit
22k
-
(Even no.)

I.S.16-channel
terminal block
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

193
Interface Specifications

Related information

I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block

I.S. DO, 4-Channel


Installation Notes

The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. DO, 4-channel card. An optional block is the I.S. loop disconnect 8-
channel terminal block.

Specifications

Table C-42: I.S. DO, 4-Channel

Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Output range 22 V (open circuit) 11 V at 45 mA 25 VDC (maxi-
mum)
Output rating 45 mA (min.)
Off state leakage N/A
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 560 mA
Current limit per channel 45 mA
Configurable channel types Discrete output : Output stays in the last state
submitted by the controller.
Momentary output : Output is active for a pre-
configured time period (100 ms to 100 s).
Continuous pulse output : Output is active as a
percentage of a pre-configured base time peri-
od (100 ms to 100 s). Resolution is 2 ms.
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

194
Interface Specifications

Wiring Diagram

Figure C-47: Wiring Diagram for I.S. DO, 4-Channel


Carrier 12 VDC IS
Power connection

I/O Card IS Termination

Loop
disconnect (Odd no.)
IS Power (optional)
System +
Load

Common
connection for
4 channels
-
(Odd no.)

I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 (refer to terminal block
specifications for
pin out connections
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
and channel
nomenclature)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Related information

I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block

Terminal Blocks
The DeltaV system supports Terminal Blocks, Redundant Terminal Blocks, Mass
Termination Blocks, and Intrinsically Safe Termination Blocks.

The I/O subsystem supports the following types of terminal blocks:

I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-wire I/O


Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block
Series 2 H1 Terminal Block
Interface Terminal Block
Isolated Input Terminal Block
Profibus DP Terminal Block
RTD, ohms Terminal Block

195
Interface Specifications

Thermocouple Terminal Block


32-Channel Terminal Block
16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Note
The terminal blocks contain a latch for quick release. To remove the terminal block, depress the latch
with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down and off.

I/O Terminal Blocks


Specifications

The following table show specifications for the I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-wire I/O terminal
blocks.

Table C-43: I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-Wire I/O Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating I/O and fused I/O: 250 VAC and 60 VDC be-
tween non-connected signals for I/O and fused
I/O
4-wire I/O: 30 VDC
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

196
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-48: I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-Wire I/O Terminal Block
Keying depends upon
the card type. Refer to
"I/O Interface Keying"
for key position.

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block


The DeviceNet and Fieldbus H1 cards use the Fieldbus H1 terminal block to provide
terminations for wiring.

Specifications

Table C-44: Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage Rating 32 VDC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal Block Connections

The wiring shown in the following figure is for the Fieldbus H1 card.

197
Interface Specifications

Figure C-49: Fieldbus H1 Terminal Block


Keying (D6)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ + - - + + - -
Port Port
1 2

Front View Bottom View

Note
Change the key position to D5 for the DeviceNet card.

Related information

DeviceNet

Series 2 H1 Terminal Block


The Series 2 H1 card uses the Series 2 H1 terminal block to provide terminations for wiring.

Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage Rating 35 VDC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

198
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-50: Series 2 H1 Terminal Block


Keying (D6)

Cover with
H1 I/O labels

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+Port- +Port-
1 2

Front View Bottom View

Interface Terminal Block

The AS-Interface and Serial cards use the Interface terminal block to provide terminations
for wiring.

Specifications

Table C-45: Interface Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage Rating 35 VDC
Max Current 1.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

199
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-51: Interface Terminal Block

Keying depends upon


the card type.
Refer to "I/O Interface
Keying" for key position.

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Port Port
1 2

Front View Bottom View

Isolated Input Terminal Block


The Isolated Input card uses the Isolated Input terminal block to provide terminations for
wiring.

Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage Rating 10 VAC/DC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

200
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-52: Isolated Input Terminal Block


Keying (C2)

1 5 9 13 4-wire sensor excitation

2 6 10 14
+ Sensor +
3 7 11 15
- Sensor -
4 8 12 16
Wire compensation

Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4
Front View Bottom View

Profibus DP Terminal Block


The Profibus DP card uses the Profibus DP terminal block to provide terminations for
wiring.

Specifications

Table C-46: Profibus DP Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage Rating 5 VDC
Max Current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal Block Connections

The Profibus terminal block has two terminator positions on the front of the unit.
Terminator OUT is the bottom position; terminator IN is the top position. The terminal
block is shipped in the IN position.

201
Interface Specifications

Figure C-53: Profibus DP Terminal Block


Keying (D3)

Terminator in
IN

OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 S B1 A2 S B2 C S
T
S
Front View Bottom View

Gently tug on the jumper to remove it and then push the jumper onto a terminator
position. The location of the terminal block on the segment determines the terminator
position.

Terminal Block Position Terminator Position


End of segment IN
A terminator in the IN position provides termi-
nation for the end of a segment. This type of ter-
mination is usually made with a single cable.
Middle of segment OUT
A terminator in the OUT position provides a con-
nection to other devices on the segment
through the terminal block. These connections
are typically made with two cables that run in
two different directions (for example to two
cabinets). The OUT position can also be used to
connect two cables to a redundant DP/PA seg-
ment coupler for line redundancy.

RTD, ohms Terminal Block


The Series 1 and Series 2 RTD, ohms card uses the RTD, ohms terminal block to provide
terminations for wiring.

202
Interface Specifications

Table C-47: RTD, ohms Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage Rating 5 VDC
Max Current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-54: RTD, ohms Terminal Block


Keying (C3)

Sensor
excitation

Sensor +
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
Sensor -
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+
Circuit common
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
-
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

Thermocouple Terminal Block


The Series 1 and Series 2 Thermocouple, mV card uses either the Thermocouple or I/O
terminal block to provide terminations for wiring.

Specifications

Table C-48: Thermocouple, mV Terminal Block

Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

203
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-55: Thermocouple, mV Terminal Block


Keying (C1)

Thermocouple
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

32-Channel Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-49: 32-Channel Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specifications
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

204
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-56: 32-Channel Terminal Block


Keying depends upon
the card type. Refer to
"I/O Interface Keying"
for key position.

1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 The numbers on the


terminal block indicate
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 the channel assigments.

4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

Front View Bottom View

16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-50: 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier

205
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-57: 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block


Keying (A2)

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the 16-channel analog input
terminal block.

Table C-51: 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

Terminal on Termina- Channel Nomencla- Terminal on Termina- Channel Nomencla-


tion Block ture tion Block ture
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Terminal 17 Channel 9+
Terminal 2 Channel 1- Terminal 18 Channel 9-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Terminal 19 Channel 10+
Terminal 4 Channel 2- Terminal 20 Channel 10-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Terminal 21 Channel 11+
Terminal 6 Channel 3- Terminal 22 Channel 11-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Terminal 23 Channel 12+
Terminal 8 Channel 4- Terminal 24 Channel 12-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Terminal 25 Channel 13+
Terminal 10 Channel 5- Terminal 26 Channel 13-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Terminal 27 Channel 14+
Terminal 12 Channel 6- Terminal 28 Channel 14-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Terminal 29 Channel 15+
Terminal 14 Channel 7- Terminal 30 Channel 15-

206
Interface Specifications

Table C-51: 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block (continued)

Terminal on Termina- Channel Nomencla- Terminal on Termina- Channel Nomencla-


tion Block ture tion Block ture
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Terminal 31 Channel 16+
Terminal 16 Channel 8- Terminal 32 Channel 16-

4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block


Installation Notes

The 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block provides 4-wire terminations for
the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 card.
Set the keys on the terminal block to A2 to match the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA
HART, Series 2 card.

Specifications

Table C-52: 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA per channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.

207
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-58: 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front view Bottom view

Redundant Terminal Blocks


The DeltaV system can use the following types of redundant terminal blocks:

Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block


Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block
Redundant Discrete Terminal Block
Redundant H1 Terminal Block
Redundant Interface Terminal Block
Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block

Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to redundant terminal blocks and
operated in Redundant mode.

Note
The redundant terminal blocks contain a latch for quick release. To remove the terminal block,
depress the latch with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down and off. The
Redundant Interface terminal block contains two latches. To remove the terminal block, depress
both latches and pull the terminal block down and off.

208
Interface Specifications

Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-53: Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum Current 200 mA
Operating Temperature -40C to 60C (-40F to 140F)
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Figure C-59 shows the Redundant Analog Input terminal block. You can change between
two and four wire connections in groups of four channels. The 2-wire and 4-wire jumpers
on the left are for channels 1-4 and the 2-wire and 4-wire jumpers on the right are for
channels 5-8.

For 4-wire transmitter applications, rotate the jumper module 180 until the Field Type
arrows on the terminal block point to the 4-wire transmitter on the jumper.

209
Interface Specifications

Figure C-59: Redundant Analog Input Terminal Block (shown as shipped)


To set the jumpers
from 2-wire to 4-wire
transmitters:
(Keying A1)
1. Remove jumper module
from the terminal block.

2. Rotate jumper module


180 degrees to the
connected transmitter
field type.

3. Place it back into the


terminal block.
I/O labels
Jumper module

2-WIRE

4-WIRE
(shipped as 2-wire

4-WIRE

2-WIRE

2-WIRE

4-WIRE
transmitter field type)

Analog Input Field Type

Front View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-


Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
Bottom View

Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-54: Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum Current 200 mA
Operating Temperature -40C to 60C (-40F to 140F)
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

210
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-60: Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block


(Keying A4)

I/O labels
Redundant Analog Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-


Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
Front View Bottom View

Redundant Discrete Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-55: Redundant Discrete Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel 3 A per card
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

Terminal Block Connections

Table C-55 shows the Redundant Discrete terminal block. The key on the Redundant
Discrete terminal block is set to B1 at the factory for use with the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 24
VDC Dry Contact card. Change the key position to B6 to use this terminal block with the
Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC High-Side card.

211
Interface Specifications

Figure C-61: Redundant Discrete Terminal Block


Keying B1 for
DI card (as
shown), B6
for DO card

I/O labels

Redundant Discrete
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+Ch -1 +Ch -2 +Ch -3 + - +- +- +- +-


Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
Front View Bottom View

Redundant H1 Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-56: Redundant H1 Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

212
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-62: Redundant H1 Terminal Block


Keying (D6)

I/O labels

Redundant H1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2

Front View Bottom View

Redundant Interface Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-57: Redundant Interface Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum Current 1A
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

The Series 2 Serial cards use the Redundant Interface terminal block.

Note
The Redundant Interface terminal block contains two latches for quick release. To remove the
terminal block, depress both latches with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down
and off.

213
Interface Specifications

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-63: Redundant Interface Terminal Block


Keying (D4)

Redundant Interface Cover with


I/O labels

Front View

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
Refer to card
specifications for pin out
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 connections and channel
nomenclature.

Bottom View

Refer to the tables in the Serial Card topic for information on the terminal assignments.

Related information

Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485

Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-58: Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum Current 100 mA

214
Interface Specifications

Table C-58: Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.

The Series 2 Plus Profibus DP cards in Redundant mode use the Redundant Profibus DP
terminal block.

Notes
Do not plug a simplex Series 1 or Series 2 Profibus DP card into a Redundant Profibus DP terminal
block. Only redundant Series 2 Plus Profibus DP cards can be used with the Redundant Profibus DP
terminal block.

For simplex or redundant applications, when the termination is in the OUT position, pins 1 and 3 and
4 and 6 can be used. When the termination is in the IN position only pins 1 and 3 can be used.

The Redundant Profibus DP terminal block contains two latches for quick release. To remove the
terminal block, depress both latches with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down
and off.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-64: Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block


Keying (D3)

Terminator In

Terminator Out

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Front View

215
Interface Specifications

Gently tug on the jumper to remove it and then push the jumper onto a terminator
position. The location of the terminal block on the segment determines the terminator
position.

Terminal Block Position Terminator Position


End of segment IN
A terminator in the IN position provides termi-
nation for the end of a segment. This type of ter-
mination is usually made with a single cable.
Middle of segment OUT
A terminator in the OUT position provides a con-
nection to other devices on the segment
through the terminal block. These connections
are typically made with two cables that run in
two different directions (for example to two
cabinets). The OUT position can also be used to
connect two cables to a redundant DP/PA seg-
ment coupler for line redundancy.

Mass Termination Blocks


The DeltaV system can use the following types of mass termination blocks:

10-Pin Mass Termination Block


16-Pin Mass Termination Block
24-Pin Mass Termination Block
40-Pin Mass Termination Block

The DeltaV mass termination blocks allow you to connect external marshalling panels and
termination assemblies to your DeltaV system, significantly reducing wiring costs. The
mass termination blocks provide a method to route the wiring within an enclosure and are
used with low-level signals that are conducted over either 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) off-the-
shelf, flat ribbon cable or round instrument cable. For distances over 3 m, standard 20-pin
round ribbon cable, 0.14 mm2 (26 AWG) is available. These mass termination blocks
interface to a feed-through IDC-to-discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact
FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector module. For more information on these modules,
visit the Phoenix Contact website. The Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module is an Emerson Alliance Program product.

The 40-Pin Mass Termination Block interfaces to either the DI or DO Mass Connection
Solutions through the same ribbon cable or round ribbon cable with 20-pin connectors.

If connectivity to IS barriers is required, additional HiD Series Boards from Pepperl+Fuchs


are available. For more information on these Boards and Barriers, visit the Pepperl+Fuchs
website. The HiD Series Boards from Pepperl+Fuchs are Emerson Alliance Program
products.

216
Interface Specifications

Specifications

Table C-59: Mass Termination Block Specifications

Item Specification
Models 10-pin mass termination block 16-pin mass ter-
mination block 24-pin mass termination block
40-pin mass termination block
Voltage rating 30 VDC between non-connected signals
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel (16-pin, 40-pin) 1 A per ca-
ble (10-pin, 24-pin)
Maximum flat ribbon cable length 3 m (9.8 ft)
Maximum round ribbon cable length 6 m (19.6 ft)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Key position Set key position based on I/O card type. Factory
settings:
10-pin: B 6
16-pin: A 1
24-pin: A 3
40-pin: B 3

Note
The above specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed for the DI, 8-
channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card, the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card, and the DO, 8-channel, 24
VDC, High-Side card.

Figure C-65: Mass Termination Block

217
Interface Specifications

10-Pin Mass Termination Block


The 10-pin mass termination block is used for relay panels or optically isolated panels. The
10-pin assembly provides an interface to many off-the-shelf, 8-channel PLC terminations
and to other termination panels that use a 10-pin cable pin out.

The two-row header accepts a 10-pin 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x5 header
connectors (AMP part #1658622-1, Strain Relief #499252-5) that can interface to a
Phoenix Contact UMK-8 RM Series VARIOFACE output module or other similar modules.

Terminal Block Connections

The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the 10-pin mass termination
block.

Table C-60: 10-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out

Pin on Mass Termination Block Channel Nomenclature


Pin 1 Channel 1+
Pin 2 Channel 2+
Pin 3 Channel 3+
Pin 4 Channel 4+
Pin 5 Channel 5+
Pin 6 Channel 6+
Pin 7 Channel 7+
Pin 8 Channel 8+
Pin 9 No connection
Pin 10 Common channel return for all 8 channels

16-Pin Mass Termination Block


The 16-pin mass termination block provides 1:1 signal transmission of eight signals to the
external passive input/output modules. The two-row header accepts a 16-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x8 header connectors (AMP part
#1658622-3, Strain Relief #499252-8). The assembly interfaces to an IDC-to-discrete-wire
module, such as the Phoenix Contact 2304432 FLKM16 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module, or other similar modules. The Phoenix Contact 2304432 FLKM16 VARIOFACE
ribbon connector module is an Emerson Alliance Program product.

The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the 16-pin mass termination
block.

Table C-61: 16-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out

Pin on Mass Termination Block Channel Nomenclature


Pin 1 Channel 1-

218
Interface Specifications

Table C-61: 16-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out (continued)

Pin on Mass Termination Block Channel Nomenclature


Pin 2 Channel 1+
Pin 3 Channel 2-
Pin 4 Channel 2+
Pin 5 Channel 3-
Pin 6 Channel 3+
Pin 7 Channel 4-
Pin 8 Channel 4+
Pin 9 Channel 5-
Pin 10 Channel 5+
Pin 11 Channel 6-
Pin 12 Channel 6+
Pin 13 Channel 7-
Pin 14 Channel 7+
Pin 15 Channel 8-
Pin 16 Channel 8+

24-Pin Mass Termination Block


The 24-pin mass termination block can be used with 4-wire Analog Input 4-20 mA and 1-5
VDC applications that are conducted over 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x12
header connectors (AMP part # 1658622-3, Strain Relief # 1-499252-0) or round
instrument cable.

The Phoenix Contact 2301134 FLK16/24DV-AI/EZ-DR/100 24-pin to 16-pin conversion


cable can be used with 4-wire applications. The conversion cable uses the Phoenix Contact
2304432 FLKM16 VARIOFACE ribbon connector module and comes in one meter (three
foot) and other lengths. The Phoenix Contact 2304432 FLKM16 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module is an Emerson Alliance Program product.

CAUTION!
When using a 24-pin ribbon cable, there must be a slight fold in the cable at the cover opening.
Damage might occur if the cable is pinched by the cover.

Terminal Block Connections

Table C-62: 24-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out

Pin on Mass Termination Block Channel Nomenclature


Pin 1 Channel 1+
Pin 3 Common channel for Channels 1 and 2

219
Interface Specifications

Table C-62: 24-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out (continued)

Pin on Mass Termination Block Channel Nomenclature


Pin 5 Channel 2+
Pin 7 Channel 3+
Pin 9 Common channel for Channels 3 and 4
Pin 11 Channel 4+
Pin 13 Channel 5+
Pin 15 Common channel for Channels 5 and 6
Pin 17 Channel 6+
Pin 19 Channel 7+
Pin 21 Common channel for Channels 7 and 8
Pin 23 Channel 8+

Note
The 24 VDC return for the Analog Devices 7 V power supply must be connected to the DeltaV 24
VDC return.

40-Pin Mass Termination Block


The 40-pin mass termination block provides terminations for the 32-channel digital input
and output cards and the Sequence of Events card.

For Use with 32-Channel DO and DI Cards

The 40-pin mass termination block has two, 20-pin IDC headers that split the 32 channels
into two, 16-channel headers. Both of the two-row headers accept a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x10 header connectors (AMP part
#1658622-4, Strain Relief #499252-2). The assembly interfaces to a feed-through IDC-to-
discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact 2281047 FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module. The Phoenix Contact 2281047 FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module is an Emerson Alliance Program product. Phoenix Contact provides two ways to
connect to the 20-pin connection:

A 20-pin to 2x14-pin configuration cable that connects to all 8-channel digital input
and output modules. These modules include the PLC-RELAY with V-8 adapter, fuse,
feed-through and relay (both solid-state (SSR) and electromechanical relays (EMR)).
A 20-pin 1-for-1 cable that is connected to 16-channel modules. These modules
include feed-through, fuse, relay, (SSR and EMR) and relay modules with fuses on
the relay contact commons.

The 40-pin mass termination block can also interface to the DO and DI Mass Connection
Solutions as well as to the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards if IS Barriers are required. The
Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards are Emerson Alliance Program products.

220
Interface Specifications

The return connection is made internally when the 40-pin mass termination block is used
with Series 2 DI and DO 32-channel cards. No external wire is required. Refer to the cards
installation notes for more information.

CAUTION!
When using a 24-pin ribbon cable, there must be a slight fold in the cable at the cover opening.
Damage might occur if the cable is pinched by the cover.

For Use with SOE Cards

The 40-pin mass termination block has two, 20-pin IDC headers that split the 16 channels
into two, 8-channel headers. Both of the two-row headers accept a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x10 header connectors (AMP part
#1658622-4, Strain Relief #499252-2). The assembly interfaces to a feed-through IDC-to-
discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact 2281047 FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module. Phoenix Contact provides the following way to connect to the 20-pin
connection:

A 20-pin to 14-pin configuration cable that connects to all 8-channel digital input
modules. These modules include the PLC-RELAY with V-8 adapter, fuse, feed-
through and relay (both solid-state (SSR) and electromechanical relays (EMR)).

Terminal Block Connections

Table C-63: 40-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out

Channel Nomenclature Channel Nomenclature


Right hand
Left hand 32-channel DI Pins (17-32) 32-channel DI
Pins (1-16) J3 and DO SOE J4 and DO SOE
Pin 1 Channel 1+ 1+ Pin 1 Channel 17+ 9+
Pin 2 Channel 2+ 1- Pin 2 Channel 18+ 9-
Pin 3 Channel 3+ 2+ Pin 3 Channel 19+ 10+
Pin 4 Channel 4+ 2- Pin 4 Channel 20+ 10-
Pin 5 Channel 5+ 3+ Pin 5 Channel 21+ 11+
Pin 6 Channel 6+ 3- Pin 6 Channel 22+ 11-
Pin 7 Channel 7+ 4+ Pin 7 Channel 23+ 12+
Pin 8 Channel 8+ 4- Pin 8 Channel 24+ 12-
Pin 9 Channel 9+ 5+ Pin 9 Channel 25+ 13+
Pin 10 Channel 10+ 5- Pin 10 Channel 26+ 13-
Pin 11 Channel 11+ 6+ Pin 11 Channel 27+ 14+
Pin 12 Channel 12+ 6- Pin 12 Channel 28+ 14-
Pin 13 Channel 13+ 7+ Pin 13 Channel 29+ 15+
Pin 14 Channel 14+ 7- Pin 14 Channel 30+ 15-
Pin 15 Channel 15+ 8+ Pin 15 Channel 31+ 16+

221
Interface Specifications

Table C-63: 40-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out (continued)

Channel Nomenclature Channel Nomenclature


Right hand
Left hand 32-channel DI Pins (17-32) 32-channel DI
Pins (1-16) J3 and DO SOE J4 and DO SOE
Pin 16 Channel 16+ 8- Pin 16 Channel 32+ 16-
Pin 17 no connection no connection Pin 17 no connection no connection
Pin 18 return N/A Pin 18 return N/A
Pin 19 no connection no connection Pin 19 no connection no connection
Pin 20 return N/A Pin 20 return N/A

Related information

DI Mass Connection Board (single)


DO Mass Connection Board (single)

Mass Connection Boards


The DI and DO Mass Connection Boards eliminate costly and complicated cabinet wiring
and simplify the process of connecting field devices to I/O cards. The DI Mass Connection
Board (single) and the DI Mass Connection Solution (two boards connected together) can
be used with the simplex Series 2 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card installed on
the 40-Pin Mass Termination Block. The DO Mass Connection Board (single) and the DO
Mass Connection Solution (two boards connected together) can be used with the simplex
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card installed on the 40-Pin Mass Termination
Block. For both DI and DO cards, two Mass Connection Boards are required to provide the
interface to all 32 channels.

DI Mass Connection Board (single)


Installation notes

The DI Mass Connection Board (single) provides an interface to the simplex Series 2
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card used with the M-series 40-Pin Mass
Termination Block.
Two DI Mass Connection Boards (single) (DI Mass Connection Solution (two)) are
required to provide the interface to all 32 channels on the Series 2 DI, 32-Channel,
24 VDC, Dry Contact card.
Two, 20-pin ribbon cables (one per board) connect between the DI Mass Connection
Solution (two) and the 40-pin Mass Termination Blocks.
Four screw terminals provide the connections for +24 VDC power and ground.
For dry contact mode, connect your device to the screw terminals labeled A1 - A16
and to the screw terminals labeled B1-B16. Refer to Figure C-67 for a wiring diagram.

222
Interface Specifications

For isolated power mode, connect your device to the even numbered screw
terminals labeled B1-B16 and connect external ground to the ground bar. Refer to
Figure C-68 for a wiring diagram.

Specifications

Table C-64: DI Mass Connection Board (single) specifications

Item Specification
Field circuit power per board +24VDC 10% @ 75mA typical,100mA maxi-
mum
Channel type Discrete Input, +24 VDC Dry Contact; detection
on the - signal
Number of channels 16
Isolation The field wiring connections are galvanically iso-
lated from the DI Card circuits and factory tes-
ted to 1000 VDC. No Channel-to-Channel isola-
tion.
Detection Level for ON > 2 mA @ 24 VDC
Source impedance 5 K
Source voltage +24 VDC Input Power, Current Limited with re-
settable fuse
Dimensions Height: 8.6 cm (3.4 in.)
Width: 12.2 cm (4.8 in.)
Depth: 4.8 cm (1.9 in.)

223
Interface Specifications

Figure C-66: DI Mass Connection Board (single)


+24 VDC Ground Ribbon cable connector for Channel status LEDs
power input channels 1-16 16 Total

Power
status LED

Field connectors Ground

224
Interface Specifications

Figure C-67: Wiring for dry contact mode


24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION
+24 VDC +
2.7K
+24 VDC
+
1A
Green
GND

GND

TERMINATION DI BOARD

Yellow
A1 ... A16

+
0.16A

System

2.7K 2.7K

B1 ... B16

GND

225
Interface Specifications

Figure C-68: Wiring for isolated mode


24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION
+24 VDC +
2.7K
+24 VDC
+
1A
Green
GND

GND

TERMINATION DI BOARD

Yellow

A1 ... A16
0.16A

System

+ + 2.7K 2.7K

B1 ... B16
24
VDC
Source

GND

DO Mass Connection Board (single)


Installation notes

The DO Mass Connection Board (single) provides an interface to the DO, 32-
Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2 card used with the M-series 40-Pin Mass
Termination Block.
Two DO Mass Connection Boards (single) (DO Mass Connection Solution (two)) are
required to provide the interface to all 32 channels on the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC,
High-Side, Series 2 card.
Two, 20-pin ribbon cables (one per board) connect between the DO Mass
Connection Solution (two) and the 40-pin Mass Termination Blocks.
Four screw terminals provide the connections for +24 VDC power and ground.
Two rows of four screw terminals and a fuse for each channel enables either isolated
relay contact or +24 VDC high-side output mode. Ensure that the jumpers are set for
the correct mode for each output. Refer to the figures for wiring diagrams.
Channel fuses and relays can be replaced in the field.

226
Interface Specifications

Specifications

Table C-65: DO Mass Connection Board (single) specifications

Item Specification
Power for +24 VDC high-side outputs (optional) +24 VDC 10% @ 10 A maximum
Control signal current per channel (derived from 14 mA maximum
the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2
Plus card.)
Channel type Relay output
Number of channels 16
Output channel options and ratings Isolated relay contacts: 250 VAC/24 VDC
maximum @ 5 A maximum per channel.
+24 VDC High Side: 5 A maximum per chan-
nel, 10 A maximum per board.
Isolation Isolated relay contacts: Isolated at 250 VAC
and factory tested to 3600 VDC (channel to
system and channel to channel).
+24 VDC High Side: Isolated at 250 VAC and
factory tested to 3600 VDC (channel to sys-
tem). No channel to channel isolation.
Dimensions Height: 8.6 cm (3.4 in.)
Width: 29.2 cm (11.5 in.)
Depth: 5.6 cm (2.2 in.)

Figure C-69: DO Mass Connection Board (single)

+24 VDC high side


mode +24 VDC Power Ribbon cable connector for Channel status LEDs Isolated relay
power input LED channels 1-16 16 Total Relay contact mode

Field connectors

227
Interface Specifications

Figure C-70: Wiring for isolated relay mode


24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION

+24 VDC +
Green
+24 VDC
+ 4.7K

12A Fuse

GND

GND

DO BOARD TERMINATION

COM
+
6.3A Fuse
VDC
or VAC
4.7K Yellow Source
NO
System
Load

NC


GND

228
Interface Specifications

Figure C-71: Wiring for 24 VDC high side output mode


24 VDC FIELD POWER CONNECTION

+24 VDC +
Green
+24 VDC
+ 4.7K

12A Fuse

GND

GND

DO BOARD TERMINATION

COM

6.3A Fuse

4.7K Yellow
+
NO
System

+ Load
NC


GND

Connecting DI and DO Mass Connection Boards


The following images show how to connect the DI Mass Connection Boards together and
the DO Mass Connection Boards together.

229
Interface Specifications

Figure C-72: Connected DI Mass Connection Boards


Ribbon cable connector for Ribbon cable connector for
channels 1-16 channels 17-32

Figure C-73: Connected DO Mass Connection Boards


Ribbon cable connector for
channels 17-32

Ribbon cable connector for


channels 1-16

Intrinsically Safe Terminal Blocks


The DeltaV system can use the following types of Intrinsically Safe terminal blocks:

I.S. 8-channel and I.S. loop disconnect 8-channel

230
Interface Specifications

I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block

I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block


The 8-channel I.S. terminal block uses standard and loop disconnects. Loop disconnects
are located in odd numbered terminals.

Specifications

Table C-66: I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 250 VAC between I.S. and non-I.S. circuits.
Maximum current Refer to the specifications table for the I.S. card
in use.
Mounting Assigned slot of I.S. I/O carrier.

Terminal Block Connections

The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block
and shows the channel nomenclature for the I.S. analog input and output cards (AI, 2-20
mA, 8-Channel with HART, AO, 2-20 mA, 8-Channel) and the discrete output card (DO, 4-
Channel).

Table C-67: I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block Cable Pin Outs and Channel Nomenclature

Channel Nomenclature for Channel Nomenclature for


Pin on Termination Block Analog Cards DO card
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Channel 1+
Terminal 2 Channel 1-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Channel 1-
Terminal 4 Channel 2-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Channel 2+
Terminal 6 Channel 3-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Channel 2-
Terminal 8 Channel 4-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Channel 3+
Terminal 10 Channel 5-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Channel 3-
Terminal 12 Channel 6-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Channel 4+
Terminal 14 Channel 7-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Channel 4-

231
Interface Specifications

Table C-67: I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block Cable Pin Outs and Channel Nomenclature
(continued)

Channel Nomenclature for Channel Nomenclature for


Pin on Termination Block Analog Cards DO card
Terminal 16 Channel 8-

I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block


Specifications

Table C-68: I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block Specifications

Item Specification
Voltage rating 250 VAC between I.S. and non-I.S. circuits.
Maximum current Refer to the specifications table for the I.S. card
in use.
Mounting Assigned slot of I.S. I/O carrier.

Terminal Block Connections

Figure C-74: I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block


Keying (B1)

Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View

The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the I.S.16-channel terminal
block.

232
Interface Specifications

Table C-69: I.S.16-Channel Terminal Block

Terminal on Termina- Channel Nomencla- Terminal on Termina- Channel Nomencla-


tion Block ture tion Block ture
Terminal 1 Channel 1+ Terminal 17 Channel 9+
Terminal 2 Channel 1- Terminal 18 Channel 9-
Terminal 3 Channel 2+ Terminal 19 Channel 10+
Terminal 4 Channel 2- Terminal 20 Channel 10-
Terminal 5 Channel 3+ Terminal 21 Channel 11+
Terminal 6 Channel 3- Terminal 22 Channel 11-
Terminal 7 Channel 4+ Terminal 23 Channel 12+
Terminal 8 Channel 4- Terminal 24 Channel 12-
Terminal 9 Channel 5+ Terminal 25 Channel 13+
Terminal 10 Channel 5- Terminal 26 Channel 13-
Terminal 11 Channel 6+ Terminal 27 Channel 14+
Terminal 12 Channel 6- Terminal 28 Channel 14-
Terminal 13 Channel 7+ Terminal 29 Channel 15+
Terminal 14 Channel 7- Terminal 30 Channel 15-
Terminal 15 Channel 8+ Terminal 31 Channel 16+
Terminal 16 Channel 8- Terminal 32 Channel 16-

I/O Interface Keying


There are two keys on the I/O terminal block and two keys on the I/O card. The keys on the
I/O card are set at the factory; you can change the keys on the I/O terminal block to match
the corresponding I/O card.

Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks

Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal


I/O Card I/O Card Keying Terminal Block Block
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA A 1 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
block
4-wire I/O terminal
block
16-pin mass termi-
nation block (2-
wire connection)
24-pin mass termi-
nation block (4-
wire connection)

233
Interface Specifications

Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)

Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal


I/O Card I/O Card Keying Terminal Block Block
AI, 8-Channel,4-20 A 1 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
mA, HART block
Series 2 AI, 8-Chan- 4-wire I/O terminal
nel,4-20 mA, HART block
(Simplex mode) 16-pin mass termi-
nation block (2-
wire connection)
24-pin mass termi-
nation block (4-
wire connection)
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, A1 Redundant Analog In-
4-20 mA HART (Re- put terminal block
dundant mode)
Series 2 AI, 16-Chan- A2 16-Channel Analog In- 4-wire 16-Channel An-
nel, 4-20 mA HART put terminal block alog Input Terminal
(Simplex mode) Block
AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC A 3 4-wire I/O terminal 24-pin mass termina-
block tion block
AO, 8-Channel,4-20 A4 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
mA block 16-pin mass ter-
mination block
AO, 8-channel, A4 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
4-20 mA, HART block
Series 2 AO, 8- 16-pin mass termi-
channel, 4-20 mA, nation block
HART (Simplex
mode)
Series 2 AO, 8-channel, A 4 Redundant Analog
4-20 mA, HART (Re- Output terminal block
dundant mode)
AS-Interface Series 2 D1 Interface terminal
AS-Interface (Simplex block
mode)
DeviceNet D5 Fieldbus H1 terminal
block
DI, 8-Channel, 24 B2 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
VDC, Isolated block
Series 2 DI, 8- 16-pin mass termi-
Channel, 24 VDC, nation block
Isolated (Simplex
mode)

234
Interface Specifications

Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)

Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal


I/O Card I/O Card Keying Terminal Block Block
DI, 8-Channel, 24 B1 Fused I/O terminal I/O terminal block
VDC, Dry Contact block 16-pin mass termi-
Series 2 DI, 8- nation block
Channel, 24 VDC,
Dry Contact (Sim-
plex mode)
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, B1 Redundant Discrete
24 VDC, Dry Contact terminal block
(Redundant mode)
DI, 8-Channel, 120 E4 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
VAC, Isolated block
Series 2 DI, 8-
Channel, 120 VAC,
Isolated
DI, 8-Channel, 120 E1 Fused I/O terminal I/O terminal block
VAC, Dry Contact block
Series 2 DI, 8-
Channel, 120 VAC,
Dry Contact (Sim-
plex mode)
DI, 8-Channel, 230 E5 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
VAC, Isolated block
DI, 8-Channel, 230 E2 Fused I/O terminal I/O terminal block
VAC, Dry Contact block
DI, 32-channel, 24 B3 32-channel terminal 40-pin mass termina-
VDC Dry Contact block tion block
Series 2 DI, 32-
channel, 24 VDC
Dry (Simplex
mode)
DO, 8-Channel, F4 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
120 VAC/230 VAC, block
Isolated
Series 2 DO, 8-
Channel, 120 VAC/
230 VAC, Isolated
(Simplex mode)

235
Interface Specifications

Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)

Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal


I/O Card I/O Card Keying Terminal Block Block
DO, 8-Channel, F1 Fused I/O terminal I/O terminal block
120 VAC/230 VAC, block
High-Side
Series 2 DO, 8-
Channel, 120 VAC/
230 VAC, High-
Side (Simplex
mode)
DO, 8-Channel, 24 B5 I/O terminal block Fused I/O terminal
VDC, Isolated block
Series 2 DO, 8- 16-pin mass termi-
Channel, 24 VDC, nation block
Isolated
DO, 8-Channel, 24 B6 Fused I/O terminal I/O terminal block
VDC, High-Side block 10-pin mass termi-
Series 2 DO, 8- nation block
Channel, 24 VDC, 16-pin mass termi-
High-Side (Simplex nation block
mode)
Series 2 DO, 8-Chan- B6 Redundant Discrete
nel, 24 VDC, High-Side terminal block
(Redundant mode)
DO, 32-Channel, B4 32-channel terminal 40-pin mass termina-
24 VDC High-Side block tion block
Series 2 DO, 32-
Channel, 24 VDC
High Side (Simplex
mode)
Fieldbus H1 D6 Fieldbus H1 terminal
block
Series 2 H1 (Simplex D6 Series 2 H1 terminal
mode) block
Series 2 H1 (Redun- D6 Redundant H1 termi-
dant mode) nal block
Series 2 Isolated Input C2 Isolated Input terminal
(Simplex mode) block
Multifunction C6 32-channel terminal
block
Profibus DP D3 Profibus DP terminal
block
Series 2 Plus Profibus D3 Redundant Profibus DP
terminal block

236
Interface Specifications

Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)

Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal


I/O Card I/O Card Keying Terminal Block Block
RTD, ohms C3 RTD, ohms terminal
block
Sequence of Events C5 32-channel terminal 40-pin mass termina-
block tion block
Serial Card, 2 Ports, D4 Interface terminal
RS232/RS485 block
Series 2 Serial
Card, 2 Ports,
RS232/RS485
(Simplex mode)
Series 2 Serial Card, 2 D4 Redundant Interface
Ports, RS232/RS485 terminal block
(Redundant mode)
Thermocouple, mV C1 Thermocouple, mV I/O terminal block
terminal block.

Note
Note When the Thermocou-
When the Thermocou- ple, mV card is plug-
ple, mV card is plug- ged into an I/O termi-
ged into a Thermocou- nal block, it functions
ple terminal block, it as an mV card.
functions as a Thermo-
couple card.

Figure C-75: I/O Key Setting Example

Intrinsically Safe I/O Interface Keying


The following table lists I.S. I/O card keying and the recommended I.S. terminal blocks.

237
Interface Specifications

Recommended I/O Optional I/O Terminal


I/O Card I/O Card Keying Terminal Block Block
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 A1 I.S. 8-channel terminal I.S. loop disconnect 8-
mA, HART block channel terminal block
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, A4 I.S. 8-channel terminal I.S. loop disconnect 8-
4-20 mA (HART) block channel terminal block
I.S. DO, 4-Channel B5 I.S. 8-channel terminal I.S. loop disconnect 8-
block channel terminal block
I.S. DI, 16-Channel(9) B1 I.S. 16-channel termi-
nal block

Figure C-76: I.S. I/O Example Key Setting

(9) The I.S. DI, 16-channel card will not communicate with the DeltaV controller unless the I.S. 16-channel terminal block is used.

238
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

Appendix D
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface
Unit
Topics covered in this appendix:
Controller Specifications
Remote Interface Unit
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Fiber-Optic Media Converter

This appendix provides specifications for the controller and specifications and installation
information for the Remote Interface Unit and the Fiber-Optic Media Converter. It also
explains how to install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) to backup the controller.

Controller Specifications
Specifications

The following table shows specifications for the MD, MD Plus, MX, and MQ controllers.

Item MD/MD Plus, MX, MQ


Power requirement (supplied by system power +5 VDC at 1.4 A maximum
supply through 2-wide power/controller carrier)
Fuse protection 3.0 A, non-replaceable fuses
Power dissipation 5.0 W typical 7.0 W maximum
Mounting On right slot of power/controller carrier

239
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

Figure D-1: Controller Dimensions

Remote Interface Unit


The Remote Interface Unit allows standard DeltaV I/O cards to be installed remotely from
the controller. The remote subsystem, consisting of the Remote Interface Unit, system
power supply, carriers, and I/O cards, can be located in Zone 2. The Remote Interface Unit
communicates with the controller over redundant, Control Network (ethernet)
connections.

Specifications

The following table shows specifications for the Remote Interface Unit.

Item Specification
Power requirement (supplied by system power +3.3 VDC at 500 mA maximum +5 VDC at 200
supply through 2-wide power/controller carrier) mA maximum
Fuse protection 3.0 A, non-replaceable fuses
Power dissipation 3.0 W maximum
Mounting On right slot of power/controller carrier

240
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

Connections and Dimensions

The Remote Interface Unit mounts in the controller slot of a 2-wide carrier and has
redundant ethernet connections to the DeltaV Control Network switch or hub. Connect
the primary port to the primary switch or hub and the secondary port to the secondary
switch or hub. The primary Control Network connection is capable of 10/100Mbit ethernet
while the secondary connection is limited to 10Mbit ethernet.

Figure D-2: Remote Interface Unit Dimensions

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)


This section describes connection with a UPS. Unless otherwise noted, the Liebert 600VA
UPS sold with the workstation is assumed.

The UPS must be mounted upright on a level surface, such as a floor or a work surface, for
proper operation. The UPS is not rack-mountable or DIN rail-mountable.

The type of DeltaV System Power Supply determines how the UPS backs up controller
power.

If you use a System Power Supply (AC/DC) to provide power to your controller, one UPS
backs up one controller. Install the UPS between the AC main power source and the system
power supply (or supplies), as shown in the following figure.

241
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

Figure D-3: UPS Installation for Controller Power Backup [System Power Supply (AC/
DC)]

If you use a combination of the Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supply and a System Power
Supply (Dual DC/DC) to provide power to your controller(s), use one UPS to back up each
controller for maximum backup time. However, if you do not require maximum backup
time, one UPS can back up as many as four controllers. Install the UPS between the AC
main power source and the bulk power supply, as shown in the following figure.

242
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

Figure D-4: UPS Installation for Controller Power Backup [System Power Supply
(Dual DC/DC)]

Note
If you use the UPS as backup for your DeltaV Controller, only the system power is backed up; no field
power backup is provided. If you require backup field power, you need additional UPSs to back up
power connected to the I/O interface carrier(s).

If you have a system with only one controller that is powered by a DeltaV System Power
Supply (AC/DC), you can use the smaller Liebert PowerSure 250 VA UPS for controller
power backup. If you have a system with a server, you can use the larger Liebert
PowerSure 1400 VA UPS for server power backup. The 250 VA UPS is for controller
backup only and the 1400 VA UPS for server backup only. The 600 VA UPS is required for
workstation backup.

The 250 VA UPS and 1400 VA UPS are not standard Emerson Process Management
products; you can purchase them from a local supplier. Refer to the documentation
supplied with your UPS for specifications.

Fiber-Optic Media Converter


This section describes controller connections with a fiber-optic media converter. The
media converter converts 10BaseT TP to 10Base-FL ST fiber cable without repeating the
signals and is used in conjunction with the controller to allow an Ethernet link to a range of
2000 meters. Refer to Appendix G for more information on media converters. The
following table shows the media converter specifications.

243
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

Table D-1: Fiber-Optic Media Converter Specifications

Item Specification
LAN interface Ethernet IEEE802.3 compatible
Port interface 10BaseT RJ45 compatible
Data rate 10 MBPS
Fiber interface 10Base-FL compatible
Fiber type Multimode 62.5/125 microns
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 250 mA typical
300 mA maximum

The media converter mounts on a 2-wide carrier next to (or close to) the controller and
connects to the controller with two standard 12 to 16 inch twisted pair cables with
shielded connectors on both ends of the cable. The four fiber-optic cables connect
transmit to receive between the Workstations media converter and the controllers media
converter as shown in the following figure. The dimensions for the fiber-optic media
converter case are the same as the controller case. The connectors on the media converter
extend one half inch above the case.

244
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

Figure D-5: Fiber-Optic Media Converter


Top View
Fiber optic
media converter Controller
Pri Pri Sec Sec
Rx Tx Rx Tx

To 10Base-FL
2 fiber optic hub or
media converter
1 1 2 3

Twisted pair cable


with shielded
connectors
on both ends

Power
Error
Pri F Link
Pri C Link
Sec F Link Pri Sec
Sec C Link

Front Side View To


View Controller
Twisted pair cable
with shielded
connectors
on both ends

Bottom View
Notes:
1. Fiber Optic Media Converter may go in position 1, 2, or 3; but is shown mounted in position 2.
2. Fiber Optic cables connect transmit to receive and receive to transmit.

Related information

Control Network Specifications


Straight-Through Cable Pin Outs

245
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit

246
System Power Supply Specifications

Appendix E
System Power Supply Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
System Power Supply (AC/DC)
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply

This appendix provides specifications for the system power supplies:

System Power Supply (AC/DC)


System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply

System Power Supply (AC/DC)


Specifications

Table E-1: System Power Supply (AC/DC) Specifications

Item Specification
Input 100 VAC to 264 VAC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz, single-
phase
Inrush (soft start) 230 VAC input at 35 A peak maximum for one
cycle or less
Output power 25 W total at 60C
Output voltages (25 W maximum) +12 VDC at 2.1 A maximum
+5 VDC at 2.0 A maximum
+3.3 VDC at 0.5 A maximum
Combined 5 VDC and 3.3 VDC output = 10 W
maximum
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses
Overvoltage protection Output protected at 110% to 120%
Hold-up time Output remains within 5% of nominal at full load
and 115 VAC input for 20 ms.
Mounting On either slot of 2-wide power/controller carrier
External connectors:
Primary power AC input, 3-wire

247
System Power Supply Specifications

Table E-1: System Power Supply (AC/DC) Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Alarm contacts 2-wire normally open relays; relays are closed
when outputs are within 4% of nominal; 30
VDC at 2.0 A, 250 VAC at 2.0 A

Dimensions

Figure E-1: System Power Supply (AC/DC) Dimensions

Note
Ground connection is not required for the secondary 2-wide power/controller carrier.

248
System Power Supply Specifications

Redundant Connections

Figure E-2: Redundant AC Input Power for System Power Supply (AC/DC)
Wire Legend:
G Ground (AC)
N Neutral (AC)
AC Power Distribution L Line (AC)
G

N
I/O Subsystem
L

Isolated Common
Ground Reference

Dedicated Plant Secondary Controller


Ground Grid Point Power Supply

Field Cable
Primary Shield Ground
Power Supply

System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)


Specifications

Table E-2: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Specifications

Specifications

Model Number Model Number Model Number


Item KJ1501X1-BC1 KJ1501X1-BC2 KJ1501X1-BC3
Input 12 VDC (5%) at 14.8 12 VDC (5%) at 14.8 12 VDC (-4/+5%) at
A A 14.8 A
24 VDC (5%) at 4.0 24 VDC (-15%-+20%) 24 VDC 20% at 6.1
A at 4.0 A A
Output power +12 VDC at 13.0 A N/A N/A
rating -20 to 60C (12 VDC input)
+12 VDC at 4.5 A (24
VDC input)
+5.1 VDC at 2.0 A
+3.4 VDC at 2.0 A
(10.2 W total from +5.1
VDC and +3.4 VDC)

249
System Power Supply Specifications

Table E-2: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Specifications (continued)

Specifications

Model Number Model Number Model Number


Item KJ1501X1-BC1 KJ1501X1-BC2 KJ1501X1-BC3
Output power N/A +12 VDC at 13.0 A +12 VDC at 13.0 A
rating -40 to 60C (12 VDC input) (12 VDC input)
+12 VDC at 4.5 A (24 +12 VDC at 8.0 A (24
VDC input) VDC input)
+5.1 VDC at 2.0 A +5.1 VDC at 2.0 A
+3.4 VDC at 2.0 A +3.4 VDC at 2.0 A
(10.2 W total from +5.1 (10.2 W total from +5.1
VDC and +3.4 VDC) VDC and +3.4 VDC)
Output power N/A +12 VDC at 10. 0 A +12 VDC at 10.0 A
rating 60 to 70C (12 VDC input) (12 VDC input)
+12 VDC at 3.0 A (24 +12 VDC at 6.0 A (24
VDC input) VDC input)
+5.1 VDC at 2.0 A +5.1 VDC at 2.0 A
+3.4 VDC at 2.0 A +3.4 VDC at 2.0 A
(10.2 W total from +5.1 (10.2 W total from +5.1
VDC and +3.4 VDC) VDC and +3.4 VDC)
Inrush (soft start) 12 A peak maximum for 5 ms over the 12 VDC input range (excluding 12
VDC output)
20 A peak maximum for 5 ms over the 24 VDC input range (including 12
VDC outputs)
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses
Overvoltage pro- Output protected at 110% to 120%
tection
Hold-up time Output remains within 5% of nominal at full load and minimum input voltage
for 5 ms (excluding 12 VDC current with 12 VDC input)
Mounting On either slot of the 2-wide power/controller carrier
External connec- Primary power: DC input, 2-wire
tors Alarm contacts: 2-wire normally open relays; relays are closed when 3.3
and 5 VDC outputs are within 4% of nominal
Alarm relay contact rating: 30 VDC at 2.0 A; 250 VAC at 2.0 A

250
System Power Supply Specifications

Dimensions

Figure E-3: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Dimensions

WARNING!
Always remove input power to the supply before connecting or disconnecting the input power
connection. The connector should not interrupt current flow and could be damaged if actuated
under a load condition.

251
System Power Supply Specifications

Redundant Connections

Figure E-4: Redundant DC Input Power and Grounding for System Power Supply
(Dual DC/DC)
Isolated Common
Ground Reference

Dedicated Isolated
Plant Ground Power Return
Grid Point Connection Point

_
Primary _ Secondary
Bulk Bulk
Power Supply Power Supply
+ +

_ _ _ _
+ + + +

Secondary System Controller Secondary System Controller


Power Supply Power Supply
I/O Interface I/O Interface
Primary System Carrier Carrier Primary System Carrier Carrier
Power Supply Shield Bar Power Supply Shield Bar

Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply


Specifications

Table E-3: I.S. System Power Supply Specifications

Item Specification
Input 18.5 to 36 VDC (24 VDC nominal)
Output 12 VDC 5%

252
System Power Supply Specifications

Table E-3: I.S. System Power Supply Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Output current 5A
Input to output isolation 250 VAC rms
Holdup time 1.8 ms
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses
Over voltage protection 110% to 120%
Input power 80 Watts
Mounting I.S. Power Supply Carrier
External connectors DC input 2-part screw terminal

Dimensions

Figure E-5: I.S. System Power Supply Dimensions

253
System Power Supply Specifications

254
Workstation and Server Specifications

Appendix F
Workstation and Server Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
Primary and Secondary Channel Ethernet Card Specifications - Plant LAN
Interface Card
Fault-Tolerant Server
Multiple Monitors
Touch Screens

This appendix provides information on DeltaV workstations, the Fault-Tolerant Server,


Multiple Monitors, and Touch Screens. Refer to the following sources for current DeltaV
Workstation and Fault-Tolerant Server configuration details and for current Ethernet card
specifications:

DeltaV Workstation Product Data Sheets


The PC manufacturers (Dell Computer Corporation) specifications
Your local Emerson Process Management Representative

Primary and Secondary Channel Ethernet Card


Specifications - Plant LAN Interface Card
The DeltaV system uses Ethernet to create the DeltaV Control Network, both primary and
secondary channels. All network cards used in DeltaV Workstations must be 10/100BaseT
Ethernet network cards.

Fault-Tolerant Server
The Stratus ftServer 4500 can be used as a hardware platform for DeltaV Application
stations. This server provides fault-tolerance through redundancy of the major hardware
sub-systems (CPU/Memory, PCI Bus, storage, and power supplies).

Refer to the "Installing the Fault Tolerant Server" topic. Refer to earlier versions of this
DeltaV manual for information on installing other ftServer models. For information on
configuring the ftServer 4500 to run the DeltaV system, refer to DeltaV Books Online. For
complete technical information on the fault-tolerant servers, refer to the Stratus hardware
and software manuals and to the electronic documentation installed on the servers.

Related information

Installing the Fault-Tolerant Server

255
Workstation and Server Specifications

Multiple Monitors
The DeltaV system can support up to four monitors that work together like one large
screen and are driven by the same workstation. Multiple monitors can be laid out in a
horizontal orientation (1x2, 1x3, 1x4) or a square orientation (2x2). Other monitor
arrangements are not supported. Refer to the video card manufacturers documentation
for information on how to install the video cards and remove any existing video cards. The
NEC MultiSync LCD 2080UX+ is approved for use in a multiple monitor system. Refer to
Books Online for information on installing the driver and video card and setting up the
video card for multiple monitors.

Touch Screens
Touch screens can be used on single monitors and on multiple monitors.Connect a cable
from any USB connector on the back of the workstation to a touch screen monitor in any
order or sequence. The NEC MultiSync LCD 2080UX with integrated capacitive
touchscreen is approved for use with the DeltaV system. After connecting the touch
screen monitors, refer to the 3M TouchWare Software for Windows User Guide for
complete information on calibrating and configuring the touch screens

256
Control Network Specifications

Appendix G
Control Network Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable
DeltaV Fiber Switches
DeltaV Smart Switches and Media Modules
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
DeltaV Control Networks
Example Networks with DeltaV Smart Switches
DeltaV Controller Firewall
The Management Station
Managing Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
DeltaV Zones
1420 Wireless Gateway

This appendix provides information and specifications for the DeltaV Control Network.
Refer to the following sources for current DeltaV Network configuration details:

DeltaV Product Data Sheets and the DeltaV Site Preparation Guide and System
Planning Guide
The network equipment manufacturers specifications
Your local Emerson Process Management representative

Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable


The following sections provide specifications and usage information for third party hubs,
switches, and cable that can be used with a DeltaV system. Diagrams that show these
components in DeltaV Control Networks are provided as examples.

Important
DeltaV systems require a specific version of Cisco switch software and a special switch
configuration. The use of other versions of the switch software or an improperly configured switch
could cause serious problems with the operation of the DeltaV system. Switches ordered from
Emerson Process Management are shipped with the supported software version and are pre-
configured to operate properly with the DeltaV system. To ensure that you have the proper switch
configuration and the correct switch software for your DeltaV system, you should purchase the
switch though normal Emerson channels. The DeltaV supported software version of the switch may
not be the version that is currently shipping on off-the-shelf Cisco switches.

257
Control Network Specifications

If you want to verify the configuration of a switch supplied by Emerson Process Management, refer to
the System Administration and Maintenance manual in the DeltaV Books Online. This
documentation provides written examples of correct, DeltaV specific switch configuration for the
supported revision level of the switch software. Emerson Process Management does not provide the
Cisco operating software separately for field configuration. If you purchase Cisco switches from
sources other than Emerson Process Management, the switch must be configured to DeltaV
instructions and the supplier is responsible for ensuring that the switch software is at the supported
revision level.

Cisco switches can be managed from a Management station. Refer to the Managing Cisco
Switches topic in DeltaV Books Online.

Related information

Connecting the Management Station


The Management Station

8-Port 10Mbit Ethernet Hub


Table G-1: 10Mbit 8-Port Ethernet Hub Specifications

Item Specification
Model 3Com OfficeConnectTM Hub 8/TPO
(3C16700A)
Type 10BASE-T Ethernet (3C16440A)

8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-


Optic Port
Specifications

Table G-2: 8-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Port

Item Specification
Model Cisco 8-Port Twisted Pair with 1, MTRJ Fiber-Op-
tic Port(1)
WS 2940-8TF

(1) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

258
Control Network Specifications

Table G-2: 8-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Port
(continued)

Item Specification
Type 8, 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet
1, 100BASE- FX Fiber-Optic
1, Gigabit SFP-based port

Note
Either the 100BASE-FX port or the Gigabit SFP-
based port can be used. Both ports cannot be
used at the same time.

Front and Rear Views

The following two figures show the front and rear views of the 8-port 10/100Mbit
managed switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic port.

Figure G-1: Front View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Port

100Base-FX Gigabit SFP-based


10/100 ports port port

Figure G-2: Rear View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Port

RJ-45 Console port

24-Port 100Mbit Fiber Switch


Specifications

Table G-3: 100Mbit 24-Port Fiber Switch Specifications

Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port MTRJ Fiber-Optic Switch(2)
(WS-C3550-24-FX-SMI)

(2) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable

259
Control Network Specifications

Table G-3: 100Mbit 24-Port Fiber Switch Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Type 100Mbit Fiber Ethernet

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 100Mbit fiber switch.

Figure G-3: Front View of the 24-Port 100Mbit Fiber Switch

100Base-FX ports GBIC


Module slots

Figure G-4: Rear View of the 24-Port 100Mbit Fiber Switch

RJ-45
Console port

24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic


Ports
Specifications

Table G-4: 10/100Mbit 24-Port Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports Specifications

Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port Twisted Pair with 2, MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Ports(3)
(WS-C2950C-24)
Type 24, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet
2, 100BASE-FX Fiber-Optic

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with
2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports.

(3) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

260
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-5: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic
Ports

10/100 Ports 100BASE-FX


ports

Figure G-6: Rear View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic
Ports

RJ-45
Console port

24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch


Specifications

Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port Twisted Pair(4)
(WS-C2950-24)
Type 10/100BASE-T Ethernet

Front and Rear Views

The following figure shows the front view of the 24-port switch. The rear view is the same
as the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with 2 MTRJ fiber-optic ports.

Figure G-7: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch

10/100 Ports

Note
Refer to the Cisco documentation for more detailed specifications

(4) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

261
Control Network Specifications

12-Port SFP Managed Switch


Specifications

Table G-5: 12 Port SFP Managed Switch

Item Specification
Model Cisco 12-port SFP managed(5)

(Catalyst 3750G-12S)
Type 12-port Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) Man-
aged switch

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 12-port SFP managed switch.

Figure G-8: Front View of the 12-Port SFP Managed Switch


Catalyst 3750

SFP slots

Figure G-9: Rear View of the 12-Port SFP Managed Switch


DC INPUTS FOR REMOTE
RATING POWER SUPPLY
100-240V ~ SPECIFIED IN MANUAL
CONSOLE 3A-1.5A, 50-60 HZ
STACK 1 STACK 2
WARNING

Stacking cable RJ-45


connection Console port

24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots


Specifications

Table G-6: 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots

Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-port fiber-optic managed switch with
100BASE-FX fiber ports and 2 Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) Gigabit slots(6)
(Catalyst 3750-24FS)

(5) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration on Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
(6) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

262
Control Network Specifications

Table G-6: 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots (continued)

Item Specification
Type 24, 100BASE-FX fiber-optic
2, SFP gigabit

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port fiber managed switch
with 2 SFP gigabit slots.

Figure G-10: Front View of the 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots
Catalyst 3750

100 Base-FX ports SFP slots

Figure G-11: Rear View of the 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots
DC INPUTS FOR REMOTE
POWER SUPPLY RATING
SPECIFIED IN MANUAL 100-240V ~
CONSOLE 3A-1.5A, 50-60 HZ
STACK 1 STACK 2
WARNING

Stacking cable RJ-45


connection Console port

24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit


Slots

Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-port twisted pair managed switch with 2 SFP gigabit slots
(Catalyst 3750-24TS)(7)
Type 24, 10/100 twisted pair managed
2, SFP gigabit slots

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port twisted pair managed
switch with 2 SFP gigabit slots.

(7) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

263
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-12: Front View of the 24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP
Gigabit Slots
Catalyst 3750

10/100 Ports SFP slots

Figure G-13: Rear View of the 24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP
Gigabit Slots
WARNING DC INPUTS FOR REMOTE
POWER SUPPLY
RATING SPECIFIED IN MANUAL
CONSOLE 100-240V ~
1.2A-0.0a, 50-60 HZ
STACK 1 STACK 2

Stacking cable RJ-45


connection Console port

8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch


Specifications

Table G-7: 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch

Item Specification
Model Allied Telesyn 8-port unmanaged switch (AT-
FS708)
Type 8, 10/100 twisted pair unmanaged

Front View

The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port twisted pair unmanaged switch.

Figure G-14: Front View of the 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch

Allied Telesyn
POWER
AT-FS708 LINK/ACT

100M AUTO
MD/MDIX
FDX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10/100 Ports

264
Control Network Specifications

8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One Fiber


Port
Specifications

Table G-8: 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One Fiber Port

Item Specification
Model Allied Telesyn 8-port unmanaged switch (AT-
FS709FC)
Type 8, 10/100 twisted pair unmanaged 1, 100BASE-
FX

Front View

The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port twisted pair unmanaged switch
with one fiber port.

Figure G-15: Front View of the 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One
Fiber Port
10/100 Ports (MDI/MDIX)
use one port only

Allied Telesyn FS709FC POWER

LINK/ACT

100 M

FDX

10/100 Ports 100BASE-FX Port

8-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 1 Gigabit Multi-Function


Port

Item Specification
Model Cisco 8-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair (Catalyst
2960-8TC-L)(8)

(8) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

265
Control Network Specifications

Item Specification
Type 8, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
1, gigabit multi-function port that can be used as ei-
ther a 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair port or a SFP-
based port.

Note
Either the twisted pair port or the SFP-based port can be
used. Both ports cannot be used at the same time.

The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port 10/100Mbit switch with one gigabit
multi-function port.

Figure G-16: Front View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with one Gigabit Multi-
function Port

Console port 10/100Mbit ports

24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 RJ45 Ports


Specifications

Table G-9: 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports

Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair(9)
(Catalyst 2960-24TT-L)
Type 24, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
2, 10/100/1000Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports

Front and Rear Views

The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with
two RJ45 gigabit uplink ports.

(9) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

266
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-17: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports

10/100Mbit ports 10/100/1000Mbit


ports

Figure G-18: Rear View of the Cisco 2960 24 and 48 Port Models

RJ45
console port

24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 Gigabit Multi-


Function Ports
Specifications

Table G-10: 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-Function Ports

Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair(10)
(Catalyst 2960-24TC-L)
Type 24, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
2, gigabit multi-function ports. Each multi-
function port can be used as either a 10/
100/1000Mbit twisted pair port or a SFP-
based port.

Note
Each multi-function port can be used as either
twisted pair or SFP. Both port types cannot be
used at the same time.

Front View

The following figure shows the front view of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with two
gigabit multi-function ports.

(10) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

267
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-19: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-
function Ports

10/100Mbit ports Gigabit


multi-function ports

48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 RJ45 Ports


Specifications

Table G-11: 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports

Item Specification
Model Cisco 48-Port twisted pair(11)
(Catalyst 2960-48TT-L)
Type 48, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
2, RJ45 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports

Front View

The following figure shows the front view of the 48-port 10/100Mbit switch with two RJ45
gigabit uplink ports.

Figure G-20: Front View of the 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports

10/100Mbit ports 10/100/1000Mbit


ports

(11) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

268
Control Network Specifications

48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 Gigabit Multi-


Function Ports
Specifications

Table G-12: 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-Function Ports

Item Specification
Model Cisco 48-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair(12)
(Catalyst 2960-48TC-L)
Type 48, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
2, gigabit multi-function ports that can be
used as either a 10/100/1000Mbit twisted
pair port or a SFP-based port.

Note
Each multi-function port can be used as either
twisted pair or SFP. Both port types cannot be
used at the same time.

Front view

The following figure shows the front view of the 48-port 10/100Mbit switch with two
gigabit multi-function ports.

Figure G-21: Front View of the 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-
function Ports

10/100Mbit ports Gigabit


multi-function ports

Fiber-Optic Gigabit Transceivers


Specifications

Item Specification
Model Cisco Fiber-Optic Gigabit Transceivers (GLC-LH-
SM and GLC-SX-MM)

(12) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.

269
Control Network Specifications

Item Specification
Type: GLC-LH-SM GLC-SX-MM Single-mode, long-haul, up to 10 km Multi-
mode, up to 550 m

Front View

The following figure shows the front view of the fiber-optic single and multimode gigabit
transceivers.

Figure G-22: Front View of the Fiber-Optic Transceivers - Single and Multimode

Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers


Specifications

The GLC-FE-100FX transceiver can be used with only the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch. The
GLC-GE-100FX transceiver can be used with the Cisco 2960-24-TC-L and the 2960-48-TC-L.

Table G-13: Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers Specifications

Item Specification
Model Cisco Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers (GLC-
FE-100FX and GLC-GE-100FX)
Type Multimode, up to 2 km

Front View

The following figure shows the fiber-optic ethernet transceivers.

270
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-23: Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceiver

Twisted Pair Gigabit Transceiver


Specifications

Table G-14: Twisted Pair Gigabit Transceiver

Item Specification
Model Cisco Twisted Pair Copper Gigabit Transceiver
(GLC-T)
Type 1 twisted pair port, up to 100 m

Front View

The following figure shows the front view of the twisted pair gigabit transceiver.

271
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-24: Front View of the Twisted Pair Gigabit Transceiver

DeltaV Fiber Switches


Specifications

The DeltaV system supports the Single Port Fiber Switch and the Four Port Fiber Switch.
The Single Port Fiber Switch is an Ethernet switch with one 100BASE-FX port and four
10/100BASE-TX ports. The Four Port Fiber Switch is an Ethernet switch with four 100BASE-
FX ports and one 10/100BASE-TX port. The switches can be mounted on a DIN rail and
provide comprehensive LED diagnostics. The switches can be installed in Zone 2 and
provide connection to Zone 1 components over the certified energy-limited fiber port.
Primarily the switches are the fiber port connection to the Zone 1 components; however,
they can be used for all Control Network applications. Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV
Zone 1 Intrinsically Safe Hardware manual in Books Online for information on connecting to
the DeltaV Intrinsically Safe system.

Table G-15: Single Port and Four Port Fiber Switch Specifications

Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC 20%
Input current 0.25 A for the Single Port Fiber Switch
0.35 A for the Four Port Fiber Switch
Link budget Multimode 62.5/125 m - max attenuation
11 dB
Multimode 50/125 m - max attenuation 8
dB
Wavelength 1300 nm

272
Control Network Specifications

Table G-15: Single Port and Four Port Fiber Switch Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Fiber interface 100 BASE-FX with MT-RJ receptacle, full duplex
only
Fiber type Refer to the "Setting up the DeltaV Control Net-
work" topic.
Nominal fiber distance 2 km
Twisted pair ports 10/100 BASE-T, RJ45 compatible
Cable type Category 5e screened twisted pair (ScTP)
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail

Top and Bottom Views

The following figures show the top and bottom views of the Single Port Fiber Switch.

Figure G-25: Top View of the Single Port Fiber Switch

+
Not used
-

+
Shield
ground
-

100 Management Power


BaseFx port inputs
port (not used)

Figure G-26: Bottom View of the Single Port Fiber Switch

10/100BaseTx ports

The following figures show the top and bottom views of the Four Port Fiber Switch.

273
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-27: Top View of the Four Port Fiber Switch


Management port
(not used)

+
Shield
ground
-

+
Shield
ground
-

100BaseFx Power
ports inputs

Figure G-28: Bottom View of the Four Port Fiber Switch


100BaseFx Ports

10/100BaseTx port

Related information

Setting up the DeltaV Control Network

DeltaV Smart Switches and Media Modules


The DeltaV Smart Switches are used to construct DeltaV Control Networks according to
the IEEE 802.3 Local and Metropolitan Area Networks standards. There are three families of
DeltaV Smart switches:

DeltaV MD base Smart Switches and media modules


DeltaV RM100 base Smart Switches and media modules
DeltaV FP20 8-port Smart Switches

274
Control Network Specifications

DeltaV Smart Switches are intended for plug and play use with a DeltaV system. No
configuration is necessary unless you want to access a switch with Telnet, monitor a switch
with a web-based switch interface from a Management station or use the DeltaV version
10.3 One-Click Lockdown application to lock the switches to prevent unauthorized devices
from being connected to unused ports on the switches. In DeltaV version 11.3 or higher,
Smart Switches are commissioned using the DeltaV Smart Switch Command Center
(SSCC). When you commission the switches using the SSCC, the switch is given a network
address and associated with a control module so that switch hardware conditions can be
interpreted as DeltaV alarms.

Monitoring a switch with the web-based switch interface requires Java software that can be
downloaded from the Internet. A serial interface cable is required to connect the switchs
serial port to the Management station in order to set up the switches. The serial interface
cable can be purchased separately from Emerson Process Management or you can build
the cable assembly. The following figure shows the pin outs for building the serial interface
cable assembly. Different pin outs are used for each end of the cable.

Figure G-29: Serial Interface Cable Pin Outs


RJ11 DB9
CTS 1
Pin 5 n.c. 2 2
Pin 6 TX 3 3
Pin 8
Pin 1 GND 4
RX 5 5
Pin 1 RTS 6

Media modules with fiber-optic network ports are fixed to 100Mbit full duplex
communication (except for ports that use SFP media modules that are fixed at either
100Mbit or 1 gigabit full duplex). When DeltaV Smart Switches are used in an existing
network, all existing fiber-optic connections must be set to 100Mbit full duplex for the
switches to communicate. For example, if DeltaV Smart Switches are installed in a network
with 3Com switches, you must change the 3Com switches from the default half duplex to
full duplex.

Refer to Books Online for DeltaV version 10.3 for information on the One-Click Lockdown
application, for information on configuring, monitoring, and accessing the switches with
Telnet, and for information on downloading Java software. Refer to Books Online for
DeltaV version 11.3 for information about the Smart Switch Command Center.

Before installing and using DeltaV Smart Switches and media modules, refer to the
important safety information in the System Administration and Maintenance manual in
Books Online.

DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches and Media Modules


Specifications

The DeltaV MD Smart Switches consist of the base switches, MD20 and MD30, and DeltaV
media modules that plug into the base switches. The MD20 base Smart Switches have 8,
16, or 24, 10/100Mbit ports and the MD30 have 8, 16, or 24, 10/100Mbit ports and a
gigabit slot. For both base Smart Switch types, a variety of pluggable DeltaV media
modules provide the interfaces to the DeltaV Control Network in a variety of media types.

275
Control Network Specifications

Note
The MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches consist of the base switch and the backplane. These items are
not available separately. The base switch functions as the power supply and the backplane houses
the switching circuits.

Table G-16: DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches

Model Type
MD20-8 MD20-8-ES Up to 8, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules
MD20-16 MD20-16-ES Up to 16, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules
MD20-24 MD20-24-ES Up to 24, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules
MD30-8 MD30-8-ES Up to 8, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules 2, gigabit ports
MD30-16 MD30-16-ES Up to 16, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules 2, gigabit ports
MD30-24 MD30-24-ES Up to 24, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules 2, gigabit ports

The ES versions of the MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches have an extended temperature
range and conformal coating.

Table G-17: DeltaV Media Modules for the MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches

Model Type
MD4-2TX/SFP 2, gigabit multimode fiber SFP slots
MD4-2TX/SFP-ES 2, gigabit, RJ45 twisted pair ports

Note
Either the twisted pair port or the fiber SFP slots
can be used. Both cannot be used at the same
time.

MD2-2FXM2 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet ports over multi-


MD2-2FXM2-ES mode fiber (SC connectors)

MD2-2FXS2 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet ports over single


MD2-2FXS2-ES mode fiber (SC connectors)

MD2-4TX1 4, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, fast ethernet twisted


MD2-4TX1-ES pair ports (RJ45 connectors)

MD2-4TX1-POE 4, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, fast ethernet twisted


MD2-4TX1-POE-ES pair ports (RJ45 connectors) with Power over
Ethernet (PoE)

276
Control Network Specifications

Table G-17: DeltaV Media Modules for the MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches
(continued)

Model Type
MD3-2FXM2/2TX1 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multi-
MD3-2FXM2/2TX1-ES mode fiber ports (SC connectors)
2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)
MD3-2FXS2/2TX1 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over single
MD3-2FXS2/2TX1-ES mode fiber ports (SC connectors)
2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)
MD3-4FXM2 4, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multimode fi-
MD3-4FXM2-ES ber ports (SC connectors)

MD3-4FXM4 4, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multimode fi-


MD3-4FXM4-ES ber ports (ST connectors)

MD3-4FXS2 4, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over single mode fi-


MD3-4FXS2-ES ber ports (SC connectors)

MD3-2FXM4/2TX1 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multi-


MD3-2FXM4/2TX1-ES mode fiber ports (ST connectors)
2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)
MD3-1FXS2/3TX1 1, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over single
MD3-1FXS2/3TX1-ES mode fiber port (SC connectors)
3, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)

Images

The following figure shows an MD20 8-port base Smart Switch. This switch has two
10/100Mbit slots for media modules. Various media modules are available with up to four
ports per module.

277
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-30: MD20 8-Port Smart Switch

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-8

The following figure shows an MD20 16-port base Smart Switch. This switch has four
10/100Mbit slots for media modules. Various media modules are available with up to four
ports per module.

Figure G-31: MD20 16-Port Smart Switch


Base switch Slots for media modules

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-16

Ground screw

278
Control Network Specifications

The MD20 16-port Smart Switch can be expanded to 24 ports in the field with a two slot
expansion backplane or the MD20 24-port Smart Switch can be purchased as a single
product.

Figure G-32: MD20 Smart Switch with 24 Ports


Base switch Slots for media modules Two-slot expansion backplane

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD20-16

Ground screw

The following figure shows an MD20 16-port Smart Switch with four media modules
installed.

Figure G-33: MD20 16-Port Smart Switch with Four Media Modules

P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT

Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module

MD20-16 4TX1 4TX1 2FXM2/2TX1 4FXM4

279
Control Network Specifications

The MD30 Smart Switches have 8 or 16, 10/100Mbit ports and a gigabit slot to the left of
the base switch. The following figure shows an MD30 8-port Smart Switch.

Figure G-34: MD30 8-Port Smart Switch


Gigabit Base switch
Slots for media modules
slot

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD30-8

Ground screw

The following figure shows an MD30 16-port Smart Switch.

Figure G-35: MD30 16-Port Smart Switch


Gigabit Base switch
Slots for media modules
slot

P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT

Network Switch

MD30-16

Ground screw

280
Control Network Specifications

The following figure shows an MD30 16-port Smart Switch with five media modules. The
media module to the left of the base switch has two gigabit ports.

Figure G-36: MD30 16-Port Switch with Media Modules

P P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2

1 1 L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 2 FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 2
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT

Switch Interface Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module Module

2TX/SPF MD30-16 4TX1 4TX1 2FXM2/2TX1 4FXM4

The MD30 16-port Smart Switch, like the MD20 16-port Smart Switch, can be expanded in
the field to 24 ports with a two slot expansion backplane or the MD30 24-port Smart
Switch can be purchased as a single product.

As shown in the following figure, an image on the front of the media module shows the
media modules port layout. This port layout is used by the MD3-4FXS2, MD3-4FXM4, and
MD3-4FXM2 media modules

281
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-37: Port Layout for MD3-4FXS2, 4FXM4, and 4FXM2


Bottom view

1 1
2 2 Port 1
3 3
4 4 Port 2

Port 3

Switch Interface Port 4


Module

4FXS2

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the MD2-2FXM2 and 2FXS2 media modules.

Figure G-38: Port Layout for the MD2-2FXM2 and 2FXS2


Bottom view

Port 1

Port 2

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the MD3-2FXM2/2TX1, 2FXM4/2TX1,
1FXS2/3TX1, and 2FXS2/2TX1 media modules.

282
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-39: Port Layout for the MD3-2FXM2/2TX1, 2FXM4/2TX1, 1FXS2/3TX1, and
2FXS2/2TX1
Bottom view

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the MD4-2TX/SFP media module.

Figure G-40: Port Layout for the MD4-2TX/SFP


Bottom view

Port 1

Port 2

Port 1
Port 2

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the MD2-4TX1 media module.

283
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-41: Port Layout for the MD2-4TX1


Bottom view

Port 1 Port 2

Port 3 Port 4

Connector end

The following figure shows the port layout for the 4TX1-PoE media module.

Figure G-42: Port Layout for the 4TX1-PoE


Bottom view

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

D.C. 48v

Connector end

Related information

Environmental Specifications for the DeltaV System

284
Control Network Specifications

Power Specifications for the MD20 and MD30 Smart


Switches
Specifications

The following table provides power specifications for the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 base
Smart Switches. The base switches provide power to the media modules.

Table G-18: Power Specifications for the DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches

Item Specification
Input voltage +18 to +32 VDC
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail.

Images

Figure G-43: Bottom View of the MD20 and MD30 Smart Base Switch

Serial port

USB port

Dip switch
(not used) Power 1
1 = +24 VDC
1 2 3 4
Power 1 2 = 0 VDC
connectors 3,4 = Relay 1

Power 2 Power 2
connectors
4 3 2 1
1 = +24 VDC
2 = 0 VDC
3,4 = Relay 2

A detachable screw terminal block, shown in the preceding image, is used to supply
the required power to the MD base Smart Switches.
A ground screw on the left side of the MD switchs mounting chassis, shown in the
following figure, connects to an instrumentation ground to provide a shield ground
for the switch and device communication cables.

285
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-44: Ground Connection for the DeltaV MD Smart Switches


10Mbit media modules
Base switch

P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2

L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT

Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module

MD20-8 4TX1 4TX1 2FXM2/2TX1 4FXM4

Ground screw

DeltaV RM100 Base Smart Switches and Media Modules


Specifications

The DeltaV RM Smart Switches consist of four types of base switches and, depending upon
the switch type, up to two pluggable media modules. The media modules provide a variety
of pluggable media options. Table G-21 describes the media modules. The RM-100 Base
Smart Switch-RP supports redundant input power. The RM Smart Switches can be
mounted on a 19 inch rack or on a wall.

Table G-19: DeltaV RM Base Smart Switches

Model Type
RM100-Base Smart Switch 2, gigabit Ethernet combo ports
8, fast Ethernet ports
2 sockets for media modules for an addition-
al 8 or 16 ports
RM100-Base Smart Switch-RP 2, gigabit Ethernet combo ports
8, fast Ethernet ports
2 sockets for media modules for an addition-
al 8 or 16 ports
Redundant input power.

286
Control Network Specifications

Table G-19: DeltaV RM Base Smart Switches (continued)

Model Type
RM100-8TX 8, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports with RJ45
connectors
2, 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports with
RJ45 connectors
2, 100/1000Mbit SFP-based ports
This is a fixed-configuration switch; no addition-
al media modules can be added to it.

Note
Either the 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports
or the SFP ports can be used. Both port types
cannot be used at the same time.

RM100-24TX 24, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports with RJ45


connectors
2, 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports with
RJ45 connectors
2, 100/1000Mbit SFP-based ports
This is a fixed-configuration switch; no addition-
al media modules can be added to it.

Note
Either the 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports
or the SFP ports can be used. Both port types
cannot be used at the same time.

Table G-20: Number of Slots and Connectable Network Segments for the DeltaV
RM100 Smart Switches

RM100 Base Smart


Switch and Base
Item Smart Switch-RP RM100-8TX RM100-24TX
Number of slots for 10/ 2 0 2
100Mbit media mod-
ules.(13)
Number of ports for 2 2 2
gigabit connec-
tions.(14)

(13) Up to two modules can be installed in any combination of fiber and twisted pair for the RM100 Base Smart Switch and Base Smart Switch-
RP.
(14) Up to 24 ports when all slots are filled.

287
Control Network Specifications

Table G-20: Number of Slots and Connectable Network Segments for the DeltaV
RM100 Smart Switches (continued)

RM100 Base Smart


Switch and Base
Item Smart Switch-RP RM100-8TX RM100-24TX
Maximum number of 24 8 24
connectable 10/
100Mbit network seg-
ments.
Maximum number of 2 2 2
connectable gigabit
network segments.

Images

The following figure shows the RM base Smart Switch. In this image, the slots for the
media modules are empty.

Figure G-45: RM100 Base Smart Switch with no Media Modules


LEDs
Signal contact 10/100Mbit Sockets for media modules
USB Port fast Ethernet ports
v.24
RM100 Base Module
Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

100/1000Mbit
10/100/1000Mbit fiber SFP slots
twisted pair ports

In the following figure, two eight port media modules are installed in the RM100.

Figure G-46: RM Base Smart Switch with two Media Modules


LEDs
Signal contact 10/100Mbit Media modules
USB Port fast Ethernet ports
v.24
RM100 Base Module
Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7

FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2

100/1000Mbit
10/100/1000Mbit fiber SFP slots
twisted pair ports

288
Control Network Specifications

Media Modules for RM base Smart Switches

The following table provides information on the media modules for the RM base Smart
Switches.

Table G-21: RM Media Modules

Model Type
RM100-EM-8TX 8, fast Ethernet twisted pair ports with RJ45 con-
nectors
RM100-EM-8MM-FX 8, fast Ethernet multimode fiber ports with DSC
connectors
RM100-EM-8SM-FX 8, fast Ethernet single mode fiber ports with
DSC connectors
RM100-EM-8SFP 8, fast Ethernet SFP slots

Figure G-47: RM100-EM-8TX Media Module


Fast Ethernet LEDs
twisted pair ports

289
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-48: RM100-EM-8MM-FX Media Module


LEDs

Fast Ethernet multimode fiber ports


with dual SC connectors

The RM100-EM-8SM-FX media module has the same physical layout as the RM100-EM-8-
MM-FX shown in the following figure.

Figure G-49: RM100-EM-8SFP Media Module


LEDs

Fast Ethernet
slots

Power Specifications for the DeltaV RM Smart Switches


Specifications

The following table provides power and other specifications for the DeltaV RM Smart
Switches.

Table G-22: Specifications for DeltaV RM Smart Switches

Item Specification
Input voltage 100 - 240 VAC

290
Control Network Specifications

Table G-22: Specifications for DeltaV RM Smart Switches (continued)

Item Specification
Input current 0.4 - 0.2 A
Mounting Horizontally on a 19 inch rack or vertically on
the wall

Rear View

The RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP supports redundant input power. The power supply
inputs are uncoupled. The following figure shows the redundant power connections on the
rear of the RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP.

Figure G-50: Redundant Power on the RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP


Redundant Standard
power supply power supply
100 - 240 VAC 100 - 240 VAC

The standard power supply alone supplies power to the device. The redundant power
supply automatically becomes active if the standard supply fails.

DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches


Specifications

The DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches are all 8-port switches. Each of the FP20 Smart Switches
has 6, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports, two of the eight ports on each switch are fiber uplink
ports, twisted pair uplink ports, or a combination of fiber and twisted pair uplink ports.

Model Type
FP20-6TX2TX 8, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2TX-ES(15)
FP20-6TX1MM1TX 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX1MM1TX-ES 1, 100Mbit (DSC) multimode fiber uplink
port
1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port
FP20-6TX1SM1TX 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX1SM1TX-ES 1, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber uplink
port
1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port

(15) The ES version of the switches have an extended temperature range and conformal coating. Refer to Appendix A for temperature ranges.

291
Control Network Specifications

Model Type
FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX-ES 1, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber, long
haul uplink port
1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port
FP20-6TX2MM 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2MM-ES 2, 100Mbit (DSC) multimode fiber uplink
ports
FP20-6TX2SM 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2SM-ES 2, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber uplink
ports
FP20-6TX2SMLH 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2SMLH-ES 2, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber, long
haul uplink ports

Front Views

The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20-6TX2TX Smart Switch. This
switch has eight twisted pair ports.

Figure G-51: Front View of the DeltaV FP20-6TX2TX Smart Switch


Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)


Power/relay
connectors
P FAULT
RUN LOCK
LEDs

USB USB port

V.24 interface
V.24

1 2

3 4

8 twisted
pair ports
5 6

7 8
Ground
screw

The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with six
twisted pair ports, one twisted pair uplink port, and one fiber uplink port (model numbers
FP20-6TX1MM1TX, FP20-6TX1SM1TX, FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX)

292
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-52: Front View of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with Fiber and Twisted
Pair Uplink Ports
Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)


Power /relay
LS DA connectors
P FAULT
RUN LOCK
Fiber uplink LEDs
1
ports
USB USB port

V.24 interface
V.24

1 2

Twisted pair DA

uplink port 2

LS
Twisted pair
3 4
ports

Ground 5 6

screw

The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with six
twisted pair ports and two fiber uplink ports (model numbers FP20-6TX2MM,
FP20-6TX2SM, and FP20-6TX2SMLH).

Figure G-53: Front View of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with Two Fiber Uplink
Ports
Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)


Power /relay
LS DA connectors
P FAULT
RUN LOCK
Fiber uplink LEDs
1
ports
USB USB port

V.24 interface
V.24

LS DA

1 2

Fiber uplink
ports 2
Twisted pair
3 4
ports

Ground 5 6

screw

293
Control Network Specifications

Power Specifications for the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches


Specifications

Table G-23: Specifications for DeltaV FP20 8-Port Smart Switches

Item Specification
Input voltage 9.6 - 60 VDC 18 - 30 VAC
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Changes to Open if: Power
supply fails At least one port has a defective link
status Internal voltage supply fails Self-test fail-
ure occurs
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail. A rack mount
kit is available.

Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation


Rules
CommScope cable that meets Category 5e specifications can be purchased from Emerson
Process Management or directly from the manufacturer (CommScope). CommScope type
5ES4 cable meets the minimum requirements for Category 5e cable used in 100Mbit and
1000Mbit Ethernet networks for DeltaV systems. Visit the CommScope web site for the
most current specifications for Category 5e Screened 4 Twisted Pair Cable (ScTP).

In addition to CommScope cable, several types of Belden cable can be used as long as it
meets or exceeds the CommScope 5ES4 category 5e performance and shielding
specifications. Belden cable can be purchased through Belden cable distributors. If Belden
cable is used, the basic cable installation and temperature specifications differ from the
specifications shown in the following list.

Follow these rules when installing CommScope cable to protect the electrical performance
of the cables:

A cable is under loaded conditions when it is being pulled or it is under pressure.


Under loaded conditions do not exceed:
- 25 pounds pulling tension
- 16 times the Outside Diameter (OD) of the cable (3.2 inches) for the minimum
bend radius while pulling the cable
A cable is under no load or unloaded conditions when the cable is being placed with
no tension. Under unloaded conditions do not exceed:
- 8 times the OD of the cable (1.6 inches) for the minimum bend radius
Under both loaded and unloaded conditions, do not:
- Install the cable unless the temperature is between 0C and 60C
- Operate cable in environments outside the operating temperature range of
-20C and 60C

294
Control Network Specifications

Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications


Specifications

Table G-24: Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications

Item Specification
Type Refer to "Control Network Installation Require-
ments"
Minimum number of fibers Two per communications channel
Attenuation Refer to "Control Network Installation Require-
ments"
Temperature rating Refer to "Control Network Installation Require-
ments"
Connectors Refer to "Control Network Installation Require-
ments"

Related information

Setting up the DeltaV Control Network


Control Network Installation Requirements

Cable Accessory Specifications


Specifications

Item Specification
Connectors Category 5, 8-position RJ45 plug connectors(16)
Terminating tool Hand or automatic machine tool for 8-position
connectors(16)
Boots, color-coded Yellow = primary control network cable(16)
Black = secondary control network cable(16)
Vinyl plastic tape Yellow Black

Note
Color marking tape also can be used.

Cable markers Vinyl film, self-laminating(16)

(16) Available from Emerson Process Management

295
Control Network Specifications

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies


Straight-through and crossover twisted pair cable assemblies are used in DeltaV Control
Networks. Both shielded, metal-enclosed and isolated or unshielded, plastic-enclosed RJ45
connectors are used on both types of assemblies.

You will need to build four types of cable assembly combinations:

Crossover cable with one end shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connector) and one
end isolated (plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector)
Crossover cable with both ends shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors)
Straight-through cable with one end shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connector) and
one end isolated (plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector)
Straight-through cable with both ends shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors)

Before building any of these assemblies, you will need to determine the correct
combination of shielded and unshielded RJ45 connectors for your DeltaV Control Network.
Refer to 10/100Mbit network examples to make this determination. These figures contain
notes that indicate where metal-enclosed and plastic-enclosed RJ45 connectors are
required and where straight-through and crossover cable are needed.

When building cable assemblies with shielded and unshielded connectors, always refer to
the connector and tool manufacturers latest assembly instructions and application
specifications. These specifications show the correct jacket and shield preparation length
for the specific connectors being used.

Figure G-54 shows an unshielded, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector. First the boot is slid
onto the cable, next the load bar is loaded with the eight inner cable conductors, then the
load bar/cable assembly is inserted into the connector housing and crimped. Finally, the
boot is slid over the assembly for additional strain relief.

Figure G-54: Unshielded Connector


Plastic-enclosed
RJ45 connector

Cable
conductors
Load bar/cable
assembly
Boot

Load bar

296
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-55 shows a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector. First the boot is slid onto the
cable, then the cable shield and drain wire are folded back, next the load bar is loaded with
the eight inner cable conductors, then the load bar/cable assembly is inserted into the
connector housing and crimped. Finally, the boot is slid over the assembly for additional
strain relief.

Figure G-55: Shielded Connector


Metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector

Cable
conductors
Load bar/cable
assembly
Drain wire
Shielding
Boot
Load bar

Related information

10/100Mbit Network Examples

Straight-Through Cable Pin Outs


The following figure shows the pin outs for building a straight-through cable assembly.
The same pin outs are used for both ends of the cable.

297
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-56: Straight-Through Cable Pin Outs for Both Ends

Crossover Cable Pin Outs


The following figure shows the pin outs for building a crossover cable assembly. Different
pin outs are used for each end of the cable.

Figure G-57: Crossover Cable Pin Outs for Both Ends

DeltaV Control Networks


The DeltaV Control Network examples in this chpater sare designed according to the IEEE
802.3 Local and Metropolitan Area Networks standards. The topologies shown in the
examples are a small subset of the control network topologies that conform to the
Ethernet 802.3 standard. Network topologies vary depending upon the plant layout. One

298
Control Network Specifications

plant layout may require a large number of hubs in one wiring closet rather than single
hubs in several wiring closets or rack rooms located throughout the plant. Another plant
layout may require a centralized hub or switch in a star topology that branches to several
remote locations. These and other network configurations are possible and fully supported
by Emerson Process Management. Consult your sales representative for assistance with
network configuration.

The examples begin with simple 10 megabit per second (abbreviated here as 10Mbit)
twisted pair network implementations, and end with more complex 10/100Mbit twisted
pair networks with a combination of fiber-optic and twisted pair segments. In all cases, the
examples show the maximum cable distances and the maximum number of intermediate
Ethernet hubs. These maximum limits assure you that any network design that exactly
matches the example, or is a subset of the example, is guaranteed to operate according to
Ethernet rules and will provide the necessary performance for your DeltaV system.

Hop Rules

Advanced Ethernet models used for the calculation of maximum packet transmission
distances over copper cabling can be found in Ethernet 802.3 standards. For simplicity, this
Appendix uses general Ethernet rules. For example, the number of repeater hops is limited
to four (four repeater hubs physically connected together in series) for 10Mbit networks,
and to two (two repeater hubs physically connected together in series) for 100Mbit
networks. This limitation on the number of repeater hops allows for a minimum amount of
space (Inter Frame Gap) between each packet that is transmitted over the network so that
the physical mediums receivers and transmitters located on each repeater port have time
to distinguish between the end of one packet and the beginning of the next. As a packet
travels between end nodes on a network, each repeater through which the packet travels
reduces the Inter Frame Gap by a small amount. If too many repeater hubs are in the path
between two end nodes, the overall net Inter Frame Gap shrinkage will result in an Inter
Frame Gap that is too small and packet information will be corrupted by the time it reaches
the receiving device. When all repeater hubs used in a network, such as the repeater hubs
that are qualified for use with the DeltaV system, are designed in compliance with Ethernet
standards, the generalized two hop/ four hop rules can be used. Otherwise, a custom
calculation would have to be performed on a case by case basis for every network
connection.

Extending a DeltaV Control Network with Media


Converters
Media converters are sometimes used to add a point-to-point fiber-optic link between
buildings for ground isolation and noise immunity. Media converters may be more cost
effective than an entire hub or switch fitted with a fiber-optic transceiver on both ends of
the link. Sometimes, small form factor Ethernet switches are used as media converters and
are often a better choice than a typical media converter.

Consider the following guidelines when choosing between a media converter and switches
with small form factors:

With Ethernet media converters, the entire link must operate at the same speed and
duplex or severe communication problems can occur. This means that both fiber-
optic and twisted pair devices must operate at the same speed and duplex. For
example, the twisted pair link cannot operate at 100Mbit while the fiber-optic link

299
Control Network Specifications

operates at 10Mbit. The lower speed of the two attached devices determines the
maximum speed for the link. Likewise, the twisted pair port of the media converter
cannot operate at half duplex while its fiber-optic port operates at full duplex. For
100Mbit half duplex operation between a half duplex MD controller and a half
duplex fiber-optic media converter attached to a switchs fiber-optic port, fiber-
optic distance is limited to less than 300 meters because the entire link is half
duplex. The actual fiber cable distance must be calculated on a case-by-case basis
depending upon the manufacturers specifications for propagation delay through
the media converter.
With Ethernet switches with small form factors such as the DeltaV Single Port Fiber
Switch and DeltaV Four Port Fiber switch, the twisted pair port on the switch
operates with independent collision domain timing from all other ports including
the fiber-optic ports. This ensures that the fiber-optic distance can always be two
kilometers and the twisted pair distance can always be 100 meters. Due to advances
in switch technology and new components, the cost of a multi-port small form
factor switch is about the same as a two port media converter. In addition, more
devices can be added to this small switch as the system grows.

10Mbit Hub Example


Ethernet design rules apply for the maximum distance between workstation A and
workstation B (the furthest points) when four repeaters are in series that are connected by
twisted pair link segments for the 10Mbit networks shown in Figure G-58. Each port on
each hub can have a 100 meter (328 feet) maximum length twisted pair cable attached.
This allows a total network diameter of 500 meters (1640.5 feet) end to end. This
configuration can be implemented at installations having several wiring closets or rack
rooms configured within a single building with stable environmental conditions and a
common ground.

The 3Com mini-hubs in Figure G-58 have the following specifications:

8 port non-stackable
table top or wall mount
external wall plug power supply
no upgrade options for Fiber-Optic Transceivers

Note
Make a ground connection to the mini-hub chassis with a 12 AWG wire for the twisted pair cable
shield ground.

In the following figure any port on any hub can be used for DeltaV Workstation, Controller,
and Application Station connections. However, port 8 on each hub is a special port used for
the hub to hub connections. The hub to hub connection through these special ports allows
the use of a standard straight-through twisted pair cable. A push button next to these
ports is for the crossover function. When the crossover function is not used, the port can
be used for regular workstation and controller connections.

300
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-58: 10Mbit Copper with 8 Port Hub

2 2 2 2
Workstation Workstation
A 3Com 8-port B
10 Mbit Office
connect hub

3 1 1 1 3

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link can be placed on either hub.

2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and hub but not on the PC.

Related information

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies

10/100Mbit Network Examples


The following 15 network drawings provide examples of more complex networks that use
10/100Mbit twisted pair and fiber-optic segments. These examples go beyond the simple
10Mbit network and are intended to help you visualize some of the possibilities for control
network expansion and growth. Each example contains a network drawing with callouts
and a table that explains each callout.

Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Star


Figure G-59 applies to both primary and secondary networks

301
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-59: Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Star with Cisco 3550 Switch

8 7 7
8
6 Cisco 2950C
twisted pair switch
with 2 MTRJ ports
4,6 6
1,3 2
4,6
1,3 Cisco 2950
6 twisted pair switch
7 2
8 6 7
8

Management ProPLUS
station station

7 7 7
6
2

1,3 4,6 Cisco 3550FX


fiber optic switch
Controllers
6
7 7

8 7
5,6
6 8 7
Operator stations
6
1,3 2
1,3 2

6 4,6
7 6 7 4,6
8 8

302
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-60: Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Using the Single Port Fiber Switch
10

Port 3
Power
Error

Port 1 Port 4

7
Port 2 Port 5 8

10

2 Power
Error
Port 3

Port 1 Port 4

7 Port 2 Port 5

8 7
Management ProPLUS
station station
10
2
9 Port 3
Power
Error

7 7 7 Port 1 Port 4

Port 2 Port 5

6
2
8
1,3 4,6 Cisco 3550FX
fiber optic switch

6
7 7 10

Port 3
Power
Error

5,6 Port 1 Port 4

7
Port 2 Port 5 8
Operator stations

10 10
2
Port 3
Power
Error
Port 3
Power
Port 1 Port 4 Error

7 Port 2 Port 5
Port 1 Port 4

7 Port 2 Port 5

8 7
8 7

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5e Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable (trans-
mit and receive) is required between switches.

2 2 km (max) full duplex Multimode Fiber with MTRJ Connectors.

3 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

303
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

4 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex opera-
tion. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that any devices attach-
ed to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex operation be-
fore making the connection.

5 All ports have been preconfigured by Emerson Process Management to 100BASE-FX


full duplex operation in order to meet the most typical network configuration re-
quirements. It is good practice to check each port's duplex setting before connect-
ing to them since it is possible to configure each of these ports to half duplex opera-
tion. Half duplex operation is not recommended when using switch-to-switch con-
nections as shown in the preceding figure . A duplex mismatch can cause serious
communications problems.

6 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for both fi-
ber-optic and twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to Managing Cisco Switches in
Books Online for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
Use an IP address from the address range allowed for switches for this PC.

7 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

8 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

9 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the information on the management station in the related topics before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

10 The cable shields connected to the Single Port Fiber Switch must be grounded. To
ground the shields, connect the shield GND to ground or use a twisted pair cable
with both shield ends connected and installed in a grounded port.

Related information

Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station
Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses

Twisted Pair Network Star Using Twisted Pair Switches


Figure G-61 applies to both primary and secondary networks.

304
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-61: Twisted Pair Network Star Using Cisco 2950 Twisted Pair Switches

4 4
3 3
5 5
1,2 All Cisco 2950 1,2
twisted pair switches
5 5
1,2

4 3 4 3
1,2

Management
station ProPLUS stations
6 4
1,2 3
3 5
4 3 3
1,2
5
5
1,2
5 5

4 3
4 3 3
1,2

Operator stations 1,2

4 3 4
3 5
5

1,2 1,2

5 5

4 3 4 3

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable (trans-
mit and receive) is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

305
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to for the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

Related information

Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

Twisted Pair Cascaded Network Using Twisted Pair


Switches
Figure G-62applies to both primary and secondary networks.

306
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-62: Twisted Pair Cascaded Network Using Cisco 2950 Twisted Pair Switches

4
3
All Cisco 2950 5
twisted pair switches

1,2

4
3 5

ProPLUS stations
1,2
4 3 3
5

3
Management 1,2
6
station
5

4 3 3 1,2

Operator stations
5

4 3
1,2

4 3

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable (trans-
mit and receive) is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

307
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to Managing Cisco Switches in Books Online for
information. for the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for switches on
DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management informa-
tion. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

Related information

Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

Twisted Pair Cascaded Networks with Fiber Links


Figure G-63 applies to both primary and secondary networks.

308
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-63: Twisted Pair Cascaded Networks with Fiber Links Using the Cisco 2950C

4
5
All Cisco 2950C 1,2
twisted pair switches
with 2 MTRJ fiber optic ports 3

4
5
1,2

ProPLUS stations 3

4 5 5
1,2

6 3
Management
station
1,2

4 5 5
3

Operator stations 1,2

4 5
3

1,2

4 5

Callout Description

1 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex opera-
tion. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that any devices attach-
ed to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex operation be-
fore making the connection.

2 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for both fi-
ber-optic and twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches"
in Books Online for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
Use an IP address from the address range allowed for switches for this PC .

309
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 2Km (max) full duplex Multimode Fiber with MTRJ Connectors.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

Related information

Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station
Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications

100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network


Figure G-64 shows a 100Mbit twisted pair cascaded network with Cisco 3750 switches.

310
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-64: 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 3750 Switches
Operator stations Operator stations

4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS


Catalyst 3750
Catalyst 3750

Switch 1 7 5 8 Switch 4 7 5 8
3 Controllers 3 Controllers

Operator ProPLUS Management


Operator stations
stations station station
6

4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS


4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750

Catalyst 3750

Switch 5 7 5 8
Switch 2 7 5 8 3 Controllers
3
Controllers
1,2 1,2

Operator stations Operator stations

4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 4 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS


Catalyst 3750 Catalyst 3750

Switch 3 7 5 8 Switch 6 7 5 8
3 Controllers 3 Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

311
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management informa-
tion. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 The switch is equipped with two gigabit slots that require a fiber-optic or twisted
pair small form factor pluggable (SFP) module (not used in the preceding network
drawing ). These slots always operate at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted
with the SFP module.

Related information

Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

Gigabit Twisted Pair Network Cascade


This network example shows a twisted pair cascaded network with Cisco 3750 switches.
Gigabit twisted pair small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules are used in this network.

312
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-65: Gigabit Twisted Pair Network Cascade with Cisco 3750 Switches

Operator stations Operator stations

4 Cisco Catalyst 4 Cisco Catalyst


Switch 1 3750-24TS Switch 4 3750-24TS 5

Catalyst 3750
Catalyst 3750

7 5 8
3 3 7
Cisco Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
8 Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
SFP Module SFP Modules

Operator ProPLUS Management


stations station station
6 1,2
1,2 Operator stations

Cisco Catalyst 4 Cisco Catalyst


Switch 2 4 3750-24TS 5 Switch 5 3750-24TS 5
Catalyst 3750

Catalyst 3750

3 7 Cisco Cisco 8
3 7
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
SFP Modules SFP Modules
8

1,2
Operator stations Operator stations
1,2
4 Cisco Catalyst 4 Cisco Catalyst
Switch 3 Switch 6 5
3750-24TS 5 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750 Catalyst 3750

8
3 7 Cisco 3 7 Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
8 SFP Modules SFP Module

1,2

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

313
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 The switch is equipped with two gigabit slots that require a fiber-optic or twisted
pair small form factor pluggable (SFP) module. The twisted pair gigabit module is
shown in the preceding figure. These slots always operate at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full
duplex when fitted with the SFP module.

Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Cascade


Figure G-66 shows a fiber-optic cascaded network with Cisco 3750 switches. Gigabit fiber-
optic small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules are used in this network.

314
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-66: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Cascade with Cisco 3750 Switches

Operator stations Operator stations

5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7 5 Cisco Catalyst 1.7


Switch 1 3750-24TS Switch 4 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750
Catalyst 3750

6 Cisco
4 4 6
Gigabit Cisco
Controllers Controllers
Fiber Optic Gigabit
2 SFP Module Fiber Optic
2
Management SFP Modules
Operator ProPLUS station
stations station 8

5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7 5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7


Switch 2 5 3750-24TS Switch 5 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750

Catalyst 3750

4 6 Cisco Cisco
4 6
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Fiber Optic Fiber Optic
2 3 SFP Modules 2 3 SFP Modules

Operator stations Operator stations

5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7 5 Cisco Catalyst 1,7


Switch 3 3750-24TS Switch 6 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750 Catalyst 3750

4 6 Cisco 4 6 Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Fiber Optic Fiber Optic
3 SFP Modules 2 3
2 SFP Module

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic trans-
ceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber and
the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic spli-
ces, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP slots
and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.

2 Each SFP transceiver module has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type du-
plex fiber-optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The
fiber-optic switch-to-switch connection is a crossover where the transmit on one
end is connected to the receive on the other end.

3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, a 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9 micron fiber can be
used.

315
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex

7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

Related information

Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 3750


Switches
Figure G-67 shows a fiber-optic network star with Cisco 3750 switches. Gigabit fiber-optic
small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules are used in this network.

316
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-67: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 3750 Switches
Central Area of Network Star
Operator ProPLUS Management Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7
stations station station 8 Catalyst 3750

Stacking
cable (rear)
1,7 Switch 5 4 6
5 5 5 Cisco
Catalyst 3750
2 Gigabit
Fiber Optic
Controllers SFP Module
Switch 2 6 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS
Operator
Cisco Catalyst 3750G-12S 9 3
stations
Catalyst 3750

Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7


Switch 1 1,7 Cisco Catalyst 3750

Gigabit
Fiber Optic
2 Switch 6 6 5 4
SFP Modules
Cisco
3 Gigabit
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7 Fiber Optic
Controllers SFP Modules
2
Catalyst 3750
Operator stations
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7
Switch 3 5 4 6
Cisco Catalyst 3750

Gigabit
Fiber Optic 3 Switch 7
Controllers 2 5 4 6
Operator stations SFP Module
Cisco
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7 2 Gigabit
Fiber Optic
Catalyst 3750 Controllers SFP Module
Operator stations

Switch 4 5 4 6 Remote Leg of Star with Additional Switch 3


Daisy-chained
Cisco
Gigabit
2 Fiber Optic
Controllers SFP Module
Operator stations
Typical Remote Leg of Star

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic trans-
ceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber and
the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic spli-
ces, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP slots
and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.

2 Each SFP transceiver module has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type du-
plex fiber-optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The
fiber-optic switch-to-switch connection is a crossover where the transmit on one
end is connected to the receive on the other end.

317
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, a 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9 micron fiber can be
used.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex

7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

9 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with
one IP address.

Related information

Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station

100Mb Fiber-Optic Star


Figure G-68 shows a 100Mbit Fiber-Optic Star with Cisco 2950C and 3750 Switches.

318
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-68: 100Mb Fiber-Optic Star with Cisco 2950C and 3750 Switches
Central Area of Network Star
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24 3 8
Operator ProPLUS Management
stations station station 9
Stacking
cable (rear)
10 Switch 5 5 7
6 6 6

Catalyst 3750
4
Controllers
Switch 2 7 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1 8 Operator
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24FS stations
Catalyst 3750

Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24 3 8

Switch 1 2 1 8

Switch 6 5 7
3 8 6
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24

4
Controllers
Switch 3 6 5 7 Operator stations
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24 3 8
4

Controllers
Operator stations
3 8 Switch 7 6 5 7
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24

Switch 4 Controllers
6 5 7 Operator stations

4 Remote Leg of Star with Additional Switch


Daisy-chained
Controllers
Operator stations
Typical Remote Leg of Star

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots (not used in the preceding image ) can be fitted with any combination
of the SX or LH fiber-optic transceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550
meters of Multimode Fiber and the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Sin-
gle Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic splices, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these
overall distances. The SFP slots and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full du-
plex only.

319
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

2 All MTRJ fiber-optic ports on this switch have been preconfigured by Emerson Proc-
ess Management to 100BASE-FX full duplex operation in order to meet the most
typical network configuration requirements. It is good practice to check each port's
duplex setting before connecting to them since it is also possible to configure each
of these ports to half duplex operation. Half duplex operation is not recommended
for switch-to-switch connections. Check both ends of the link and ensure that they
are both configured to full duplex operation or a duplex mismatch, which can cause
serious communications problems, could occur.

3 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex opera-
tion. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that all devices attached
to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex operation before
making the connection.

4 2 km (max) full duplex Mulimode Fiber with MTRJ connectors.

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

6 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online for infor-
mation. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for switches on
DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management informa-
tion. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

9 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.

10 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with
one IP address.

Related information

Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
The Management Station
Connecting the Management Station
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses

320
Control Network Specifications

100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network


Figure G-69 shows a 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 switches.

Figure G-69: 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station

4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch

7 7
3 3

Controllers Controllers
Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station
5,6
4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch

7 7
3 3

1,2 1,2
Controllers Controllers
Operator station
Operator station

4
Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 4 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch

7 3
3 7 8

Controllers Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

321
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network.

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 The Cisco 2960-8TC-L is equipped with one gigabit port either as a RJ45 or a SFP
slot. The SFP slot requires a fiber-optic or twisted pair small form factor pluggable
(SFP) module. This slot operates at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted with
the gigabit SFP module. If fitted with a 100BASE-FX SFP module (GLC-FE-100FX) it
operates at 100Mbit. This port is not used in this example.

Related information

Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses

Gigabit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network


Figure G-70 shows a gigabit twisted pair cascaded network with Cisco 2960 switches.

322
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-70: Gigabit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station

4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch

7 7
3 3

Controllers Controllers
Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station

5,6
4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch

7 7
3 3

1,2 1,2
Controllers Controllers
Operator station
Operator station

4
Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 4 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch

7 3
3 7 8

Controllers Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

323
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the information in the related topics before connecting the station to the DeltaV
Control Network. before

7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

8 The Cisco 2960-8TC-L is equipped with one gigabit port either as a RJ45 or a SFP
slot. The SFP slot requires a fiber-optic or twisted pair small form factor pluggable
(SFP) module. This slot operates at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted with
the gigabit SFP module. If fitted with a 100BASE-FX SFP module (GLC-FE-100FX) it
operates at 100Mbit. This port is not used in this example.

Related information

Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses

Gigabit Fiber-Optic Cascaded Network


Figure G-71 shows a gigabit fiber-optic cascaded network with Cisco 2960 switches.

324
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-71: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station

5 5
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
6 6
2960-24TC-L Switch 2960-24TC-L Switch

4 4

Controllers 1,2,9 Controllers 1,2,9

Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station
7,8
5 5
Cisco Catalyst 6 Cisco Catalyst
6
2960-48TC-L Switch 2960-24TC-L Switch

4 4

1,2,9 1,2,9
Controllers Controllers
2,3 2,3
Operator station
Operator station

5
6 Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TC-L Switch 5 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch

1,2,10
4 6
4 Cisco
GLC-FE-100FX
SFP Module
1,2,9
Controllers Controllers

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic trans-
ceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber and
the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic spli-
ces, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP slots
and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.

2 Each SFP transceiver has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type duplex fiber-
optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The fiber-optic
switch-to-switch connector is a crossover cable where the transmit on one end is
connected to the receive on the other end.

325
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9/125 micron fiber can
be used.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management information.
A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

9 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX


SFP module in the Cisco 2960-24TC-L and the Cisco 2960-48TC-L switches.

10 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-FE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP
module in the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.

Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star


Figure G-72 shows a gigabit fiber-optic network star with Cisco 2960 and 3750 switches.

326
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-72: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 2960 Switches

Operator station Operator station

Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst


5 5
2960-48TC-L Switch 2960-48TC-L Switch

1,2,9
Controllers 6 Controllers 6
4 4

1,2,9

ProPLUS Application Switch Mgt.


station station station
7,8
CENTER AREA
OF THE STAR
5
Cisco
Catalyst
3750-24TS
Switch
11 Cisco
Catalyst
3750G-12S
Switch

1,2,9,10 1,2,9,10

Operator station
Operator station
2,3
5 Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TC-L Switch Cisco Catalyst
5 2960-8TC-L Switch

4
1,2,9

Controllers Controllers Cisco


6 6
4 GLC-FE-100FX
SFP Module
1,2,10

Callout Description

1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic trans-
ceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber and
the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic spli-
ces, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP slots
and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.

2 Each SFP transceiver has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type duplex fiber-
optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The fiber-optic
switch-to-switch connector is a crossover cable where the transmit on one end is
connected to the receive on the other end.

327
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9/125 micron fiber can
be used.

4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management information.
A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

9 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX


SFP module in the Cisco 3750G-12S and the Cisco 2960-24TC-L switches.

10 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX


SFP module in the Cisco 3750G-12S switch and a GLC-FE-100FX SFP module in the
Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.

11 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with
one IP address.

Related information

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies


Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

100Mbit Fiber-Optic Network Star


Figure G-73 shows a 100Mbit fiber-optic network star with Cisco 2960 and 2950 switches.

328
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-73: 100Mbit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 2950 and 2960 Switches

Operator station

Cisco Catalyst
2
2950C Switch

1
3

Switch
Controllers
ProPLUS Application Management
station station station
4,5

2 Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TC-L Switch 100BASE FX
Fiber

2 Cisco
Operator station GLC-GE-100FX
SFP Modules

2 Cisco Catalyst
2950C Switch
100BASE FX
Fiber
NOTE:
7 Only the GLC-GE-100 FX
1 100BASE FX SFP module can be
used in the Cisco 2960-48TC-L switch.

Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on either switch and not on the PC.

329
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

4 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

5 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for inforamtion before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management. A dedicated
non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-48TC-L switch.

7 The 100BASE-FX fiber-optic link has duplex LC connectors at the GLC-GE-100FX SFP
and RTMJ connectors at the Cisco 2950C switch.

Related information

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies


Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

100Mbit Multimode Fiber-Optic Network


Figure G-74 shows a 100Mbit multimode fiber-optic network with Cisco 2950 and 2960
switches.

330
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-74: 100Mbit Multimode Fiber-Optic Network with Cisco 2950 and 2960
Switches
Operator station Operator station

2
2 Cisco Catalyst
3
Cisco Catalyst 3 2960-8TC-L Switch
2960-24TC-L Switch

1
Cisco
6 GLC-FE-100FX
Cisco SFP Module
GLC-GE-100FX
1 SFP Module 7
Controllers
Controllers
NOTE:
NOTE: Only the GLC-FE-100 FX
Only the GLC-GE-100 FX 8 100BASE FX SFP module can be
100BASE FX SFP module can be used in the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.
used in the Cisco 2960-24TC-L switch.

Switch
Operator ProPlus management
station station station
100BASE FX
4,5 Fiber

2
Cisco Catalyst
3 2950C Switch

Controllers

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .

2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on either switch and not on the PC.

331
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.

4 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

5 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management. A dedicated
non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.

6 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-24TC-L switch.

7 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-FE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.

8 The 100BASE-FX fiber-optic link has duplex LC connectors on all SFP modules and
MTRJ connectors on the Cisco 2950C switch.

Related information

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies


Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
Connecting the Management Station
The Management Station

Example Networks with DeltaV Smart Switches


The following set of network drawings provide examples of more complex networks that
use DeltaV Smart Switches in 10/100Mbit twisted pair and fiber-optic segments. These
examples are intended to help you visualize some of the possibilities for control network
expansion and growth. Each example contains a network drawing with callouts and a table
that explains each callout.

DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network with a


Twisted Pair Uplink
Figure G-75 shows DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with a
twisted pair uplink.

332
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-75: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Switches in Twisted Pair Network with Twisted
Pair Uplink
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

7 8 7 8

1,2,12 To additional 1,2,12 To additional


FP20 switch FP20 switch

3,12

11
FP20-6TX2TX
10 11 10
Primary Secondary

Shield To additional Shield


Ground 8,6 Ground 8,6
1,2,12 FP20 switch
5 5
To additional
FP20 switch
1,2,12

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

333
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build


this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and
an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet shiel-
ded connectors.

6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have 8 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair ports and any
number of them can be used for uplinks to other switches. Other uplink port types
are available in fixed hardware configurations. SFP ports are not available on this
switch and this switch has no gigabit capable ports.

7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any combina-
tion of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the available SFP
transceivers.

8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software com-
mand from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the switch. If
additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused ports after
the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV station is re-
quired to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.

9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.

11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

12 This is a 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair link.

Related information

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies


Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules

334
Control Network Specifications

DeltaV Smart Switches in Twisted Pair Network with SFP


and Fiber-Optic Uplinks
Figure G-76shows DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches in a twisted pair network with
SFP and fiber-optic uplinks.

Figure G-76: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Twisted Pair Network with SFP and Fiber-Optic
Uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,13

To additional
RM100 switch 3,13

9,12 9,12 To additional


RM100 switch
RM100 Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5 7
RM100-EM-8TX Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7 RM100
Primary Secondary
FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1.2

8 7 8
7

1,2,13 14 1,2,13 14
To additional To additional
FP20 switch FP20 switch

6 6 3,13

11
FP20 FP20
11
10 10
Primary Secondary
To additional To additional
FP20 switch FP20 switch

8 Shield 5 8
Shield 5
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,13
Redundant 3,13
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

335
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build


this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and
an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet shiel-
ded connectors.

6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have two 100Mbit/sec full duplex multimode fiber-
optic uplink ports. Other uplink port types are available in fixed hardware configura-
tions. SFP ports are not available on this switch and this switch has no gigabit capa-
ble ports.

7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any combina-
tion of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the available SFP
transceivers.

8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software com-
mand from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the switch. If
additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused ports after
the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV station is re-
quired to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.

9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.

11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

336
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

12 In this example, an SFP transceiver is used for the connection to the next switch. The
SFP module type must be matched to the type of fiber-optic cable that is installed.
Single mode and multimode fiber-optic cable in various core/cladding diameters
which contribute to the overall distance limit, can be used with specific SFP mod-
ules.

13 This is a 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair link.

14 This is a 100Mbit/sec full duplex multimode fiber-optic link. Distances up to 5 km


can be achieved depending upon the fiber-optic port option ordered and the num-
ber of intermediate splices and patch panels used.

Related information

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies


Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules

DeltaV Smart Switches with Fiber and Twisted Pair


Uplinks
Figure G-77 shows DeltaV RM100 Smart Switches with single mode fiber-optic uplinks and
FP20 switches with single mode fiber-optic and twisted pair uplinks.

337
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-77: RM100s with Fiber Uplinks and FP20s with Fiber and Twisted Pair
Uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus

4,12

Network Switch RM100 1.1


2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
RM100 Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
Network Switch RM100

1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
RM100
FAULT
RUN
LOCK
P
USB
V.24

Primary FAULT
RUN
LOCK
P
USB
V.24

Secondary
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1.2 1.2

7,9 8,12 Primary FP20 7,9 8


6 Secondary FP20 6
Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB

To additional
V.24

13 13 To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

6
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

To additional
USB
V.24

To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

1,2,12 5 6

6 1,2,12
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB

To additional
V.24

To additional V.24

FP20 switch
1 2
DA

FP20 switch
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

6
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

LS DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
8 Network Switch
FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT

0V 0V +24V(P2)

8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK

USB
V.24

V.24

1 2
DA
2

LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2

5 6 LS 3 4

5 6

11 Ground
Shield
11 Ground
Shield
5
Network Switch FAULT Network Switch FAULT

FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2) FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)

LS

1
DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
1,2,12 LS

1
DA

RUN
P FAULT
LOCK

5
USB USB

V.24
10 V.24 10
1 2 1 2
DA DA

8
2 2

LS 3 4 LS 3 4

5 6 5 6

8 3
1,2,12

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

338
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build


this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and
an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet shiel-
ded connectors.

6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have one 100Mbit/sec full duplex single mode fiber-
optic uplink ports. Other uplink port types are available in fixed hardware configura-
tions. SFP ports are not available on this switch and this switch has no gigabit capa-
ble ports.

7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any combina-
tion of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the available SFP
transceivers.

8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software com-
mand from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the switch. If
additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused ports after
the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV station is re-
quired to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.

9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.

11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.

12 This is a 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair link.

339
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

13 This is a 100Mbit/sec full duplex single mode fiber-optic link. Distances up to 40 km


can be achieved depending upon the fiber-optic port option ordered and the num-
ber of intermediate splices and patch panels used.

Related information

Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies


Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules

DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network


The following two images show DeltaV RM100, FP20, and MD30 Smart Switches in a
twisted pair network. There can be no more than six switches in series between any two
devices in any path in this type of network.

Figure G-78: DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network, Example 1


DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

8 8
7 7
10,11 Primary 10,11 Secondary
MD30 Switch MD30 Switch
1,2,6,8 1,2,6,8

8 8
5 5
Shield Shield
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
Controllers
with Redundant
Network

340
Control Network Specifications

The following figure shows a maximum of four switches in series between two devices

Figure G-79: DeltaV Smart Switches in a Twisted Pair Network, Example 2


DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers

4,12

To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch

1,2,9
1,2,9

RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary

7 8 7 8
FP20 FP20
Switch Switch

1,2 1,2,6,8 1,2


1,2,6,8

10,11 Primary 10,11 Secondary


MD30 Switch MD30 Switch

8 8
5 5
Shield Shield
Ground Ground

DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
1,2 Controllers 1,2
with Redundant
Network

Callout Description

1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.

2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.

341
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

4 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. To prevent ground loops, build


this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and
an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector
end of this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet shiel-
ded connectors.

6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the optional modules
chosen. In this example, all MD30 switches have a gigabit module installed on the
left side of the switch that used for the uplink to the RM100 switch. This module
contains two, 10/100/1000 twisted pair ports and two gigabit SFP slots for various
types of optional SFP transceivers. Only two ports on this module can be used simul-
taneously in any mix. The SFP transceivers are available in singlemode and multi-
mode fiber-optic versions. Each of the remaining six port modules on the right side
of the switch have four 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair ports for a total of 24 ports and
any combination of ports can be used for 10/100Mbit/sec uplinks to other switches
or for edge devices such as workstations and controllers.Other modules are availa-
ble in 100Mbit/sec only communications in single and multimode fiber-optic ver-
sions.

7 The type of uplink ports on this switch consists of two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec
ports and two SFP ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP
transceivers for long distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a
time in any combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information
for the available SFP transceivers.

8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software com-
mand from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the switch. If
additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused ports after
the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV station is re-
quired to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.

9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.

342
Control Network Specifications

Callout Description

10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.

11 The power connector (not shown) is used for a +24VDC power supply input and re-
lay contacts.

12 This is a 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair link.

Related information

Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules


Building Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies

DeltaV Controller Firewall


The DeltaV Controller Firewall is designed to protect DeltaV controllers from Denial of
Service (DoS) attacks originating from DeltaV workstations or other computers on the
DeltaV Control Network.

Important
The DeltaV system requires a specific hardware and software version of the firewall and a special
firewall configuration that includes the packet inspection rules and packet rate limits that have been
tested with the DeltaV system. DeltaV Controller Firewalls ordered from Emerson Process
Management are shipped with the supported software and are pre-configured to operate properly
with the DeltaV system. To ensure that you have the proper firewall configuration and the correct
hardware and software versions, you must purchase the firewall through normal Emerson channels.

Refer to Figure G-80. A detachable screw terminal block is used to supply the required 24
VDC system power to the DeltaV Controller Firewall. The DeltaV Controller Firewall is
installed close to the controllers on the DIN rail and can use the same system power supply
as the controllers. To more tightly control physical access to the firewall, it can be installed
on a DIN rail with a 24 VDC power supply in the equipment room. A set of normally closed,
potential-free relay contacts, also supplied on the detachable terminal block, monitor
proper device functioning.

The ground screw connects to an instrumentation ground to provide a shield ground for
the controller and firewall communications cables.

The 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet port labeled Workstations is for DeltaV workstations only.
Typically, the workstations are connected to a managed switch such as the Cisco 2950
series or Cisco 3750 series managed switches and the switch is connected to the firewall's
workstation port. The 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet port labeled Controllers is for DeltaV
controllers only. Typically, the controllers are connected to a managed switch such as the
Cisco 2950 series or Cisco 3750 series or the Hirschmann managed rail switch and the
switch is connected to the firewall's controller port. For controllers that are distributed
over wider geographic areas, consider using a firewall on a one-to-one basis with each
controller. This is a more secure arrangement because it eliminates the possibility of open
switch ports on the controller side.

343
Control Network Specifications

Table G-25: DeltaV Controller Firewall Specifications

Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC
Input current 400 mA (max)
Twisted pair ports: Controller (protected) and 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet
Workstation (unprotected)
Cable type Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP)
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Configurable to Opened if:
Redundant power supply fails
Cables on either or both ports are discon-
nected
Internal fault occurs
Self-Test failure occurs
Controllers supported 8
If more than 8 controllers require firewall pro-
tection, add more firewalls in parallel to share
the communications load.
Workstations supported All combinations of workstations up to normal
DeltaV limits for workstations. Refer to the Sys-
tem Capacities table in Books Online for com-
plete information on workstation limits.
Mounting DIN rail. The firewall can be mounted on the
same DIN rail as the controller.

344
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-80: DeltaV Controller Firewall

Controller Firewall
Power/
Relay
connectors
P1 2 FAULT Status LEDs
LS/DA STATUS
1 2 V.24
R Reset button

Controllers
Controller port

Workstation
port
Workstations
FAULT
+24V (P1)

+24V (P2)

Serial port
0V
0V

(not used)

V.24

Ground screw

The DeltaV Controller Firewall must be installed on the Primary and Secondary Control
Networks to provide protection on both access ports of the controllers. Among the things
to consider when determining the best location in which to install the DeltaV Controller
Firewall are:

Power and grounding requirements


Cable shielding requirements
Securing access to the firewall

Note
Do not connect a workstation to the controller side of the firewall and do not connect a controller to
the workstation side of the firewall. Incorrect connections will completely bypass firewall protection
for controllers.

Refer to DeltaV Controller Firewall Network Examples for examples of how the DeltaV
Controller Firewall can be used in a Control Network.

345
Control Network Specifications

The DeltaV Controller Firewall can be managed from a Management station. Refer to the
Managing the DeltaV Controller Firewall topic in DeltaV Books Online.

Related information

Connecting the Management Station


The Management Station

DeltaV Controller Firewall Network Examples


The following four network drawings show examples of how the DeltaV Controller Firewall
can be used in Control Networks. In all figures, Firewall refers to the DeltaV Controller
Firewall. The examples begin with simple networks and end with more complex networks.

DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and


Switches
Figure G-81shows DeltaV Controller Firewalls in a network with single controllers and three
port switches.

Figure G-81: DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and Switches
Building A Building B

Protected side Protected side


1 Switch P
LSDA
1 2 V24
Default
Fault
Status
P
LSDA
1 2 V24
Default
Fault
Status P
LSDA
1 2 V24
Default
Fault
Status
P
LSDA
1 2 V24
Default
Fault
Status

Controllers Controllers
Controllers Controllers

Workstations Workstations
Workstations Workstations

IP Address IP Address
IP Address IP Address
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
OV

OV

OV

OV
V.24

Firewall Switch V.24

Firewall Switch V.24

Firewall Switch V.24

Firewall
5
6
2

3 Rack room
Primary switch Secondary switch

Operator stations ProPLUS station


3
P1
LSDA
1

Controllers
2

2 V24
Default
Fault
Status Switch Switch P1
LSDA
1

Controllers
2

2 V24
Fault

Default
Status

Workstations
Workstations
IP Address
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

IP Address
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

Firewall Firewall
Protected
side

Building C

346
Control Network Specifications

The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.

1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the con-
troller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are float-
ing and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is
connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connec-
tor on both ends.

2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the firewall
port.

3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the fire-
wall port.

4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the
workstation.

5 On the mini-switch, attach a separate ground wire to the terminal block screw that
is labeled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumenta-
tion ground.

6 On the firewall, attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is la-
beled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation
ground.

347
Control Network Specifications

DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and the


Single Port Fiber Switch

Figure G-82: DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and the Single Port
Fiber Switch
Building A Building B

Protected side Protected side


1
Port 3 P Fault
Fault
LSDA Status P
Power LSDA Status
P Fault Error 1 2 V24 Port 3
Default 1 2 V24
Port 3 LSDA Status Power Default
1 2 V24 Fault Error
Power Default P
Error Port 1 Port 4 Controllers
LSDA Status
1 2 V24 Controllers
Port 3 Default
Controllers Port 1 Port 4
Port 1 Port 4 Power
Error
Controllers
Port 2 Port 5

Workstations
Port 1 Port 4 Port 2 Port 5
Port 2 Port 5 Workstations
Workstations IP Address
IP Address

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
IP Address Workstations
Port 2 Port 5
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

OV

OV
IP Address
OV

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
V.24
V.24

Switch Firewall Firewall

OV
V.24

V.24

Firewall Firewall

6
2
3
Primary switch Rack room 4 Secondary switch

3 Operator stations ProPLUS station


P1 2 Fault
2 Fault LSDA Status
P1 1 2 V24
LSDA Status Port 3 Default
1 2 V24 Power
Default Port 3 Error
Power Controllers
Error
Controllers
Port 1 Port 4
Port 1 Port 4

Port 2 Port 5 Workstations


Workstations
Port 2 Port 5 IP Address

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
IP Address
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

Firewall Firewall
Protected side

Building C

The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.

1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the con-
troller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are float-
ing and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is
connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connec-
tor on both ends.

2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the firewall
port.

348
Control Network Specifications

3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the fire-
wall port.

4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the
workstation.

5 On the mini-switch, attach a separate ground wire to the terminal block screw that
is labeled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumenta-
tion ground.

6 On the firewall, attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is la-
beled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation
ground.

DeltaV Controller Firewall with Multiple Controllers


A firewall supports a maximum of eight controllers.

349
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-83: DeltaV Controller Firewall with Eight Controllers

1 01 05

02 06

03 07

04 08
2

Firewall P1
LSDA
1
2

2 V24
Default
Fault
Status
P1
LSDA
1
2

2 V24
Default
Fault
Status

Controllers Controllers

Workstations Workstations

3 IP Address IP Address

Firewall
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
Pri Sec
OV

OV
V.24 V.24

Switch Switch

5
Primary switch Secondary switch
Rack room

Operator stations ProPLUS station

The following figure shows DeltaV Controller Firewalls in a network with more than eight
controllers. Add firewalls to share the communications load if the number of controllers
requiring protection exceeds eight.

350
Control Network Specifications

Figure G-84: DeltaV Controller Firewall with more than Eight Controllers

01 05 09 13

02 06 10 14

03 07 11 15

04 08 12 16

P1 2 Fault P1 2 Fault P1 2 Fault P1 2 Fault


LSDA Status LSDA Status LSDA Status LSDA Status
1 2 V24 1 2 V24 1 2 V24 1 2 V24
Default Default Default Default

Controllers Controllers Controllers Controllers

Workstations Workstations Workstations Workstations

IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address

Pri Switch
+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)

+24 (p1)

+24 (p2)
Firewall Pri Firewall Sec Firewall
OV

OV

OV

OV
V.24 V.24 V.24 V.24

Switch Switch Firewall Sec Switch

Primary switch Secondary switch


Rack room

Operator stations ProPLUS station

The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.

1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the con-
troller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are float-
ing and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is
connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connec-
tor on both ends.

2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the firewall
port.

351
Control Network Specifications

3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the fire-
wall port.

4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the
workstation.

5 Attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is labeled with the
ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation ground.

The Management Station


A Management station is a qualified PC that can be user-installed with web-based
interfaces for DeltaV Smart Switches, management software for the DeltaV Controller
Firewall, and web-based switch management software for Cisco switches. A PC is qualified
when it has been certified for use with the DeltaV system. Any PC connected to the DeltaV
Control Network must follow the same hardware installation rules as DeltaV workstations
even if the PC is not installed with the DeltaV software. For example, the PC must use
Category 5 Screened 4 Twisted Pair Cable (ScTP) and cable lengths cannot exceed 100
meters (328 feet).

Qualified PCs for use as Management stations can be ordered from Emerson Process
Management; however, Emerson Process Management does not install the management
software. Users must install the management software on the Management station.
Switch management software and DeltaV Controller Firewall management software are
supported only on Management stations, not on DeltaV workstations.

If a Management station connected to the DeltaV Control Network is also connected to


another network for plant area access outside of the DeltaV system, it is imperative that
the Management station is properly maintained with the latest Microsoft security patches
and virus software. This ensures that the Management station does not become infected
with viruses that could affect the operation of the DeltaV control system equipment. Like
other DeltaV stations, the Management stations outside network connection, which is
usually a third NIC card in the PC, must be isolated via a router to other local area networks
and a firewall to the wide area network or internet. If you do not have the resources or
expertise to connect to the outside world using a properly configured router and firewall,
then do not attach the Management station to both the DeltaV Control Network and other
networks outside the DeltaV control system. This way, the Management station will have
the same protection as the ProfessionalPLUS and Operator Stations.

A TFTP server application can be installed on the Management station. A TFTP server can
be used to flash Ethernet switches or archive Ethernet switch configurations. Do not
confuse a Management station with a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
station that contains additional network management software. The Management station

352
Control Network Specifications

is a basic PC with a web browser that can access the switch or firewall using its IP address
and is capable of displaying graphics, switch network statistics, bar and line graphs, and
firewall logs.

To manage switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall, Java software must be installed on
the Management station. DeltaV workstations, including the Management station, that
are connected to a DeltaV Control Network should never make connections to the
Internet. To install Java on a Management station, you must download Java from the
Internet to a USB flash drive or other media on a computer that is not connected to the
DeltaV Control Network and then install Java from the USB flash drive to the Management
station. Refer to Downloading Java Software for use on a Management Station in DeltaV
Books Online for information on how to download Java from the Internet to a USB flash
drive.

Emerson Process Management cannot be responsible for the operation of a DeltaV system
if these requirements for a Management station are not strictly followed.

Connecting the Management Station


Connect the Management station to the Primary and Secondary Control Networks with
shielded twisted pair cable as shown in the figures in this chapter. This enables the
Management station to access any switch or DeltaV Controller Firewall on the network and
creates one central location for switch and/or firewall management.

Qualified Ethernet cables that are described in all DeltaV network figures in this Appendix
must be used to connect a Management station to the DeltaV Control Network. When
considering cable shielding, treat the Management station like a DeltaV device.

Additionally for switches, the Management station can be connected to the switch
through the Comm Port of the Management station and the Console Port of the
switch. The Console Port of the switch is a rear-facing port and is a low speed serial
connection. This port is used to set up the switch for telnet and web management and to
give the switch an IP address, name, and password protection. Once the switch has an IP
address, the serial port connection can be disconnected and the switch can be managed
from anywhere on the network using the Management stations web browser or telnet.
Optionally, the serial connection can be kept intact and the link can be used to observe
network statistics, configure ports, and save switch data to the Management station. The
disadvantage of serial port management is that the Management station must be
physically moved from switch to switch to make the physical connections to each switchs
Console port.

Managing Switches and the DeltaV Controller


Firewall
DeltaV Smart Switches, Cisco switches, and the DeltaV Controller Firewall can be managed
from the Management station to monitor general network health or for troubleshooting
purposes.

Refer to Books Online for information on:

353
Control Network Specifications

Using Telnet and Web-based switch management for DeltaV Smart Switches
Command line, Telnet, and Web-based switch management for Cisco switches
Configuring the Cisco 2950, 2950C, and 3550FX, 3750-24TS, 3750-24FS, and
3750G-12S switches for use with the DeltaV system
Managing the DeltaV Controller Firewall

Related information

Connecting the Management Station


The Management Station

Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses


The DeltaV system automatically assigns IP addresses to the ProfessionalPLUS, Operator
and Application stations, and Controllers. In addition, there are reserved IP addresses that
can be used on the DeltaV system for optional equipment. The first table shows the IP
addresses that are reserved for external Network Time Protocol Servers. The second table
shows the IP addresses that are reserved for switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall.
These tables can be copied and kept for your records. Be sure to read the important
information following the second table.

Note
If the Network Time Protocol Server is a DeltaV workstation, it is automatically assigned an IP
address.

Table G-26: Reserved IP Addresses for the Network Time Protocol Server

Primary Network Ethernet Reserva- Secondary Network Ethernet Reserva-


tions tions

Server Address Server Address


Primary NTP 10.4.128.1 Primary NTP 10.8.128.1
server server
Backup NTP 10.4.128.2 Backup NTP serv- 10.8.128.2
server er

Table G-27: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall

Secondary Ethernet Reserva-


Checklist Primary Ethernet Reservation tion

Pri. Sec. IP Address Device name IP Address Device name


10.4.128.16 10.8.128.16
10.4.128.17 10.8.128.17
10.4.128.18 10.8.128.18
10.4.128.19 10.8.128.19

354
Control Network Specifications

Table G-27: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall
(continued)

Secondary Ethernet Reserva-


Checklist Primary Ethernet Reservation tion

Pri. Sec. IP Address Device name IP Address Device name


10.4.128.20 10.8.128.20
10.4.128.21 10.8.128.21
10.4.128.22 10.8.128.22
10.4.128.23 10.8.128.23
10.4.128.24 10.8.128.24
10.4.128.25 10.8.128.25
10.4.128.26 10.8.128.26
10.4.128.27 10.8.128.27
10.4.128.28 10.8.128.28
10.4.128.29 10.8.128.29
10.4.128.30 10.8.128.30
10.4.128.31 10.8.128.31
10.4.128.32 10.8.128.32
10.4.128.33 10.8.128.33
10.4.128.34 10.8.128.34
10.4.128.35 10.8.128.35
10.4.128.36 10.8.128.36
10.4.128.37 10.8.128.37
10.4.128.38 10.8.128.38
10.4.128.39 10.8.128.39
10.4.128.40 10.8.128.40
10.4.128.41 10.8.128.41
10.4.128.42 10.8.128.42
10.4.128.43 10.8.128.43
10.4.128.44 10.8.128.44
10.4.128.45 10.8.128.45
10.4.128.46 10.8.128.46
10.4.128.47 10.8.128.47
10.5.128.16 10.9.128.16
10.5.128.17 10.9.128.17
10.5.128.18 10.9.128.18
10.5.128.19 10.9.128.19
10.5.128.20 10.9.128.20

355
Control Network Specifications

Table G-27: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall
(continued)

Secondary Ethernet Reserva-


Checklist Primary Ethernet Reservation tion

Pri. Sec. IP Address Device name IP Address Device name


10.5.128.21 10.9.128.21
10.5.128.22 10.9.128.22
10.5.128.23 10.9.128.23
10.5.128.24 10.9.128.24
10.5.128.25 10.9.128.25
10.5.128.26 10.9.128.26
10.5.128.27 10.9.128.27
10.5.128.28 10.9.128.28
10.5.128.29 10.9.128.29
10.5.128.30 10.9.128.30
10.5.128.31 10.9.128.31
10.5.128.32 10.9.128.32
10.5.128.33 10.9.128.33
10.5.128.34 10.9.128.34
10.5.128.35 10.9.128.35
10.5.128.36 10.9.128.36
10.5.128.37 10.9.128.37
10.5.128.38 10.9.128.38
10.5.128.39 10.9.128.39
10.5.128.40 10.9.128.40
10.5.128.41 10.9.128.41
10.5.128.42 10.9.128.42
10.5.128.43 10.9.128.43
10.5.128.44 10.9.128.44
10.5.128.45 10.9.128.45
10.5.128.46 10.9.128.46
10.5.128.47 10.9.128.47

It is recommended that 10.4.128.17 and 10.8.128.17 be assigned to a TFTP server and/or


an Ethernet Management station. (A TFTP server and an Ethernet Management station can
be created on the same device.) A TFTP server can be used to flash Ethernet switches or
archive Ethernet switch configurations. Refer to Managing Cisco Switches in Books
Online for more information. It is recommended that the remaining addresses in this block
be assigned to the managed Ethernet switches.

356
Control Network Specifications

DeltaV Zones
DeltaV Zones is a combination of hardware and software for connecting separate DeltaV
systems or Zones. An Inter-Zone Server (IZS) must be installed in each DeltaV system to
implement zones. The Inter-Zone Servers are connected by an Inter-Zone Control Network
(IZCN). The only function of the Inter-Zone Servers and the Inter-Zone Control Network is
to communicate inter-zone operating data between systems. Refer to DeltaV Books
Online for complete information on implementing zones, zone-to-zone data
communication, and security considerations.

The following figure shows a simple Inter-Zone Control Network in which two DeltaV
systems are connected. It shows how the Inter-Zone Servers connect to the DeltaV
network and to each other.

Figure G-85: Simple Inter-Zone Control Network


1

Zone A
Operator
Inter-Zone ProPLUS Station A
Server A Station A

Inter-Zone
Control
Network

1
Primary 1
1

Secondary 1 1
Primary 1

1 Controller A
Secondary

1 Zone B
Inter-Zone ProPLUS
Server B Station B Operator
Station B
2

Primary
1
1 1
1
Controller B
Secondary

2 2

357
Control Network Specifications

1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.

2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controllers RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controllers DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.

1420 Wireless Gateway


The 1420 Wireless Gateway integrates signals from HART wireless devices into the DeltaV
system. Refer to the documentation that ships with the 1420 Wireless Gateway for
specifications and information on how to properly mount the Gateway and connect it to
the DeltaV system.

358
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

Appendix H
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Topics covered in this appendix:
Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power
Supplies
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC
Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC

Bulk power supplies supply power to the system or to field devices. Power to the system is
isolated from power to field devices. The following figure shows one method of providing
system power and bussed field power with Legacy Bulk Power Supplies.

Figure H-1: System Power and Bussed Field Power Example with Legacy Bulk Power
Supplies

You can use DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies, DeltaV Bulk Power Supplies, or third-party
bulk power supplies. There are three types of DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies:

Legacy Bulk AC to 24 VDC Power Supply (Panel and DIN-rail mounted) Accepts
120/230 VAC power and supplies 24 VDC power to field devices and System Power
Supplies (Dual DC/DC).

359
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

Legacy Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supply (Panel and DIN-rail mounted) Accepts
120/230 VAC power and supplies 12 VDC power to System Power Supplies (DC/DC)
and System Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC).
Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC Power Supply Accepts 24 VDC power and supplies
12 VDC power to System Power Supplies (DC/DC). This power supply is no longer
available from Emerson Process Management.

Note
Refer to the DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for information on the DeltaV
Bulk Power supplies.

Related information

System Power Guidelines

Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC


and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supplies
Specifications

Table H-1: Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 and AC to 12 VDC Power Supply
Specifications

Item Specification
AC input Current 120/230 VAC nominal, 90 VAC to 264 VAC
range, 47 Hz to 63 Hz; single-phase
3.6 A for 12 VDC
4.5 A for 24 VDC
Output power rating 60C 24.6 VDC at 12.0 A
12.3 VDC at 12.0 A
Output power rating 70C 24.6 VDC at 9.0 A
12.3 VDC at 9.0 A
Inrush current 40/25 A maximum (hot/cold start)
Hold-up time 20 ms (from 90 to 264 VAC input)
Ripple and Noise 1% PK to PK max (Bandwidth 20 MHz)
Output overvoltage protection 110% - 120%
Power factor 0.98 at full rated load
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses.

Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.

360
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

Table H-1: Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 and AC to 12 VDC Power Supply
Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Alarm relay contact rating 30 VDC at 2.0 A, 250 VAC at 2.0 A
Redundancy output isolation diode Integrated in unit Isolation diode not required
Dimensions on horizontal DIN rail Height (max): 13.5 cm (5.3 in.)
Width (max): 24.0 cm (9.5 in.)
Depth (max): 10.6 cm (4.2 in.)

Connections

Table H-2: Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power
Supply Connectors

Connector Description
Input 120/230 VAC
AC+ AC line
AC - AC neutral
Ground
Output 24 VDC
ENA Output Enable (Wire from ENA to ENA RTN is
connected at the factory)
V OUT DC Voltage Output (+)
V OUT DC Voltage Output (+)
RTN DC Voltage Return (-)
RTN DC Voltage Return (-)
SHARE Connection required for redundancy and load-
sharing applications
ENA RTN Output Enable Return (wire from ENA to ENA
RTN is connected at the factory)
Alarm contacts 250 VAC, 30 VDC
RELAY + Relay contacts +
RELAY - Relay contacts -

361
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

Images

Figure H-2: Top View Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
24 cm (9.5 in.)

10.6 cm
(4.2 in.)

ENA RTN
SHARE
V OUT
V OUT
RTN
RTN
ENA
AC+

AC

Figure H-3: Front View Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply

24 cm (9.5 in.)

AC OK

DC OK

MAGNETEK

13.5 cm 12V 12A

(5.3 in.)

362
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and


Bulk AC to 12 VDC
Specifications

Table H-3: Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC

Item Specification
AC input 120/230 VAC nominal, 90 VAC to 264 VAC
range, 47 Hz to 63 Hz, single-phase
Output rating 24 VDC at 12.5 A 12 VDC at 25 A
DC output power options 300 W at 60C
Input 5A
Inrush current 100/40 A maximum (hot/cold start )
Hold-up time 20 ms (from 90 to 264 VAC input)
Ripple and Noise 1% PK to PK max (Bandwidth 20 MHz)
Output overvoltage protection 125% (5%)
Power factor 0.98 at full rated load
Fuse protection 15 A, 250 VAC 3AB or equivalent, non-replacea-
ble fuses.

Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.

Dimensions with mounting plate Height: 12.70 cm (5 in.)


Width: 39.37 cm (15.5 in.)
Depth: 6.35 cm (2.5 in.)

363
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

Images

Figure H-4: Top View, Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
39.37 cm (15.5 in.)
1.27 cm 1.90 cm (0.75 in.)
(0.5 in.) 3.17 cm (1.25 in.)

DC Output
bus bar
connections
12.70 cm
Slotted (5.0 in.)
mounting
holes

1.27 cm 1.09 cm (0.43 in.)


(0.5 in.)
Fan Mounting
holes

Figure H-5: End View, Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
12.70 cm
1 (5.0 in.)

6.35 cm 2
(2.5 in.)

1. DC Output bus bar connections


2. AC input terminals

364
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC


Specifications

Table H-4: Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC specifications

Item Specification
DC input voltage 24 VDC nominal (30 VDC maximum)
Output rating 12 VDC at 25 A
DC output power options 300 W at 60C and altitude < 914 m (3000 ft)
Power requirement 20 A
Inrush current 25 A/peak (cold start)
Hold-up time 20 ms after loss of nominal DC input voltage for
specified load regulation
Fuse protection GMA-15, 15 A/125 V, non-replaceable fuses

Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.

Dimensions Height: 12.70 cm (5 in.)


Depth: 30.50 cm (12 in.)
Width: 6.35 cm (2.5 in.)
Weight 1.6 kg (3.5 lb)

365
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

366
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines

Appendix I
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
Topics covered in this appendix:
Selecting an Enclosure
Power Dissipation Considerations
Example Enclosure Selection Calculations

This appendix explains how to select an enclosure and provides power dissipation
information.

Note
All enclosures must conform to applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. In addition,
when designing enclosures for the European Union you must ensure that the appropriate EU
Directives have been considered as required (for example, 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive and
89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility, with amendments)

Selecting an Enclosure
To choose an enclosure for your DeltaV system, consider the following items:

System environment
Wire management
Heat dissipation

You can choose from a wide variety of suitable enclosures to protect your system from
adverse environmental conditions. The enclosures range from simple sheet metal boxes to
NEMA 4X-rated enclosures. Select the appropriate type for your specific application.

Figure I-1 and Figure I-2 show example arrangements for mounting your DeltaV system in a
horizontal enclosure. Figure I-3 shows an example arrangement for mounting your DeltaV
system in a vertical enclosure. These figures indicate areas available for wire management.
You can access wiring through gland plates or through conduited entries. The enclosure
supplier can help you select the proper arrangement for your application.

The enclosure must be designed to dissipate the heat generated within the enclosure
properly and to maintain an ambient temperature in the enclosure that is below the rated
temperature for any devices located in the enclosure. The information you need to
properly design the enclosure includes:

Maximum external ambient temperature for the application


Ambient rating of any equipment mounted in the cabinet
Power dissipation of each device

367
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines

The internal temperature of the enclosure cannot exceed the rated temperature for any
devices located in the enclosure.

Figure I-1: Enclosure Example #1

368
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines

Figure I-2: Enclosure Example #2

369
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines

Figure I-3: Enclosure Example #3

370
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines

Power Dissipation Considerations


The power dissipated within the enclosure generates heat. The enclosure supplier uses
power dissipation figures to determine the air flow requirements needed to maintain the
allowable heat rise. As the internal heat rise increases, the allowable external ambient
temperature decreases.

The power dissipation in an enclosure is dependent on the power requirements of the


enclosed equipment, including the:

Power required to operate devices in the enclosure


Field power dissipation within the cabinet
Power dissipated by the power supplies located in the enclosure

The following table lists maximum power dissipation for each DeltaV component. To
determine total power dissipation in an enclosure, sum the power requirements of all
components to be mounted within the enclosure.

Note
The power dissipation for each DC-powered discrete and analog device includes the loss of a power
supply which is 75% efficient. If the power supply is not included in the enclosure or a supply with a
different efficiency is used, adjust the dissipation accordingly.

Product Type Power


Controllers (MD, MD Plus, MX) 14 W
Remote Interface Unit 6.0 W
I/O Subsystem
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA 10.1 W
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 10.1 W
AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC 10.1 W
AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA 11.9 W
AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 11.9 W
AS-Interface 9.6 W
DeviceNet 11.4 W
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 3.6 W
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 2.9 W
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 3.4 W
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 3.4 W
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated 3.6 W
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact 3.6 W
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 5.7 W
DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated 6.1 W
DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, High Side 6.1 W

371
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines

Product Type Power


DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 4.9 W
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side 3.7 W + load dependent power dissipation (25
W maximum at 24 V)(1)
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 3.0 W + load dependent power dissipation (27
W maximum at 24 V)(2)
Fieldbus H1 card 10.2 W
Multifunction 8.2 W
Profibus DP 10.1 W
RTD, ohms 2.7 W
Sequence of Events 3.5 W
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 5.1 W
Thermocouple, mV 5.9 W
Series 2 I/O Cards
Series 2 AI, 4-20 mA with HART 8.4 W
Simplex/ Redundant 9.1 W (per card)
Series 2 AI, 16-channel, 4-20 mA HART (Sim- 12.7 W
plex)
Series 2 AO, 4-20 mA with HART 10.2 W
Simplex/ Redundant 10.2 W (per card)
Series 2 AS-Interface (Simplex) 9.6 W
Series 2 DeviceNet (Simplex) 11.4 W
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact 3.7 W (per card)
Simplex/ Redundant
Series 2 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact 5.7 W
(Simplex)
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 3.7 W (per card)
Simplex/ Redundant
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 3.0 W + load dependent power dissipation (27
(Simplex) W maximum at 24 V)(3)
Series 2 H1 6.1 W (per card)
Simplex/ Redundant
Series 2 Isolated Input (Simplex) 5.9 W
Series 2 Profibus (Simplex) 10.1 W

(1) Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is determined by the following equation: Supply
Voltage x Actual Load Current (8 channels) x [(1/Power Supply Efficiency) - 1] A typical value for eight channels driving a 24 V solenoid is
16.4 W.
(2) Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3.2 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is determined by the following equation: Supply
Voltage x Actual Load Current (32 channels) x [(1/Power Supply Efficiency) - 1]
(3) Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3.2 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is determined by the following equation: Supply
Voltage x Actual Load Current (32 channels) x [(1/Power Supply Efficiency) - 1]

372
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines

Product Type Power


Series 2 RTD, ohms (Simplex) 2.7 W
Series 2 Thermocouple (Simplex) 3.5 W
Series 2 Serial 5.1 W (per card)
Simplex/ Redundant
Intrinsically Safe I/O Cards
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20, mA, HART 9.8 W
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20, mA (and HART) 11.3 W
I.S. DI, 16-Channel 7.6 W
I.S. DO, 4-Channel 10.1 W
Power Supplies (4)
Legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk AC to 12 VDC 12 W
Power Supply
Legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC 12 W
Power Supply
Legacy Panel-mounted Bulk AC to 12 VDC Pow- 22 W
er Supply
Legacy Panel-mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC Pow- 22 W
er Supply
Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC Power Supply 14.5 W
System Power Supply (AC/DC) 4.4 W
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) 12 VDC Input: 2.0 W
24 VDC Input: 5.2 W
DeltaV SIS Components
Simplex Logic Solver 16.0 W
Redundant Logic Solvers 24.0 W
SISNet Repeaters 9.6 W (per Repeater)
Auxiliary Relay Modules, Energize to Actuate 4.65 W
and De-Energize to Actuate, 24 VDC
Auxiliary Relay Diode Module 2.25 W
Miscellaneous Components
Fieldbus H1 carrier 5.2 W(5)
Media Converter 5.1 W
Single Port Fiber Switch 8.2 W
Four Port Fiber Switch 8.4 W
I.S. LocalBus Isolator 1.2 W

(4) Refer to the DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for power dissipation for DeltaV Bulk Power Supplies.
(5) Does not include I/O card dissipation or 2.2 W power supply dissipation. (Assumes power supply is not in the same enclosure as the H1
carrier.)

373
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines

Product Type Power


I.S. System Power Supply 1.5 W

Example Enclosure Selection Calculations


Assume the system consists of the following components:

Quantity Product Type Power Dissipation


1 Controller (MD, MD Plus, MX) 14 W
1 AI, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART 10.1 W
1 AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA 11.9 W
1 DI, 8-channel, 24 VDC, isolated 3.6 W
1 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, high side (driving 8 sol- 3.7 W + 16.4 W
enoids)
2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, isolated 12.2 W
2 DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, isolated 6.8 W
1 System power supply (AC/DC) 4.4 W
1 Bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply 22 W
Total power 105.1 W

Assume ambient temperature is 35C. The DeltaV components are rated for an ambient
temperature of 60C. Therefore, the enclosure design temperature rise must be less than
60 - 35 = 25C with 105.1 W of heat dissipation within it.

If the surface area of the enclosure is insufficient to dissipate the heat, you can use cooling
options such as fans or blowers to improve heat dissipation.

Note
The actual temperature rise varies with layout, enclosure location, and other factors. If the
application is critical or if the exact conditions are undetermined, follow your standard corporate/
plant safety standards. Cabinet manufacturers recommend a safety margin of 25%.

374
System Power Guidelines

Appendix J
System Power Guidelines
Topics covered in this appendix:
System Power Supply (AC/DC)
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
Sizing the I.S. System Power Supply
Legacy Bulk Power Supplies for System Power
Sizing the Legacy Bulk Power Supply for Bussed Field Power and System Power
Using Multiple System Power Supplies
Using Multiple Legacy Bulk Power Supplies

This appendix contains important information about DeltaV system power. Refer to the
DeltaV Site Preparation Guide for additional information.

System Power Supply (AC/DC)


One System Power Supply (AC/DC) is sufficient for many small systems. The power supply
provides 1.25 A of LocalBus power, enough for:

8 discrete I/O cards

or
8 analog I/O cards

or
4 serial I/O cards

or
4 Series 2 H1 cards

Refer to the installation worksheets for complete information on calculating system power
for all I/O card combinations.

For systems that require additional power, use another System Power Supply (AC/DC) for
load sharing. For systems that require redundant power, connect a second System Power
Supply (AC/DC). Refer to Appendix N for power sizing calculations.

Other options for systems that require additional power are the System Power Supply
(Dual DC/DC) with a bulk power supply. These options do not require an additional two-
wide carrier and are good choices when future expansion is anticipated.

375
System Power Guidelines

Related information

Installation Worksheets

System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)


When it is operated on 12 VDC, the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is rated for a
maximum of 13 A of LocalBus power which is sufficient for most large DeltaV systems.

When it is operated on 24 VDC, the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is rated for a
maximum of 8 A (4.5 A for older models) of LocalBus power. For systems that require
additional power, use another System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC). For systems that
require redundant power, use a second System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC).

Sizing the I.S. System Power Supply


The I.S. System Power Supply accepts locally available 24 VDC (nominal) power and
converts it to 12 VDC for powering I.S. I/O cards. Each I.S. power supply is rated at 5 A and
can power from eight to fifteen cards depending upon the type and mix of cards. You can
have up to ten I.S. power supplies and add an additional power supply for redundancy.
(The total number of I.S. power supplies for a redundant system is eleven.) When using
multiple I.S. system power supplies, intersperse the power supplies among the cards.

Note
The I.S. Power Supply supplies 60 W and draws 80 W for 24 VDC bulk power supply calculations at
the rated load.

Legacy Bulk Power Supplies for System Power


The legacy bulk AC to 12 VDC and 24 VDC to 12 VDC power supplies provide 12 VDC
power to the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) for one or more controllers and their
associated I/O subsystems. However, if you are using the bulk power supply to provide
power for more than one DeltaV system or for other equipment, refer to the I/O card
specifications or use the simplified calculations in the installation worksheet to determine
if there is sufficient capacity.

Related information

I/O Cards
Installation Worksheets

376
System Power Guidelines

Sizing the Legacy Bulk Power Supply for Bussed


Field Power and System Power
The legacy bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply provides power to field devices and System
Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC). In general, AI cards, AO cards, and dry contact DI cards use
small amounts of current. Thus, the legacy bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply provides
enough power for approximately 40 of these types of I/O cards.

If you are supplying power to DO cards with high side switches, you must evaluate the
power requirements carefully. Refer to the manufacturers specifications for your field
devices to determine the load.

Using Multiple System Power Supplies


There are three reasons to use more than one power supply for a system application:

To provide load sharing if more than 100 percent of the output of a single supply is
required
To supply separate power supplies for redundant equipment
To provide a backup for one or more power supplies in a system

Do not use different product types in multiple system power supply applications. Use the
same product type with the same input voltage (12 VDC or 24 VDC) for either load sharing
applications or redundant applications that use multiple system power supplies.

Note
Your individual requirements for system availability determine where to provide redundancy in a
system. Corporate/plant standards or Hazardous Operations Procedures for your site often provide
guidelines.

The system power supplies provide OR-ing diodes to isolate faults on one supply from the
output provided by the other supply.

Different system constraints apply to each type of DeltaV Power Supply. The following
sections discuss considerations for each type of power supply.

System Power Supply (AC/DC)


The System Power Supply (AC/DC) converts AC input power to 12 VDC for the I/O
subsystem (I/O power is expressed as LocalBus power in the power calculation worksheets
in Appendix N). In addition, it converts some input power to supply the requirements of
the controller if it is mounted directly to the left of the controller or on the right slot of a
second 2-wide power/controller carrier.

Note
The left slot of the second 2-wide power/controller carrier will NOT provide power to the controller,
only to the I/O subsystem.

377
System Power Guidelines

Supplying System Power to the I/O

For some system sizes, I/O power requirements cannot be met by a single supply. In these
cases, you must use multiple supplies for load sharing. By adding a second system power
supply (or more) and additional carriers, you can increase the power available for the I/O.
You may need as many as four supplies for a full system of analog I/O cards.

For load sharing, mount the second supply in either slot of the second power/controller
carrier. Additional supplies mount to the left of the second supply or on a third power/
controller carrier, if needed. The following figure shows an example of four system power
supplies used for load sharing.

Figure J-1: System Power Supply Mounting for Load Sharing with a Simplex
Controller

Note
In an application requiring redundant power to the controller rather than load sharing, the second
system power supply in Figure J-1 would provide only 15 W to the I/O and 10 W to the controller.
Refer to Supplying Redundant System Power to the Controller. Refer also to Table J-1 for
information on LocalBus current provided to the I/O in various controller/power redundancy
situations.

378
System Power Guidelines

Extending System Power to the I/O

The LocalBus power is specified and limited to 8 A. Some cards consume up to 0.5 A of
system power each. Because of this, a system with several cards such as AS-Interface,
Profibus, DeviceNet, and Fieldbus cards can exceed the ratings.

The power can be extended by modifying the wiring associated with the LocalBus Extender
cable. For most applications, the wiring supplied by the factory is correct. However, when
the power must be extended, the black and red auxiliary wires should be removed from
the assembly (at both ends). Additional power can be supplied through the screw
terminals on the left extender. The screw terminals are marked HVCC + and -. Provide 12
VDC at these screw terminals.

Note
The 8-wide carriers must be left-aligned when using 1-wide extenders.

The following figure shows how to extend power using 1-wide extenders. Refer to OR-ing
Diodes for additional information on extending power.

Figure J-2: Extended Power Diagram


System
Power I/O Subsystem 1-wide

Supply Controller (2 8-wides) extender

12 VDC
Power
Supply

Isolated common
ground reference

Carrier shield bar

Dedicated plant
ground grid point

Carrier shield bar

Carriers must be left-aligned

379
System Power Guidelines

Supplying Redundant System Power to the Controller

To provide redundant power to the controller, install a secondary system power supply in
the right slot of the second power/controller carrier, as shown in the following figure. You
must mount the secondary supply in the right slot of the second carrier to provide power
to the controller.

Figure J-3: System Power Supply Mounting for Redundant Controller Power

If you require redundant power to the controller and additional system power supplies for
I/O load sharing, you must mount the secondary system power supply for the controller in
the right slot of the second carrier, as shown in Figure J-3.

LocalBus Current Provided to the I/O Based on Controller/Power Redundancy

The following table shows the LocalBus current provided to the I/O based on the number
of System Power Supplies (AC/DC) and the controller/power redundancy used in the
configuration.

380
System Power Guidelines

Table J-1: LocalBus Current Provided to the I/O

Controller/Power Redundancy

Number of System Simplex Controller Redundant Controller


Power Supplies (AC/ Simplex Controller and Redundant Pow- and Redundant Pow-
DC) and Simplex Power er er
1 1.25 A N/A N/A
2 3.35 A 1.25 A 1.25 A
3 5.45 A 3.35 A 2.50 A
4 7.55 A 5.45 A 4.6 A
5 9.65 A; current limited 7.55 A 6.7 A
to 8.0 A due to carrier
limitations
6 11.75 A; current limi- 9.65 A; current limited 8.8 A; current limited
ted to 8.0 A due to car- to 8.0 A due to carrier to 8.0 A due to carrier
rier limitations limitations limitations

Related information

Installation Worksheets
OR-ing Diodes

System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)


The System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) provides 12 VDC LocalBus power to the I/O
subsystem when it is operated on either 12 VDC or 24 VDC input power. In addition, it
converts some input power to supply the requirements of the controller if it is mounted
directly to the left of the controller or on the right slot of a second 2-wide power/controller
carrier.

Supplying System Power to the I/O

You can add a second system power supply to provide I/O power redundancy. The second
supply mounts in the right slot of the second 2-wide power/controller carrier, as shown in
the following figure. Power this supply from a separate bulk power supply to provide
power if the primary bulk supply fails.

381
System Power Guidelines

Figure J-4: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Mounting for Redundant Power

Supplying Redundant Power to the Controller

To provide redundant power to the controller, install a secondary system power supply in
the right slot of the second power/controller carrier, exactly as the system power supply
mounts as shown in the preceding image. You must mount the secondary supply in the
right slot to provide power to the controller.

The power conversion from 12 VDC is done inside of the system supply. Because of this,
you could decide that it is acceptable to supply power to both system supplies from a
single bulk supply if your application can support that single point of failure.

Using Multiple Legacy Bulk Power Supplies


The legacy Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC power supplies are available as both
DIN rail and panel-mounted units. Both types of power supplies can be used in redundant
systems and the legacy DIN rail-mounted supply can be used in systems requiring load
sharing as well as redundancy. The legacy DIN rail-mounted supply contains an integrated
OR-ing diode to isolate power supply faults. Refer to OR-ing Diodes for usage
information. The legacy panel-mounted power supply cannot be used in systems that
require load sharing.

382
System Power Guidelines

If you have redundant system power supplies, connect the redundant legacy DIN rail-
mounted Bulk AC to 12 VDC power supplies to different System Power Supplies (Dual
DC/DC) on each controller and I/O subsystem.

The legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply provides 24 VDC power to
field devices and System Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC). This power supply provides
enough power for approximately 40 AI, AO, and dry contact DI cards.

OR-ing Diodes
The legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies have an integrated OR-ing diode to
isolate power supply faults and are set at 12.3 or 24.6 VDC. If the legacy DIN rail-mounted
Bulk Power Supply is used in a system that requires redundancy or load sharing, connect
the SHARE terminals on the top of the power supplies to terminal strips or bus bars. One or
both of the VOUT (+) and RTN (-) connections must go to the same location.

Figure J-5: Connecting the Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk Power Supply for
Redundancy or Load Sharing

To terminal strips or
bus bars
+ +
share

AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

Connect one or both share


+ and - to the
same location +

+ +
share

AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

If the legacy panel-mounted Bulk Power Supply or a bulk power supply from another
manufacturer without OR-ing diodes is used in a system that requires redundant power,
use external OR-ing diodes (such as the Weidmuller USA #998786 dual rectifier diode
module) to isolate power supply faults. Because an external OR-ing diode has a nominal .7
V drop, the output of each supply must be adjusted to account for the drop or the voltage
to the carriers might be too low. The recommended adjustments, after the OR-ing diodes,
are:

12.3 VDC for a 12 VDC bulk power supply

383
System Power Guidelines

24.6 VDC for a 24 VDC bulk power supply

Verify these voltages with one bulk power supply disabled to ensure operation in a fault
condition.

Note
The system power supply shuts down if the input power exceeds 12.6 V. Do not adjust a 12 V bulk
power supply to more than 12.3 V at the input to the system power supply.

If additional 12 VDC power is required for a carrier, connect the primary and secondary
legacy bulk power supplies (model without integrated OR-ing diodes) through OR-ing
diodes with the output going only to the extender cable, not to the system power supplies
as shown in Figure J-8.

The following table shows the current provided to the system based on the number of
legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies (AC to 12 and 24 VDC) and whether simplex
or redundant power is used in the configuration. Figure J-6 shows the connections for four
DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies. A fifth supply can be connected in the same
manner for redundancy.

Table J-2: Bulk Power Provided to the System

Number of Bulk Power Sup-


plies (AC to 24 VDC and AC to System Current Provided by System Current Provided by
12 VDC) Simplex Power Redundant Power
1 12 A N/A
2 24 A 12 A
3 36 A 24 A
4 48 A 36 A
5 N/A 48 A

384
System Power Guidelines

Figure J-6: Connecting Multiple Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk Power Supplies
Terminal
strips or bus bars
+ +

share
AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply
share
+

+ +
AC+ AC VOUT RTN share

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

+ +
share

AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

+ +
share

AC+ AC VOUT RTN

Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply

Figure J-7shows power and grounding for an AC System Power Supply. Note that the 2-
wide carrier must be connected to the isolated common ground reference or to the DeltaV
instrumentation ground.

385
System Power Guidelines

Figure J-7: Power and Grounding for an AC System Power Supply

From AC G
power N 24 VDC
distribution L return (-)
+ + 24 VDC (+)
AC+ AC VOUT RTN

share
+
Bulk AC to 24 VDC
power supply
DC return ground

From AC L 24 VDC
power N return (-) Fuse block 1
distribution G Bussed field
power
connectors

DC
reference 8 DC cards
ground

8-Wide carrier

Carrier shield bar

LEGEND:
To isolated common ground reference L Line
or DeltaV instrumentation ground (DIG) Isolated local N Neutral
ground reference G Ground
Notes:
1. A fuse block and fuse are optional. If you are providing bussed-field power to several carriers from
one power supply, it is recommended that you fuse the line to each carrier.

Figure J-8 shows power and grounding for a 12 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC).
Note that the 2-wide carrier is not connected to ground because the legacy 12 VDC Bulk
Power Supplies are connected to the isolated common ground reference or to the DeltaV
instrumentation ground.

Figure J-8 also shows:

How to provide redundant 24 VDC bussed field power


The recommended method for connecting 12 VDC redundant bulk power supplies
to redundant system power supplies
How to extend 12 VDC bulk power to the carriers

Providing 24 VDC Bussed Field Power

In Figure J-8, the 24 VDC Bulk Power Supplies are connected together to provide the
redundant bussed field power. The OR-ing diodes are integrated into the power supply.

386
System Power Guidelines

Connecting 12 VDC Bulk Power to Redundant System Power Supplies

As shown in Figure J-8, the recommended method for connecting redundant bulk power
supplies to redundant system power supplies is to connect the primary bulk power supply
directly to the primary system power supply and to connect the secondary bulk power
supply directly to the secondary system power supply. Do not connect the bulk power
supplies together because a single high-voltage failure in either bulk power supply could
cause both system power supplies to reset which in turn causes both controllers to reset.
OR-ing diodes are not required in this situation.

Extending 12 VDC Bulk Power to the Carriers

Also shown in Figure J-8 are OR-ing diodes used for extending 12 VDC power to the carrier.
In this figure, OR-ing diodes are not integrated into the power supply. The primary and
secondary bulk power supplies are connected through OR-ing diodes with the output
going to the extender cable not to the system power supply.

Figure J-8: Power and Grounding for a 12 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)

AC+ AC + + AC+ AC + AC+ AC + + AC+ AC + +


VOUT RTN VOUT RTN VOUT RTN VOUT RTN
share

share

share

share
Bulk AC to 12 VDC Bulk AC to 12 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC
power supply power supply power supply power supply

+ +

8 DC cards 8 DC cards 24 VDC


2-Wide carrier bussed
field power
8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

8 DC cards 8 DC cards
1-Wide carrier
+ +
extender
8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

+
+ +

OR-ing diodes
(only required if not 8 DC cards 8 DC cards 24 VDC
integrated into power bussed
supply) field power
8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

DC reference +
ground

8 DC cards 8 DC cards

8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier

Carrier
To isolated common ground reference Isolated local shield bar
or DeltaV instrumentation ground (DIG) ground reference

387
System Power Guidelines

Figure J-9 shows power and grounding for a 24 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC). It
also shows connections for providing 24 VDC bussed field power. In Figure J-9. the bulk
power supplies are connected together to provide power to the system power supplies
and to provide bussed field power. The OR-ing diodes are integrated into the bulk power
supply. Note that in Figure J-9 the 2-wide carrier is connected to the isolated common
ground reference or to the DeltaV instrumentation ground.

Figure J-9: Power and Grounding for a 24 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
+
+
AC+ AC + + AC+ AC + +
VOUT RTN VOUT RTN

share

share
Bulk AC to 24 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC
power supply power supply
+

24 VDC bussed
field power
8 DC cards 8 DC cards
2-Wide carrier

8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier 1-Wide carrier


extender

DC
reference 8 DC cards 8 DC cards
ground

8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier


1-Wide
carrier
extender
Carrier
shield
bar

To isolated common ground reference


or DeltaV instrumentation ground (DIG) Isolated local
ground reference

388
Bussed Field Power Guidelines

Appendix K
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
Topics covered in this appendix:
Implementing Bussed Field Power for Applications using DI and DO Cards
Sizing R-C Snubbers

Many of the I/O cards use 24 VDC bussed field power to power their devices. These cards
are designed to operate at 21.6 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC 10%). To minimize field wiring, you
can connect a power source directly to the I/O interface carrier to provide power to field
devices that are connected to these cards. It is recommended that the power source is a
DeltaV Bulk Power Supply or Legacy Bulk Power Supply. Be sure that the power supply
allows the voltage to the carrier to be within the 21.6 to 26.4 VDC range required for the
cards that use bussed field power. Some I/O cards use a voltage other than 24 VDC and
others do not use bussed field power to power their associated field devices. Refer to the S-
series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for information on the DeltaV Bulk Power
Supplies.

Note
The bussed field power connection on the top of the carrier provides power to the field through the
I/O cards only. Extending power from this connection to additional field devices is not supported or
appropriate.

If the system requires redundant bulk power supplies or multiple bulk power supplies for
load sharing, it is recommended that the DeltaV Bulk Power supplies are used in
conjunction with DeltaV Redundancy Modules.

Related information

System Power Guidelines


I/O Cards

Implementing Bussed Field Power for


Applications using DI and DO Cards
Observe the following guidelines if you implement bussed field power for applications that
use DI and DO cards.

If you use DeltaV discrete input cards (isolated or dry contact) to sense a contact closure in
a field device, use an arc suppression device at the contact. This arc suppression device can
be an R-C snubber or a varistor, as shown in the following figure for isolated discrete
inputs.

389
Bussed Field Power Guidelines

Figure K-1: Arc Suppression Device Examples for Contact Closure Detection (Isolated
Discrete Input Cards)

The following table lists example R-C values based on the load provided by the input card
and the formulas provided in the Sizing R-C Snubbers topic.

Table K-1: Example R-C Values

Load from Input Card R Value C Value


24 VDC 5 k 2.4 nF
120 VAC 60 0.12 nF
230 VAC 115 0.01 nF

If you use DeltaV isolated discrete input cards to sense solid state devices such as triacs,
you may need to place some resistance in parallel with the input to avoid false triggering
due to leakage currents. Size the resistor so that the voltage level generated by leakage
current through the switch is less than the upper limit for OFF voltage at the input card.
The resistor wattage must support the following calculation for dissipation when the
switch is ON:

V
Watts = Vx
R
where:
V=voltage
R=resistance

You can use DeltaV dry contact discrete input cards to sense a solid state device only if the
leakage of the switch is less than the upper limit for OFF current of the input card. The
following table lists the upper limit of the OFF current for the DeltaV input cards.

Table K-2: Current Limits for Input Cards

Input Card Voltage Level Upper Limit of OFF Current


24 VDC 1 mA

390
Bussed Field Power Guidelines

Table K-2: Current Limits for Input Cards (continued)

Input Card Voltage Level Upper Limit of OFF Current


120 VAC 0.56 mA
230 VAC 0.28 mA

If you use DeltaV AC discrete output cards (high-side or isolated) to drive inductive loads
such as relay coils, it is recommended that the kickback from the coil be suppressed at the
coil with an R-C snubber or a varistor. Figure K-2 is a wiring diagram example for a high-
side discrete output. Sizing for the suppressor is load-dependent; refer to the Sizing R-C
Snubbers topic and to the documentation for the field device or suppressor.

Figure K-2: Examples for Driving Inductive Loads with AC Output Cards (High-Side
Discrete Output)

If you use DC discrete output cards to drive inductive loads such as relay coils, it is
recommended that the kickback from the coil be suppressed at the coil by a parallel
reverse-biased diode (such as a 1N4004). The following figure is a wiring diagram example
for a high-side discrete output.

Figure K-3: Example for Driving Inductive Loads with DC Output Cards (High-Side
Discrete Output)

391
Bussed Field Power Guidelines

If your field device has low current requirements, you can connect a loading resistor in
parallel with your load to limit the effect of leakage currents on DeltaV discrete AC output
cards. Size the resistor to provide a total load of 10 mA and to handle the heat dissipation
for this load. For example, a 12 K , 2 W resistor is appropriate for 120 VAC and a 23 K , 3
W resistor is appropriate for 230 VAC.

In electrically noisy environments, place one varistor in parallel with the field terminal
blocks at the I/O card and another varistor in parallel with the bussed field power
connection to the carrier. Size the varistor for 20% above the nominal line voltage.

Related information

Sizing R-C Snubbers

Sizing R-C Snubbers


R-C (resistor-capacitor) snubbers are used to suppress arcing when a contact is opened or
to suppress kickback when a coil is de-energized. Pre-assembled R-C snubbers are available
in a variety of ratings (Quencharc and RIFA RC-units are two trade names) or you can
assemble R-C snubbers from discrete components. Because the resistor is in series with
the capacitor, the wattage requirements are low (less than 0.25 W).

Note
R-C Snubbers are used with I/O cards only not with CHARM I/O.

Use the following calculations to size the R-C snubber that is appropriate for your
application. Always round up to the next value available.

DC Applications

For example, using a 24 VDC source, and driving a 0.5 A load:

AC Applications

for each 10 VA of steady state load

392
Bussed Field Power Guidelines

For example, using a 120 VAC source and driving a 0.5 A load:

393
Bussed Field Power Guidelines

394
Controller Redundancy

Appendix L
Controller Redundancy
Topics covered in this appendix:
Installing a Redundant Controller
Powering Redundant Controllers

The DeltaV system supports redundant controllers. The following figure shows a simple
system with redundant controllers and a redundant Control Network.

Figure L-1: Redundant Controller Network Example


Workstation Controller
Unshielded Controller
connectors
Primary hub

ScTP Cat. 5(e)


cable maximum ScTP Cat. 5(e)
length: cable maximum
100 m (330 ft) length:
Secondary hub
100 m (330 ft)

LEGEND:
= Shielded connectors

Installing a Redundant Controller


1. Assign appropriate redundancy license to the simplex Controller you want to make
redundant in DeltaV Explorer.
2. Plug in a second 2-wide carrier to the left of the current 2-wide carrier.
3. Insert the appropriate power supply in the left slot of the left 2-wide carrier and plug
in the power cord to supply power.
4. Insert a Controller (Controller type should match what is already in the right 2-wide
carrier) into the right slot of the left 2-wide carrier

395
Controller Redundancy

5. The added Controller's Power LED should turn on and the Error LED should blink for a
few seconds. Then, all 6 of the LEDs should turn on for about 2 seconds, followed by
the LEDs turning off except for the Power LED, which should always remain on. At
this point, the Standby LED and the two communications LEDs should start to blink
(Standby Controller becomes Commissioned).
6. Download the ProfessionalPLUS workstation. (Use the DeltaV Explorer to perform
the downloads.)
7. Download the setup data to the controller. The two communications LEDs should
continue to blink for a few minutes and the Standby LED should turn on solid
(Standby Controller becomes configured). The Standby Controller is now ready to
take over if the Active Controller fails.

Powering Redundant Controllers


A redundant controller system requires an additional two-wide carrier to support the
additional controller and power supply. The following figure shows a redundant controller
installation.

Figure L-2: Redundant Controller Installation Example

Refer to the preceding image:

Controller 1 receives 5V and 3.3V power from power supply 1.


Controller 2 receives 5V and 3.3V power from power supply 2.
Both power supplies provide 12V, load sharing power to the I/O cards.

396
Controller Redundancy

For redundant I/O power, ensure that there is enough power for the active controller and
I/O if one power supply fails. If the two power supplies are not capable of providing
redundant power to the controllers and I/O cards, you can install an additional carrier and
power supplies to the left of the controller carrier.

397
Controller Redundancy

398
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Appendix M
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Topics covered in this appendix:
VerticalPLUS Carriers
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carriers
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carriers
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carriers
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carriers
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders and Cables
Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers

There are two types of DeltaV vertical carriers: VerticalPLUS and Legacy Vertical.
VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for DeltaV basic process control systems as well as for
DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS). Legacy Vertical carriers cannot be used for
DeltaV SIS. The next section describes the VerticaPLUS carriers. Refer to the related topics
for information on Legacy Vertical carriers.

For both vertically and horizontally mounted systems, the LocalBus, including all cabling,
cannot be longer than 6.5 m (21.3 ft).

Note
In this Appendix, references to left and right, top and bottom, assume that you are facing the
equipment.

Important
The vertical carriers are mounted properly when the lettering is in the upright position.

Important
Vibration will cause vertical carriers to slip down on the DIN rail and disconnect from the carrier
above it. It is highly recommended that you install a stop on the DIN rail to prevent the carriers from
slipping.

Related information

Legacy Vertical Carriers


DeltaV System Equipment
Installing the DIN Rail Stop

399
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

VerticalPLUS Carriers
DeltaV VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) and
DeltaV basic process control systems. The Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented
System Hardware manual provides instructions for installing SIS hardware. VerticalPLUS
carriers mount on standard 35 mm. (1.38 in.) T-type DIN rails.

There are several types of VerticalPLUS carriers:

4-wide power/controller carrier


4-wide SISNet Repeater carrier
4-wide power carrier
left and right 8-wide I/O interface carriers
left and right 1-wide carrier extenders

Related information

DIN Rail Recommendations

4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carriers


The 4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller carrier holds up to two controllers (primary and
secondary) and two system power supplies. The 4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller
carriers install on the top left of a vertical system. The 96 pin connector on the bottom of
the carrier connects to the top of a left, 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carrier.

Figure M-1: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier

400
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carriers


The 4-wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater carrier holds a primary and secondary SISNet
Repeater. The 4-wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater carrier installs on the top right of a
vertical system. The 96 pin connector on the bottom of the carrier connects to the top of a
right, 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carrier. The VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater carrier
contains D-shell connectors for extending power to other carriers and BNC connectors for
extending local peer bus signals or terminating the local peer bus. Refer to the Installing
Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual for information on how SISNet
Repeaters are used in DeltaV SIS and for information on the local peer bus.

Figure M-2: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier

4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carriers


The 4-wide VerticalPLUS power carriers hold redundant power supplies if additional system
power is required. This carrier can be installed on the DIN rail anywhere in the cabinet.
Connect the DC reference ground when using a legacy 24 VDC bulk power supply only.
The DC reference ground connection is not required for a legacy 12 VDC bulk power
supply.

401
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-3: 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier

+ +
- -
12 VDC output + + 12 VDC output
- -
DC reference DC reference
ground for 24 ground for 24 VDC power
VDC power only only

8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carriers


8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carriers hold I/O cards and Logic Solvers and contain
connectors for inserting system and field power. For carrier numbering and card
addressing positions, refer to Figure M-5. The following figure shows the 8-wide
VerticalPLUS I/O interface carriers.

402
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-4: Left and Right 8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Carriers

Latch Acess
Hole Latch Acess
Hole

Latch Acess
Latch Acess Hole
Hole

403
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-5: Carrier Numbering and Addressing Positions

49-56

Carrier #8
Addressing
Positions
57-64

1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders and


Cables
The 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders and cables are used to extend power and local
peer bus signals from a left to a right 8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier and from a right to a left
8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier.

404
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

There are two types of 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders and cables:

Left 1-wide carrier extender


Right 1-wide carrier extender
D-shell connector cable to extend power and LocalBus signals
BNC connector cable to extend local peer bus signals for SIS systems

Note
For SIS systems, the local peer bus must be terminated by 120 ohm BNC terminators at either the 1-
wide carrier extender connected to the last 8-wide carrier or at a 4-wide SISNet Repeater carrier. The
termination location depends upon the carrier configuration. Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV Safety
Instrumented System Hardware manual for information on terminating SIS systems.

Left 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender

The Left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender connects to the bottom of a left 8-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier or to the top of a right 8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier.

Right 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender

The Right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender connects to the bottom of a right 8-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier or to the top of a left 8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier.

Figure M-6: Left and Right 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders

Cables for VerticalPLUS Systems

The 25 pin D-shell connector cable connects to the D-shell connectors labeled A on the 1-
wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders to extend power. Cable is available in the following
lengths.

0.4 meters (1.3 feet)


0.8 meters (2.6 feet)
1.1 meters (3.6 feet)
1.5 meters (4.9 feet)
1.9 meters (6.2 feet)

405
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

The BNC connector cable connects black-to-black and white-to-white between 1-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier extenders to extend the local peer bus for SIS systems. Refer to the
Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual for information on the
local peer bus.

Related information

1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders

Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers


Carefully plan the location of all carriers on the DIN rail before installing the carriers. You
will install a DIN rail stop first to prevent the carriers from slipping down on the DIN rail and
then install the carriers after the stop is in place.

Installing the DIN Rail Stop


Vibration will cause the vertical carriers to slip down on the DIN rail and disconnect from
the carrier above it. Before installing the carriers, install a DIN rail stop to prevent the
carriers from slipping. The stop should be at the lowest position on the DIN rail. The DIN
rail stop (KJ4010X1-BS1) can be purchased from Emerson Process Management.

Figure M-7: DIN Rail Stop

1. Be sure the arrow on the front of the stop is pointing upward towards the device. If
the arrow is pointing downwards away from the device, the screws on the DIN rail
stop could damage pins extending from the device.
2. First hook the end with the deeper notch over the DIN rail and then hook the end
with the more shallow notch over the other side of the DIN rail.

406
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

3. Screw the stop onto the DIN rail being careful not to overtighten the screws. Be sure
that both sides of the DIN rail stop are properly secured. The torque limits are
specified on the DIN rail stop.

Installing and Removing the Carriers


After installing the DIN rail stop, install the carriers. Latches on the back of the carriers are
used to snap the carriers into place on the DIN rail. Typically, a 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier
extender is installed after the DIN rail stop is installed.

Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers


1. Position the carrier on the DIN rail and push it against the DIN rail to snap it into
place.
2. Slide the carrier down on the DIN rail until it meets the DIN rail stop.
3. Snap the next carrier onto the DIN rail following the instructions in Step 1.
4. Connect each carrier to the adjacent carrier by sliding together the pins on the ends
of the carriers.
5. Connect ground wiring as shown in the following figure. Connect only one ground
wire for each group of carriers on a DIN rail.

Figure M-8: Ground Wiring for System Power Supplies

407
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Removing VerticalPLUS Carriers


1. Use the largest flat blade screw driver that will fit through the latch access holes on
the carrier.
2. Turn the latch cam approximately one quarter turn to the right as indicated on the
graphic printed on the carrier top.

Extending LocalBus Power to Other Carriers


When VerticalPLUS carriers are installed on separate DIN rails, carrier extender cables are
used to extend LocalBus power. Extender cables connect to 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier
extenders. A standard installation uses one extender cable; however, dual extender cables
can also be used.

The following figure shows a standard installation with one carrier extender cable used to
extend power from the left to the right carriers.

408
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-9: Power Extended from Left to Right Carriers

Related information

1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders and Cables

409
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Extend power from left to right 8-wide VerticalPLUS carriers


Be sure that the DIN rail stops are in place on both DIN rails. Refer to Installing the DIN Rail
Stop.

This procedure is for an installation with 6 carriers.

1. Connect a left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the last 8-wide carrier on the
left side (carrier 3) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
2. Connect a right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the first 8-wide carrier on
the right side (carrier 4) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
3. Connect the 25 pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the left 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.
4. Connect the 25 pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the right 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.

Related information

Installing the DIN Rail Stop

Extending power from right to left 8-wide VerticalPLUS


carriers
This procedure is for an installation with up to 8 carriers.

Note
If a 4-wide SISNet Repeater carrier is installed on the top right, there is no need for a 1-wide carrier
because power can be extended from the D-shell connectors on the SISNet Repeater carrier.

1. Connect the left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender or SISNet Repeater carrier to
the last 8-wide carrier on the right side (carrier 6) by sliding together the 96 pin
connectors on the carriers.
2. Connect the right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the first 8-wide carrier on
the left side (carrier 7) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
3. Connect the 25 pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the right 1-wide carrier extender or SISNet Repeater carrier
and fasten the retainer screws.
4. Connect the 25 pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the left 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.

410
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-10: Power Extended from a Left to Right Carrier and Right to Left
Carrier

Inserting System Power


To decide when to use external system power, calculate the power used per position on
the carrier. Add these values to determine if they exceed the power supplys capabilities. If
the calculation at a given position exceeds the power supplys capabilities:

Locate the power jumper that is just before this position (count from the power
supply end).

411
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Insert additional power at this node.

If multiple power supplies are used, be sure they are grounded at the same point.

1. Remove the jumper.

WARNING!
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream carriers.
When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.

2. Insert 12 VDC power:

+ to the center terminal


- to the - terminal

Figure M-11: Remove Jumper to Insert Additional System Power

Using Bussed Field Power with VerticalPLUS Carriers


The bussed field power connectors on the VerticalPLUS carriers differ from those on the
horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers; however, some basic principles apply to all carrier
types. Before connecting or extending bussed field power to VerticalPLUS carriers, read
the important information in "Connecting Bussed Field Power".

Related information

Connecting Bussed Field Power

Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers


Before extending bussed field power to VerticalPLUS carriers, read the note and warning in
"Extending Bussed Field Power".

Bussed field power can be extended to VerticalPLUS carriers if the addition of the next I/O
card does not exceed the 13 A rating of the connection to the source. The following figure
shows the screw terminal assignments on the VerticalPLUS carriers bussed field power
connections.

412
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

WARNING!
For VerticalPLUS carriers, field power for one I/O card can be extended to additional I/O cards
only if they have the same field voltage requirements.

Figure M-12: Screw Terminal Assignments on VerticalPLUS Carriers Bussed Field


Power Connections

+ Field Power
Connections

- Field Power
Connections

4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5

If the bussed field power supplies one I/O card only and is not extended to additional I/O
cards such as in redundant card applications, connect the wiring to the assigned screw
terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in Figure M-13.

CAUTION!
Ensure that the factory installed jumpers are removed from the connectors if only one I/O card
is to be powered.

413
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-13: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per I/O Card on
VerticalPLUS Carriers

Second Supply First Supply


+ Field Power Connection - Field Power Connection

DC AC DC AC

+ L - N
- N + L

Second Supply First Supply


- Field Power Connection + Field Power Connection

WARNING!
When supplying 250 VAC to adjacent bussed field power connections, be sure both sources are
the same phase.

If the bussed field power is extended to two I/O cards, connect the wiring to the assigned
screw terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in the following figure. Be
sure that jumpers are installed as shown in the figure.

414
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-14: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per Two Cards

Second Supply First Supply


+ Field Power Connection Add Jumper Wires - Field Power Connection
to Extend Power

DC AC DC AC

+ L - N
- N + L

Second Supply First Supply


- Field Power Connection + Field Power Connection

WARNING!
When supplying 250 VAC to adjacent bussed field power connections, be sure both sources are
the same phase.

If the bussed field power is extended to four I/O cards, connect wiring to the assigned
screw terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in the following figure. Be
sure that jumpers are installed as shown in the figure.

415
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-15: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per Four I/O Cards

Add Jumper Wires


to Extend Power
Supply Connection
DC AC

Return - N
Optional Wires to
Extend Power to
Supply + L
Next Connector Slots
Supply Return Connection

Related information

Extending Bussed Field Power

Legacy Vertical Carriers


DeltaV Legacy Vertical carriers mount on standard 35 mm. (1.38 in.) T- or G-type DIN rails.
for more information on vertical DIN rails.

There are 4 types of Legacy Vertical carriers for mounting vertically in a cabinet:

Two types of 4-wide power/controller carriers


Two types of 8-wide I/O interface carriers

There are two separate cable lengths for connecting the 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O
interface carriers:

1 meter bottom cable extender


2 meter top cable extender

If you are installing Legacy Vertical carriers in high vibration areas, it is highly
recommended that you install a DIN rail stop to prevent the carriers from slipping down on
the DIN rails.

416
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Related information

DIN Rail Recommendations


Installing the DIN Rail Stop

4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers


The 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers supply power and communications
connections for vertically mounted controller(s) and I/O cards. There are two types of 4-
wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers:

Top 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers connect to the left Legacy
Vertical 8-wide I/O interface carrier. The 96 pin connector is at the bottom of this
carrier. (The left 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier holds cards 1-8 from top
to bottom.)
Bottom 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers connect to the right 8-wide
Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier. The 96 pin connector is at the top of this carrier.
(The right 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier holds cards 8-1 from top to
bottom.)

Up to two controllers (primary and secondary) and two system power supplies mount on
the 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers. The following figure shows the top
and bottom 4-wide Legacy Vertical carriers.

Figure M-16: 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers

417
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers


The 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carriers provide power and communications
connections for the I/O subsystem. There are two types of 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O
interface carriers:

Left 8-wide I/O interface carrier (card positions 1-8 from top to bottom)
Right 8-wide I/O interface carrier (card positions 8-1 from top to bottom)

The following figure shows the left and right 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carriers.

418
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-17: Left and Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers

419
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Note
The 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O carriers are designed with a split high-side power plane and a shared
common return plane. A jumper bridges both high-side planes for a continuous conductive path. If
additional power is required, you can break this high-side path and add another power source to the
unpowered end.

To decide when to use external power, calculate the power used per position on the
carrier. Add these values to determine if they exceed the power supplys capabilities. If the
calculation of a given position exceeds the power supplys capabilities:

Locate the power jumper that is just before this position (count from the power
supply end).
Insert additional power at this node.

If multiple power supplies are used, be sure they are grounded at the same point.

Adding External Power to a Legacy Vertical System

Figure M-18: Remove Jumper to Add Power

1. Remove the jumper on the 8-wide I/O interface carrier.

WARNING!
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream carriers.
When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.

2. Insert 12 VDC power:

+ to the center terminal


- to the - negative terminal

CAUTION!
On the right 8-wide Legacy Vertical carriers removing the jumper only disconnects the
96 pin carrier connector; it does not disconnect the 48 pin cable connector.

420
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

This caution only applies if power is extended to a right 8-wide Legacy Vertical
carrier with a cable connected to it. As an example, in the configuration shown in the
following figure power should be extended at carriers 3 and 5. This allows carriers 1
and 2 to receive power from the system power supply; carriers 3 and 4 to receive
power extended at carrier 3; and carriers 5, 6, 7, and 8 to receive power extended at
carrier 5.

Figure M-19: Extending Power at Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carriers

1 2 3 4
Top
4-wide carrier

1
Bussed field

7
2

2
power connector 6
3 C7

3
4

4
5
C1 C6

4
5

5
3
6

6
2
7

7
1
8

8
8
1

1
7
2

2
6
3

3
4

4
5

C2 C5
C8
4
5

5
3
6

6
2
7

7
1
8

8
Remove jumper and Remove jumper
extend power here 8 and extend power
1

here
7
2

6
3
4

C3 C4
4
5

3
6

2
7

1
8
2

The following figure shows a typical Legacy Vertical configuration with six, 8-wide
I/O interface carriers.

421
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-20: Typical Legacy Vertically Mounted Configuration


LEFT RIGHT

DIN Rail DIN Rail


Mounting Mounting

Top Position
Vertical
4-Wide
Mounted
Carrier
DIN Rail

Carrier #1 Carrier #6

Addressing Addressing
Positions Positions
01 - 08 41 - 48

Carrier #2
Carrier #5
Addressing
Addressing
Positions
Positions
09 - 16
33 - 40

Bussed
Field
Power
Connector

Carrier #3 Carrier #4

Addressing Addressing
Positions Positions
17 - 24 25 - 32

Bottom Cable Extender

Another Legacy Vertical configuration uses the top cable extender to bridge a left to
right 8-wide I/O Interface carrier, as shown here.

422
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-21: Top Cable Extender Bridging Left and Right Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers
LEFT RIGHT LEFT
DIN Rail DIN Rail DIN Rail
Mounting Mounting Mounting

Top Position
Vertical
4-Wide Carrier
Mounted
DIN Rail

Carrier #5
Carrier #4
Addressing
Addressing
Positions
Positions
Carrier #1 33 - 40
25 - 32
Addressing
Positions
Top Cable Extender
01 - 08

Bussed
Field
Power
Connector

Carrier #2

Addressing
Positions
09 - 16 Carrier #3

Addressing
Positions
17 - 24

Bottom Cable Extender

Another Legacy Vertical configuration, shown in the following figure, shows a


bottom 4-wide Legacy Vertical carrier connected to a right 8-wide Legacy Vertical
I/O interface carrier. A top cable extender bridges the right I/O carrier to a left I/O
carrier on the back side of the cabinet.

423
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-22: Bottom 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier

Carrier #2 Top Cable Extender


Addressing Carrier #3
Positions Addressing
09 - 16 Positions
17 - 24

Carrier #1
Carrier #4
Addressing Bussed
Positions Addressing
Field Positions
01 - 08 Power 25 - 32
Connector

Bottom
Position
4-Wide
Carrier

DIN Rail

DIN Rail

Cables for Legacy Vertical Systems


Two types of cables are used to connect the 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O carriers:

The bottom cable extender connects a left I/O carrier (card position 1-8) to a right
I/O carrier (card positions 8-1) at the bottom of the DIN rails. The bottom cable
extender exits in a downward direction.
The top cable extender connects a right I/O carrier (card position 8-1) to a left I/O
carrier (card positions 8-1) on the opposite side of the cabinet at the top of the DIN
rails. The top cable extender exits in an upward direction.

The figures in "4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers" show how the bottom
cable extender is used in a typical legacy vertical configuration and how the top cable
extender is used as a bridge.

Note
Failure to use the correct cables can result in a corrupt addressing scheme.

424
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Related information

4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers

Calculating the Total Length of a Legacy Vertical System


For both vertically and horizontally mounted systems, the length of the LocalBus, including
all cabling is the same; it cannot exceed 6.5 m (21.3 feet). The LocalBus at this length can
support eight, 8-wide carriers, one, 4-wide carrier, one, bottom cable extender, and one,
top cable extender. However, there is a difference in how maximum length is calculated
for Legacy Vertical systems. The following figure shows a standard Legacy Vertical
configuration for an eight carrier, 64 card system.

Figure M-23: Standard Configuration for an Eight Carrier Legacy Vertical System

1 2 3 4
Top
4-wide carrier

8
1

1
Bussed field
7
2

2
power connector 6
C7
3

3
4

4
5

C1 C6
4
5

5
3
6

6
2
7

7
1
8

8
Top cable extender
(2-meters/78.74 inches)
8
1

1
7
2

6
3

3
4

4
5

C2 C5
C8
4
5

5
3
6

2
7

7
1
8

8
1

7
2

6 Notes
3
4

C3 C4 Each carrier (C1-C8) is 22 inches long


C1 addressing positions 01-08
4
5

3
6

C2 addressing positions 09-16


2 C3 addressing positions 17-24
7

C4 addressing positions 25-32


1
8

C5 addressing positions 33-40


C6 addressing positions 41-48
2

C7 addressing positions 49-56


C8 addressing positions 57-64
Bottom cable extender
(1 meter/39.37 inches)

The length to carriers 6 and 7 (C6 and C7) is not counted in the overall length calculation
since C6 and C7 are considered spurs and are not in series with the rest of the system. Spur
lengths are equal to or less than the total system length.

425
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Refer to preceding figure. There are three carrier ends: 6, 7, and 8. For a vertically mounted
system, the signal path starts at the first carrier. The following table shows how to
calculate the lengths to the three carrier ends. The cable lengths are 1m. (39.37 in.) or 2m
(78.74 in.) and the carrier lengths (C) are 22 inches.

Table M-1: Cable Length Calculations

Total length to the end of


carrier: Calculation
6 C1 + C2 + C3 + 1m + C4 +C5 + C6 = 14.3 ft
7 C1 + C2 + C3 + 1m + C4 +C5 + 2m + C7 = 20.8 ft
8 C1 + C2 + C3 + 1m + C4 +C5 + 2m + C8 = 20.8 ft

Note
Do not connect additional carriers to spurs as this will corrupt the addressing scheme. Referring to
Figure M-23, if you connect a carrier to the end of carrier 6, it will become carrier 7. In the addressing
scheme shown in the figure, carrier 7 already exists at the end of the 2 meter cable.

Related information

DeltaV System Equipment

DIN Rail Recommendations


The following figure shows suggested spacing for vertical DIN rail installation.

426
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-24: Vertical DIN Rail Installation

Installing the 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller


Carriers
1. Mount the DIN rail at the appropriate location.
2. Turn the screws counter-clockwise on the power/controller carrier to disengage the
latch.
3. Place the carrier on the rail and tighten the screws clockwise to latch.

Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the outer screws are for T-rail mounting.

Installing the 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers


Refer to the following figure when performing these steps.

427
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-25: 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier Installation

Previously
Mounted T-Rail or G-Rail
Top Position
4-wide Carrier

T-Rail Latch Screws

G-Rail Latch Screws

Bussed Field
Power Connector

Carrier
Push Push
Shield
and and
Bar
Hold Hold

Wiring
Point for
Shield
Bar

Previously
Mounted
Bottom
Position
Push
4-wide Carrier
and
Hold

1. Mount the DIN rail at the appropriate location.


2. Connect each 8-wide carrier to any adjacent carriers by sliding the 96-pin
connectors at the top or bottom of the carriers together. Hold the carrier in position
to ensure that it does not fall.
3. Turn the screws counter-clockwise to disengage the latch. With the carrier on the
rail, tighten the screws clockwise to latch.

Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the outer screws are for T-rail mounting.

4. If you are mounting 8-wide carriers on separate rails, use the bottom cable extender
for a left-to-right bridge and the top cable extender for a right-to-left bridge.
5. Install ground wiring as shown in the following figure. For a good connection, use a
signal ground cable and a block spade terminal, sized for AC/DC system power.

428
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Figure M-26: Ground Wiring for System Power Supplies


Isolated Common
Ground Reference

Dedicated Plant Ground


Grid Point

DC
Reference
Ground I/O Carrier
Shield Bar

Bussed
Field
Power
Connector
Connects To
Shield Bar on
Next I/O Carrier

Related information

Cables for Legacy Vertical Systems

Installing the Cables


Use the bottom cable extender to connect a left Legacy Vertical I/O carrier to a right
Legacy Vertical I/O carrier at the bottom of the DIN rails. Use the top cable extender to
connect a right Legacy Vertical I/O carrier to a left I/O carrier on the opposite side of the
cabinet at the top of the DIN rails.

429
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Note
Be sure that the bottom cable extender exits in a downward position and the top cable extender exits
in an upward position.

CAUTION!
Be careful when inserting sockets and plugs. The connectors are fragile and bend easily. Ensure
that the pins are straight before connecting the cable ends.

1. Connect the plugs and sockets on the carriers.


2. Tighten the two mounting screws on each cable end.

430
Installation Worksheets

Appendix N
Installation Worksheets
Topics covered in this appendix:
Installation Information Checklist
Worksheets for Calculating Power Requirements
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field
Power
Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input
Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements
Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements

This appendix provides worksheets to calculate your system power supply requirements
and includes a checklist that you can use to create your own worksheets to document your
installation.

Installation Information Checklist


Document the following information about your system and archive it for use in the event
that any problems arise.

Create a diagram of the Control Network equipment and cables, include:


- Equipment location
- Cable routing
- Cable lengths
- Type of connectors at each end of the cables
- The manufacturer and type of cable
- Boot color on the cables
- Certification report for each 10BaseT cable
- Certification report for each fiber-optic cable
Create a diagram of the power supplies and power and ground wiring, include:
- Power supply locations
- Power sizing calculations (Refer to the tables in this chapter.)
- Wiring routing
- Wiring gauges and lengths

431
Installation Worksheets

- Current flow through the wiring (measured after startup)


Document the sizing and heat rise calculations for any enclosures
Document each I/O terminal block and I/O card types for each slot

Related information

I/O Cards
Power Dissipation Considerations

Worksheets for Calculating Power


Requirements
Use the tables in this chapter to calculate your power supply requirements for system
power supplies and legacy bulk power supplies for non-I.S. systems.

Use the Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements to determine the
number of power supplies required for Intrinsically Safe systems and add the total number
of I.S. power supplies to the Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power.

Make a copy of the tables and use them for each DeltaV system in your plant. If you are
using redundant power, remember to include calculations for redundant system power.

Calculating Power Requirements

Follow these steps to calculate your power requirements:

For products that use 12 VDC LocalBus power and 24 VDC bussed field power, use
the Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field
Power to record quantity for each product and multiply quantity by the required
amperage to determine the:
- 12 VDC LocalBus power requirements for each product
- 24 VDC bussed field power requirements for each product

Enter the totals in the appropriate column (12 VDC or 24 VDC) in the Worksheet for
Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power. Add the total
amperage requirements to get a subtotal of amperage requirements for all products and
enter the subtotal as Subtotal 1.

For products that use 24 VDC power, use the Worksheet for Products Using Only 24
VDC Power to record quantity for each product and multiply quantity by the
required amperage to determine the:
- 24 VDC power requirements for each product
- Number of Intrinsically Safe power supplies (if I.S. cards are used) required for I.S.
systems and add the total number of I.S. power supplies to the worksheet. Use
the Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements to determine
the number of I.S. power supplies.
- Enter the totals in the 24 VDC column in the worksheet.

432
Installation Worksheets

- Add the total amperage requirements to get a subtotal of amperage


requirements for all products and enter as Subtotal 2 at the end of the
worksheet.

24 VDC Systems

For 24 VDC systems, use the Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC
Power Input to determine the:
- Number of system power supplies required to power the I/O cards.
- Amperage required from the legacy bulk 24 VDC power supplies to power the
system power supplies and bussed field power requirements.

12 VDC Systems

For 12 VDC systems, use the Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC
Power to determine the:
- Number of system power supplies required to power the I/O cards.
- Amperage required from the legacy bulk 12 VDC Power Supplies to power the
system power supplies and 24 VDC bussed field power requirements.

Use the Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements to determine the number of legacy bulk
power supplies required.

Related information

Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements


Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input
Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements

Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus


Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Use this table to calculate the power requirements for products that use 12 VDC LocalBus
power and 24 VDC bussed field power.

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power

Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type

Product Quan- 12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field


Type tity Power Power 12 VDC 24 VDC
Controllers 0.0(1) 0.0(1)

(1) Require no LocalBus current as controllers are powered separately by the system power supply.

433
Installation Worksheets

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)

Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type

Product Quan- 12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field


Type tity Power Power 12 VDC 24 VDC
Remote Inter- 0.0(1) 0.0(1)
face Unit
I/O Cards
AI, 8-Chan- 0.150 0.300
nel, 4-20 mA
AI, 8-Chan- 0.150 0.300
nel, 4-20 mA,
HART
AI, 8-Chan- 0.150 0.100
nel, 1-5 VDC
AO, 8-Chan- 0.150 0.300
nel, 4-20 mA
AO, 8-Chan- 0.150 0.300
nel, 4-20 mA,
HART
AS-Interface 0.300 N/A
DeviceNet 0.600 N/A
DI, 8-Chan- 0.100 N/A
nel, 24 VDC,
Isolated
DI, 8-Chan- 0.100 0.040
nel, 24 VDC,
Dry Contact
DI, 8-Chan- 0.100 N/A
nel, 120 VAC,
Isolated
DI, 8-Chan- 0.100 N/A
nel, 120 VAC,
Dry Contact
DI, 8-Chan- 0.100 N/A
nel, 230 VAC,
Isolated
DI, 8-Chan- 0.100 N/A
nel, 230 VAC,
Dry Contact
DI, 32-Chan- 0.075 0.150
nel, 24 VDC,
Dry Contact

434
Installation Worksheets

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)

Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type

Product Quan- 12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field


Type tity Power Power 12 VDC 24 VDC
DO, 8-Chan- 0.150 N/A
nel, 120/230
VAC, Isolated
DO, 8-Chan- 0.150 N/A
nel, 120/230
VAC, High
Side
DO, 8-Chan- 0.150 N/A
nel, 24 VDC,
Isolated
DO, 8-Chan- 0.150 depends upon field
nel, 24 VDC, devices (max 3 A total
High Side each card)
DO, 32-Chan- 0.150 depends upon field
nel, 24 VDC, devices (max 3.2 A to-
High-Side tal each card)
Fieldbus H1 0.600 N/A
card
Media Con- 0.300 N/A
verter
Multifunction 0.250 N/A
Profibus DP 0.600 N/A
RTD, ohms 0.160 N/A
Sequence of 0.075 0.075
Events
Serial Card, 2 0.300 N/A
Ports, RS232/
RS485
Thermocou- 0.350 N/A
ple, mV
Series 2 I/O Cards (2)
Series 2 AI, Simplex: 0.150 Simplex: 0.300
4-20 mA with Redundant: 0.250 Redundant: 0.200
HART (each card) (each card)

(2) For Series 2 cards in redundant applications, the numbers shown in the table are for each card of a redundant pair. For example, the power
required for a redundant pair of Series 2 DO cards is .300 A at 12 VDC and a maximum of 3 A at 24 VDC for 24 VDC field power.

435
Installation Worksheets

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)

Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type

Product Quan- 12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field


Type tity Power Power 12 VDC 24 VDC
Series 2 AI, 0.150 0.600
16-Channel,
4-20 mA,
HART Sim-
plex
Series 2 AO, Simplex: 0.150 Simplex: 0.300
4-20 mA with Redundant: 0.250 Redundant: 0.200
HART (each card) (each card)
Series 2 AS- 0.300 N/A
Interface Sim-
plex
Series 2 DI, 8- Simplex: 0.150 Simplex: 0.040
Channel, 24 Redundant: 0.150 Redundant: 0.020
VDC Dry Con- (each card) (each card)
tact
Series 2 DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 24
VDC Isolated
Simplex
Series 2 DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 120
VAC, Dry
Contact Sim-
plex
Series 2 DI, 8- 0.100 N/A
Channel, 120
VAC Isolated
Simplex
Series 2 DI, 0.075 0.150
32-Channel,
24 VDC, Dry
Contact Sim-
plex
Series 2 DO, Simplex: 0.150 Simplex: depends
8-Channel, 24 Redundant: 0.150 upon field devices;
VDC, High- (each card) (max 3 A total each
Side card)
Redundant: depends
upon field devices;
(max 1.5 A each card)

436
Installation Worksheets

Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)

Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type

Product Quan- 12 VDC LocalBus 24 VDC Bussed Field


Type tity Power Power 12 VDC 24 VDC
Series 2 DO, 0.150 N/A
8-Channel, 24
VDC Isolated
Simplex
Series 2 DO, 0.150 N/A
8-Channel,
120/230 VAC
High Side
Simplex
Series 2 DO, 0.150 N/A
8-Channel,
120/230
VAC, Isolated
Simplex
Series 2 DO, 0.150 depends upon field
32-Channel, devices
24 VDC, (max 3.2 A total each
High-Side card)
Simplex
Series 2 H1 Simplex: 0.300 N/A
Redundant: 0.300 N/A
(each card)
Series 2 Isola- 0.350 N/A
ted Input
Series 2 Devi- 0.600 N/A
ceNet
Series 2 Profi- 0.600 N/A
bus DP
Series 2 Ther- 0.210
mocouple
Series 2 Se- 0.100 0.075
quence of
Events Sim-
plex
Series 2 Serial Simplex: 0.300 N/A
Redundant: 0.300 N/A
(each card)
Subtotal 1

437
Installation Worksheets

Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC


Power
Table N-2: Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power

Miscellaneous Products

Amps Required for Each Prod-


Product Type Quantity uct Total for Product Type

12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


H1 carrier input N/A 0.020 (carrier N/A
power N/A only)
Bussed field 0.500 (max
power with cards)
Bussed field
power: Add
the current re-
quired for the
cards installed
on the carrier
unless accoun-
ted for else-
where in the
calculation in
the table for
products that
use 12 V Local-
Bus power and
24 VDC
bussed field
power.
Logic Solver N/A 1 plus DO field N/A
power (4 max)
Redundant Log- N/A 2 plus DO field N/A
ic Solvers power
SISNet Repeat- N/A 0.300 (per Re- N/A
ers peater)
Auxiliary Relay N/A 0.010 plus N/A
Modules, Ener- field power (5
gize to Actuate max)
and De-Energize
to Actuate, 24
VDC
DeltaV Smart Switches and Media Modules
FP20-6TX2TX N/A 0.221 N/A

438
Installation Worksheets

Table N-2: Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power (continued)

Miscellaneous Products

Amps Required for Each Prod-


Product Type Quantity uct Total for Product Type

12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


FP20-6TX1MM1 N/A 0.271 N/A
TX
FP20-6TX1SM1T
X
FP20-6TX1SMLH
1TX
FP20-6TX2MM N/A 0.321 N/A
FP20-6TX2SM
FP20-6TX2SMLH
MD20-8 N/A 0.208 N/A
MD20-16 N/A 0.500 N/A
MD20-24
MD30-8 N/A 0.317 N/A
MD30-16 N/A 0.609 N/A
MD30-24
MD2-4TX1 N/A 0.034 N/A
MD2-4TX1-PoE
MD3-4FX/M2 N/A 0.292
MD3-4FX/M4
MD3-4FXS2
MD2-2FXM2 N/A 0.142
MD3-2FXM2/
2TX1
MD3-2FXM4/
2TX1
MD2-2FXS2
MD3-2FXS2/
2TX1
MD3-1FXS2/
3TX1
Power Supplies
I.S. System Pow- N/A 3.4
er Supply (Refer
to the table for
IS System Power
requirements
for calculations.)

439
Installation Worksheets

Table N-2: Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power (continued)

Miscellaneous Products

Amps Required for Each Prod-


Product Type Quantity uct Total for Product Type

12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


Fieldbus Power N/A Refer to man- N/A
Supply ufacturer's
specifications.
I.S. Fieldbus N/A Refer to man- N/A
Power Supply ufacturer's
specifications.

Subtotal 2 N/A

Worksheet for System Power Requirements -


24 VDC Power Input
To calculate the number and type of system power supplies required to power the system
based on the 12 VDC LocalBus power requirements calculated in the Worksheet for
Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power, use the following
table for systems in which the system power supply is powered by a 24 VDC supply or use
the Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC for systems in which the system
power supply is powered by a 12 VDC supply. Remember to not exceed 8 A on the
horizontal carrier and 15 A on the vertical carrier and remember to include calculations for
redundant system power. Add Subtotal 1 from Worksheet for Products Using 12 V
LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power and Subtotal 2 from the Worksheet for
products Using Only 24 VDC Power to do the calculation

Table N-3: System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Input

Amps Required for Each Prod-


Quantity uct Total for Product Type

Product Type 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


System Power N/A 7.5 max N/A
Supply (Dual
DC/DC) 24 V
input
Provides 8.0
Amps @ 12 V
(Subtotal 1 /
8.0 A = Quan-
tity)(3)

(3) Older models of the Dual DC/DC System Power Supply provided 4.5 A of +12 V power and required 4.0 A input from +24 V power.

440
Installation Worksheets

Table N-3: System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Input (continued)

Amps Required for Each Prod-


Quantity uct Total for Product Type

Product Type 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


Redundant NA 1.0 max(4) N/A
system Power
Supply (Dual
DC/DC) 24 V
input for ei-
ther Simplex
or Redundant
controllers (if
applicable)
Add for Subto- Subtotal 3 N/A
tal 3
Add Subtotal Subtotal 1 N/A
1 (24 VDC on-
ly) from Work-
sheet for Prod-
ucts Using 12
V LocalBus
Power and 24
VDC Bussed
Field Power.
Add Subtotal Subtotal 2 N/A
2 from Work-
sheet for Prod-
ucts Using On-
ly 24 VDC
Power
Add Subtotals Grand Total N/A
1, 2, and 3 for
total 24 VDC
power re-
quired.

Example Calculation for 24 VDC Input

As an example, suppose your calculations from the Worksheet for Products Using 12 V
LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power showed that the total 12 VDC LocalBus
power requires 6.1 A. Calculate the number of power supplies that you will need as follows:

6.1 A/8.0 A/supply = 0.76 or 1 system power supply for simplex power

(4) If your system requires redundant system power, a redundant system power supply can be added to either a 2-wide horizontal carrier,
(may require an additional 2-wide carrier) or to the 4-wide vertical carrier.

441
Installation Worksheets

If redundant power is required, an additional 2-wide carrier is necessary for a horizontally


mounted DeltaV system. Use the Worksheet for Legacy Bulk Power Requirements to
calculate the number of bulk supplies required to power the system for each type based on
the 12 and 24 VDC power requirements calculated in the Worksheet for System Power
Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input.

Related information

Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input

Worksheet for System Power Requirements -


12 VDC Input
For systems in which the system power supply is powered from a 12 VDC supply, use the
following table to calculate the number and type of system power supplies required to
power the system based on the 12 VDC LocalBus power requirements calculated in the
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power.
Remember to not exceed 8 A on the horizontal carrier and 15 A on the vertical carrier and
remember to include calculations for redundant system power. Add Subtotal 1 from the
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power and
Subtotal 2 from the Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power to do the
calculation.

Table N-4: System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input

Amps Required for Each Prod-


Product Type Quantity uct Total for Product Type

12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


System Power 1.8(5) N/A N/A
Supply (Dual
DC/DC) 12 V
input
Provides 13
Amps @ 12 V
(Subtotal 1 /
13 A = Quanti-
ty)

(5) The current required for I/O cards is included in the calculations in Table N-1 and is transferred from Table N-1 to Table N-4 as Subtotal 1.
The system power supply requires 1.8 A from the Bulk 12 VDC Power Supply to provide the power for each controller (one controller as-
sumed for each system power supply.) If on a large system, the current exceeds: the 8 A limit for horizontally mounted systems, the 15 A
limit for vertically mounted systems, or the 13 A system power supply limit, use the cable extender and split the 12 VDC as described in
Appendix J

442
Installation Worksheets

Table N-4: System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input (continued)

Amps Required for Each Prod-


Product Type Quantity uct Total for Product Type

12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


Redundant 1.8(6) N/A
System Power
Supply for ei-
ther Simplex
or Redundant
controllers (if
applicable)
Add for Subto- Subtotal 4 N/A
tal 4
Add Subtotal Subtotal 1
1 from Work-
sheet for Prod-
ucts Using 12
V LocalBus
Power and 24
VDC Bussed
Field Power.
Add Subtotal Subtotal 2
2 from Work-
sheet for Prod-
ucts Using On-
ly 24 VDC
Power
Add Subtotals Grand Total
1, 2, and 4 for
total 12 and
24 VDC power
required.

Example Calculation for 12 VDC Input

Suppose your calculations from the Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power
and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power showed that the total 12 VDC power requires 6.1 A.
Calculate the number of power supplies required as follows:

6.1 A/13 A/supply =.47 or 1 system power supply for simplex power and 2 system power supplies for
redundant power.

(6) The system power supply requires 1.8 A from the Bulk 12 VDC Power Supply to provide the power for each controller (one controller as-
sumed for each system power supply.)

443
Installation Worksheets

If on a large system, the currents exceeds: the 8 A limit for horizontally mounted systems,
the 13 A system power supply limit, or the 15 A limit for vertically mounted systems, use
the cable extender and split out the 12 VDC as described in "System Power Guidelines" for
horizontal systems and "DeltaV Vertical Carriers" for vertical systems.

Related information

Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power
System Power Guidelines
DeltaV Vertical Carriers

Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements


Use the following table to calculate the number of legacy bulk supplies required to power
the system for each type based on the 12 VDC and 24 VDC power requirements calculated
in Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input.

Table N-5: Bulk Power Requirements

Total Amps Needed for Sys- Total Amps Available for sys-
tem tem

Product Type Quantity 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


Legacy DIN N/A N/A
rail-mounted
Bulk Power
Supply 12 VDC
Provides 12
Amps each
(Grand Total
Table N-3 or
Table N-4 / 12
A = Quantity)
Legacy DIN N/A N/A
rail-mounted
Bulk Power
Supply 24 VDC
Provides 12
Amps each
(Grand Total
Table N-3 or
Table N-4 /12
A = Quantity)

444
Installation Worksheets

Table N-5: Bulk Power Requirements (continued)

Total Amps Needed for Sys- Total Amps Available for sys-
tem tem

Product Type Quantity 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


Redundant N/A N/A
Legacy DIN
rail-mounted
12 VDC Bulk
Power Supply
(if applicable)
Redundant N/A N/A
Legacy DIN
rail-mounted
24 VDC Bulk
Power Supply
(if applicable)
Legacy Panel- N/A N/A
mounted Bulk
Power Supply
12 VDC
Provides 25
Amps each
(Grand Total
Table N-3 or
Table N-4 /25
A = Quantity)
Legacy Panel- N/A N/A
mounted Bulk
Power Supply
24 VDC
Provides 12.5
Amps each
(Grand Total
Table N-3 or
Table N-4 /
12.5 A =
Quantity)
Redundant N/A N/A
Legacy Panel-
mounted 12
VDC Bulk Pow-
er Supply (if
applicable)(7)

445
Installation Worksheets

Table N-5: Bulk Power Requirements (continued)

Total Amps Needed for Sys- Total Amps Available for sys-
tem tem

Product Type Quantity 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC


Redundant N/A N/A
Legacy Panel-
mounted 24
VDC Bulk Pow-
er Supply (if
applicable)(7)

Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power


Requirements
Use the following table to size I.S. power for I.S. systems and add the total number of
required I.S. power supplies to Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power.

Table N-6: I.S. System Power Requirements

Amps Required for Total for Product


Product Type Quantity Each Product Type
I.S AI, 4-20, mA, 8- 0.600
Channel with HART
I.S. AO, 4-20 mA, 8- 0.630
Channel (with HART)
I.S. DI, 16-Channel 0.350
I.S. DO, 4-Channel 0.560
I.S. LocalBus Isolator 0.060
Grand total
I.S. System Power Sup-
ply (5 A max each) Pro-
vides 5 A @ 12 V
(Grand Total / 5A =
Quantity)
Redundant I.S. System
Power Supplies (1
max)

(7) An OR-ing diode is required for redundant bulk power supplies. Refer to Appendix I for information.

446
Installation Worksheets

Table N-6: I.S. System Power Requirements (continued)

Amps Required for Total for Product


Product Type Quantity Each Product Type
Total number of power
supplies (add to the
Worksheet for Prod-
ucts Using Only 24
VDC Power )

Related information

Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power

447
Installation Worksheets

448
Intrinsically Safe I/O

Appendix O
Intrinsically Safe I/O
Topics covered in this appendix:
Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator
Intrinsically Safe Carrier Extenders

The DeltaV system includes the following Intrinsically Safe I/O components:

I/O cards
- I.S. DI, 16-Channel
- I.S. DO, 4-Channel
- I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20, mA HART
- I.S AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA and I.S AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA HART
Terminal Blocks
- I.S. 8-Channel terminal block
- I.S. 16-Channel terminal block
I.S. Power Supply
I.S. LocalBus Isolator
Right and left hand carrier extenders
Carriers
- I.S. 8-Wide carrier
- Power Supply carrier
- Isolator carrier

WARNING!
Be sure that your I.S. I/O cards and terminal blocks are compatible before plugging in I/O cards.
Card damage can result if an I/O card and terminal block are incompatible.

WARNING!
In any hazardous area installation it is important to read and follow the device manufacturer's
design and installation documents. Failure to follow the documentation could result in an
unapproved and unsafe application. Additionally, in hazardous locations follow your plant's
procedures for making the area safe during installation and maintenance operations.

You can use both I.S. and non-I.S. I/O cards within one DeltaV system. However, you must
separate the I.S. cards from the non-I.S. cards with a LocalBus Isolator to protect the I.S.
cards from damaging voltages. Only one LocalBus Isolator can be used in the DeltaV
system. Plan your I/O subsystem carefully because you cannot add non-I.S. cards beyond

449
Intrinsically Safe I/O

the LocalBus Isolator. If you use multiple I.S. system power supplies, intersperse the power
supplies among the cards. Refer to DeltaV Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits
Installation Instructions (Part Number - 12P1990) for detailed information on wiring
multiple I.S. system power supplies. This manual is on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD. The following figure shows a LocalBus Isolator separating non-I.S. and I.S. cards.

Figure O-1: DeltaV Intrinsically Safe I/O Overview


Non-IS IS

Localbus
System Power Isolator
Supply
Non-IS I/O Cards IS IS I/O Cards RH Carrier
Controller (Gray Terminal Blocks) Power Supply (Blue Terminal Blocks) Extender

LH Carrier IS I/O Cards IS I/O Cards IS I/O Cards


Extender

Important
Field power is provided by the I.S. I/O cards. Do not connect to the connectors on the top of the I.S.
8-wide carrier.

The following figure shows the grounding requirements for an I.S. I/O subsystem.

450
Intrinsically Safe I/O

Figure O-2: Grounding Requirements for I.S. I/O


Isolated
Common Ground
Reference

Dedicated
Plant Ground
Grid Point

IS
Localbus Power
Isolator Supply

Carrier Shield Bar

Several documents pertaining to Hazardous Area installations are on the DeltaV


Documentation Library DVD.

Related information

Intrinsically Safe I/O Interface Keying


Hazardous Area Installation Manuals, NAMUR Installation Manuals, and ATEX Instruction
Sheets

Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator


The I.S. LocalBus Isolator separates non-I.S. components such as I/O cards and controllers
from I.S. components. The following figure shows the I.S. LocalBus Isolator dimensions.

Table O-1: I.S. LocalBus Isolator Specifications

Item Specification
Input 12 V @ 60 mA maximum
Output 12 V @ 60 mA maximum
Power dissipation within module 1.2 W maximum
Mounting LocalBus Isolator carrier

The controller is non-I.S. You must always use an I.S. LocalBus Isolator to isolate the
controller from I.S. cards.

451
Intrinsically Safe I/O

Figure O-3: I.S. LocalBus Isolator Dimensions

Intrinsically Safe Carrier Extenders


I.S. carrier extenders bridge two I.S. carriers to make one complete I.S. system. I.S. carrier
extenders can be used to build a system around obstacles such as cabinet walls or pipes.

452
Intrinsically Safe I/O

Figure O-4: Right and Left I.S. Carrier Extenders

453
Intrinsically Safe I/O

454
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware

Appendix P
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS
Hardware
The following table shows the product type numbers for all DeltaV non-SIS hardware
products.

Table P-1: DeltaV non-SIS Hardware Products Crossed Referenced to Product Type
Numbers

Product Type Number DeltaV Product Name


KJ1501X1-BC3 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
KJ1700X1-BA1 Fiber-Optic Media Converter
KJ1710X1-BA1 Single Port Fiber Switch
KJ1740X1-BA1 Four Port Fiber Switch
KJ2003X1-BB1 MD Plus Controller
KJ2003X1-BA2 MD Controller
KJ2005X1-BA1 MX Controller
KJ2004X1-BA1 Remote Interface Unit
KJ3001X1-BA1 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card
KJ3001X1-BB1 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
KJ3001X1-BG1 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card
KJ3001X1-BJ1 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card
KJ3001X1-CA1 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
KJ3001X1-CB1 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card
KJ3002X1-BA1 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card
KJ3002X1-BB1 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA card
KJ3002X1-BC1 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA card
KJ3002X1-BD1 AI, 8-Channel, 1-5 VDC card
KJ3002X1-BE1 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card
KJ3002X1-BF1 RTD, ohms card
KJ3002X1-BG2 Thermocouple, mV card
KJ3224X1-BA1 Series 2 Thermocouple, mV card
KJ3003X1-BA1 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485
KJ3003X1-EA1 Interface terminal block
KJ3004X1-EA1 Fieldbus H1 terminal block
KJ3005X1-BA1 AS-Interface card

455
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware

Table P-1: DeltaV non-SIS Hardware Products Crossed Referenced to Product Type
Numbers (continued)

Product Type Number DeltaV Product Name


KJ3006X1-BA1 Multifunction card
KJ3007X1-BA1 Profibus DP card, pre-Series 2
KJ3007X1-EA1 Profibus DP terminal block
KJ3008X1-BA1 Sequence of Events card
KJ3009X1-BA1 DeviceNet card
KJ3201X1-BA1 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
KJ3201X1-EA1 Redundant Discrete terminal block
KJ3202X1-BA1 Series 2 DO, 24 VDC, High-Side card
KJ3203X1-BA1 Series 2 DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
KJ3204X1-BAI Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High Side card
KJ3206X1-BA1 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card
KJ3207X1-BA1 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC Isolated card
KJ3207X1-BB1 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact card
KJ3208X1-BA1 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated
KJ3209X1-BA1 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card
KJ3210X1-BA1 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120/230 VAC High Side card
KJ3211X1-BA1 Series 2 Sequence of Events card
KJ3212X1-BA1 Series 2 Multifunction card
KJ3221X1-BA1 Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card
KJ3221X1-EA1 Redundant Analog Output terminal block
KJ3222X1-BA1 Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card
KJ3222X1-EA1 Redundant Analog Input terminal block
KJ3223X1-BA1 Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART
KJ3223X1-EA1 16-Channel Analog Input terminal block
KJ3225X1-BA1 Series 2 RTD, ohms card
KJ3231X1-BA1 Series 2 Isolated Input card
KJ3231X1-EA1 Isolated Input terminal block
KJ3241X1-BA1 Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485
KJ3241X1-EA1 Redundant Interface terminal block
KJ3242X1-BA1 Series 2 H1 card
KJ3242X1-EA1 Series 2 Simplex H1 terminal block
KJ3242X1-FA1 Series 2 Redundant H1 terminal block
KJ3243X1-BA1 Series 2 Profibus DP card
KJ3243X1-BB1 Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card
KJ3244X1-BA1 Series 2 DeviceNet card

456
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware

Table P-1: DeltaV non-SIS Hardware Products Crossed Referenced to Product Type
Numbers (continued)

Product Type Number DeltaV Product Name


KJ3245X1-BA1 Series 2 AS-Interface card
KJ4001X1-BA3 2-Wide Power/Controller Carrier
KJ4001X1-BB1 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier
KJ4001X1-BE1 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier with Shield Bar
KJ4001X1-BH1 2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier
KJ4001X1-CA1 I/O terminal block
KJ4001X1-CB1 Fused I/O terminal block
KJ4001X1-CC1 4-Wire terminal block
KJ4001X1-CD1 10-Pin Mass termination block
KJ4001X1-CE1 16-Pin Mass termination block
KJ4001X1-CF1 24-Pin Mass termination block
KJ4001X1-CG1 Thermocouple, mV terminal block
KJ4001X1-CH1 RTD, ohms terminal block
KJ4001X1-CJ1 32-Channel terminal block
KJ4001X1-NA1 One-wide right carrier extender
KJ4001X1-NB1 One-wide left carrier extender
KJ4001X1-HC1 and KJ4010X1- Left Carrier Extender
BF1
KJ4001X1-HB1 and KJ4010X1- Right Carrier Extender
BG1
KJ4002X1-BF2 D-shell cables for connecting left and right one-wide carrier ex-
tenders
KJ4002X1-BA1 Left 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4002X1-BB1 Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4002X1-BC2 Top 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4002X1-BD2 Bottom 4-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4002X1-BE1 Top Extender Cable Assembly
KJ4002X1-BF1 Bottom Extender Cable Assembly
KJ4002X1-BA1 Left 8-Wide Legacy Vertical Carrier
KJ4003X1-BA1 Left 8-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier
KJ4003X1-BB1 Right 8-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier
KJ4003X1-BC1 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier
KJ4003X1-BD1 4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier
KJ4003X1-BE1 Right 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender
KJ4003X1-BF1 Left 1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender
KJ4003X1-BG1 4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier

457
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware

Table P-1: DeltaV non-SIS Hardware Products Crossed Referenced to Product Type
Numbers (continued)

Product Type Number DeltaV Product Name


KJ4003X1-BH1 VerticalPLUS Standard Cable
KJ4003X1-BH2 VerticalPLUS Short Cable
KJ4010X1-BS1 DIN rail stop
KJ6001X1-BA2 Fieldbus H1 Carrier with Enclosure
KJ6001X1-CA2 Fieldbus H1 Carrier

458
Glossary

Glossary
This glossary includes explanations of the symbols, acronyms, and terms used in this
manual.

Units Used in This Manual


Symbol Units
, k ohm, kilo-ohm
C degrees Celsius
F degrees Fahrenheit
A ampere
BTU British thermal units
cm centimeter
dB decibel
g gram
Hz hertz
in. inch
in-lb inch-pounds
kB kilobyte
kg kilogram
kJ kiloJoule
lb pound
Mb Megabit
Mbps Megabits per second
MB Megabyte
MHz Megahertz
m meter
mA milliampere
mm millimeter
ms millisecond
mV millivolt
Nm Newton-meter
nF nanoFarad
pF picoFarad
s second
V volt
VA volt-ampere

459
Glossary

Symbol Units
W watt
F microFarad

Acronyms Used in This Manual


Acronym Definition
AC Alternating Current
A/D Analog-to-Digital
AI Analog Input
AO Analog Output
AWG American Wire Gauge
CD Compact Disk
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSA Canadian Standards Association
DC Direct Current
DIMM Double In-line Memory Module
DI Discrete Input
DIN Deutsche Institut fr Normung
DO Discrete Output
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
FCC Federal Communications Commission
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
ISA Instrument Society of America
ISO International Standards Organization
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light-Emitting Diode
MDI Medium Dependent Interface
MIL Military Standard
NVM Non-Volatile Memory
OLE Object Linking and Embedding
OPC OLE for Process Control
OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

460
Glossary

Acronym Definition
RAM Random-Access Memory
ROM Read-Only Memory
SIMM Single In-Line Memory Module
UL Underwriters Laboratory
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
VAC Volts Alternating Current
VDC Volts Direct Current

Terms Used in This Manual


Term Definition
2-wide power/controller carrier Assembly that provides power and communications connec-
tions for the DeltaV Controller and the DeltaV System Power
Supply.
8-wide I/O interface carrier Assembly that provides power and communication connec-
tions for the DeltaV I/O Interface.
10BaseT IEEE standard for a 10-Megabit per second (Mbps) baseband
network on twisted-pair wiring.
American Wire Gauge (AWG) Usual system of wire size measurement in the United States. A
14 AWG wire has a cross-sectional area of 2.08 mm; a 000
AWG wire has a cross-sectional area of 85.02 mm. Note that
the smaller the AWG value, the larger the wire.
Bit Electrical equivalent of a 0 or a 1 that represents the basic unit
of computer communication.
CD-ROM Compact disk used as a computer information storage medi-
um. CD-ROMs can store a large amount of information.
Central processing unit (CPU) Portion of a computer that manipulates and modifies data and
carries out software instructions.
Control Network Communications network for the DeltaV system.
Daisy chain To connect one device to another in sequence.
Deutsche Institute fr Normung The German standards organization.
(DIN)
Device Piece of electronic hardware that performs one or more pre-
scribed functions.
Diagnostics One or more programs in a computer or microprocessor that
can detect and pinpoint a hardware fault or a configuration er-
ror.
Ethernet Local area network (LAN) specification that uses baseband sig-
naling at 10 Megabits per second (Mbps).

461
Glossary

Term Definition
Federal Communications Com- A United States government communications standards
mission (FCC) group.
Fiber-optic cable Thin, transparent fibers of glass or plastic that transmit data
through pulses of light from a laser or light-emitting diode
(LED).
Hub Device in a network that consolidates wiring connections and
routes communications. All communications devices on a
hub-based network connect to one or more hubs.
Institute of Electrical and Electron- Independent technical organization that defines standards for
ic Engineers (IEEE) the electrical, electronic, and computer industries.
IEEE 802.3 Set of specifications from the Institute of Electrical and Elec-
tronic Engineers (IEEE) for local area networks (LANs). This
specification provides standards for media access control.
Input/Output (I/O) Signal reception and transmission or signal interfacing. Input,
for an instrument, involves accepting and processing signals
from field devices. Output, for an instrument, involves con-
verting commands into electrical signals to field devices.
International Standards Organiza- International organization that defines manufacturing stand-
tion (ISO) ards.
Instrument Society of America Independent organization that defines instrumentation stand-
(ISA) ards.
Intrinsically Safe field circuits Circuits that are designed to limit the amount of energy provi-
ded to field devices to levels below those that are required to
ignite specific types of hazardous materials under fault and no
fault conditions.
Intrinsically Safe I/O Equipment that contains intrinsically safe field circuits.
Light-emitting diode (LED) Electronic component that generates a small focused beam of
light in response to a current passing through the component.
Local Area Network (LAN) Communications network within a limited physical area that
provide high-speed data transmission.
LocalBus A DeltaV Power/Controller Carrier, its associated DeltaV I/O
Interface Carriers, and the cables that connect them.
Megabit (Mb) One million binary bits.
Military standard (MIL) Standard requirements as set by United States military organi-
zations.
Node Communication device, such as a workstation or controller,
attached to the Control Network.
Object linking and embedding Software standard governing the relationship between soft-
(OLE) ware document files.
OLE for Process Control (OPC) Software standard for OLE applications in process control.
Operating range A sensor type's input signal range over which the accuracy is
stated.
Port Physical connection between an electronic device and a cable.

462
Glossary

Term Definition
Random-access memory (RAM) Type of semiconductor memory. The user can read from and
write to RAM as often as desired.
Read-only memory (ROM) Type of semiconductor memory. Information is stored perma-
nently on ROM; the user can examine ROM contents as often
as desired but cannot change the contents.
Single in-line memory module Plug-in random-access memory (RAM) unit for a computer.
(SIMM)
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Independent organization that defines electrical standards.
Uninterruptible power supply Battery that supplies continuous power to a computer system
(UPS) if there is a failure or an interruption in the AC power source.

463
Glossary

464
Index

Index
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender AS-Interface card
dimensions 106 LEDs 60
10-Pin Mass Termination Block 218 AS-Interface specifications 134136
10/100BaseT Ethernet cards 255 ATEX Instruction Sheets 87
16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block 205, 206 author="JForbes" time="20130619T133419-0600" 359
2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier author="JForbes" time="20130619T133433-0600" 359
dimensions 94 author="JForbes" time="20130619T133441-0600" 359
installing 18 Autosense I/O cards 82
specifications 94
32-Channel Terminal Block 204, 205 B
4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier Books Online 87
installing 427 Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC Power Supply 359
specifications 107 Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supply 359
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier Bulk AC to 24 VDC Power Supply 359
dimensions 103 Bulk power supplies
specifications 103 using multiple 382
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier Bulk power supply
dimensions 102 ground wiring 43
specifications 102 input wiring 43
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier installing 43
specifications 104 mounting plate 43
40-Pin Mass Termination Block 220, 221 wiring for bussed field power 22, 23, 25
8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier Bussed field power
installing 19 connecting 21, 22
specifications 96 extending 22, 23, 25
8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier wiring 22, 23, 25
dimensions 108 Bussed field power guidelines 389
specifications 108
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier
C
dimensions 105
specifications 105 Cable
Category 5 38, 39
color-coded boot 40
A fiber-optic 38, 39
Adding external power 99 fiber-optic specifications 295
AI 16-channel cards installling 40
LEDs 58 testing 49
AI 8-channel cards Cable accessory specifications 295
LEDs 56 Cable shields 37
AI 8-Channel, 15 VDC specifications 126128 Cables for legacy vertical systems 424
AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART specifications 128, 130 Calculating system power requirements 431
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA specifications 120, 122 Cards, See I/O Cards
Airborne contaminants 89 Carrier
AO 8-Channel card installing ground wiring for 19
LEDs 58 Carrier extenders
AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA (HART) specifications 131133 Left and right horizontal carrier extenders 97

465
Index

one-wide horizontal extenders 93, 94 overview to the system 1


one-wide VerticalPLUS extenders 93, 94 system equipment 2
Carrier shield bar 16 DeltaV Application Station 37
Carriers DeltaV Books Online 87
1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender 106 DeltaV Control Network
2-wide horizontal power 95 connecting to a LAN 43
2-wide horizontal power/controller 94 DeltaV Controller 2
4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller 107 DeltaV Controller Firewall
4-wide VerticalPLUS powe 103 specifications 343
4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller 102 DeltaV Diagnostics
4-wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater 104 starting 82
8-wide horizontal I/O interface 96 status indicators 82
8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface 108 DeltaV documentation 87
8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface 105 DeltaV Explorer
Fieldbus H1 110 starting 82
I.S. 8-wide horizontal 113 status indicators 82
I.S. LocalBus isolator 114 using 82
I.S. power supply 112 DeltaV Fiber Switches, See Single Port Fiber Switch and
number supported on the LocalBus 2 Four Port Fiber Switch
specifications 93, 94 DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches
Category 5 cables power specifications 294
requirements for using 38, 39 DeltaV I/O subsystem 2
CE statement 12 DeltaV installation manuals 87
Class I Division 2 installations 11 DeltaV IP addresses
Components reserved 354
controllers 239 DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches
I/O subsystem 117 power specifications 285
System Power Supplies 247249 DeltaV media modules 275, 277
Connecting power to the system 43 DeltaV Remote Network
Context sensitive help 87 setting up 45
Control Network DeltaV RM Smart Switches
extending with media converters 299 power specifications 290, 291
connecting to a LAN 43 DeltaV RM Smart Switches and media modules 286, 288,
description 37 289
installation requirements 38, 39 DeltaV Smart Switches
installing 40 environmental specifications 89
setting up 37 DeltaV System Overview 1
status indicators 82 DeltaV Zones 357
Control Network examples 298, 299 DeviceNet card
Controller Firewall LEDs 61
LEDs 55 DeviceNet specifications 137, 138
Controllers DI 8-channel card
environmental specifications 89 LEDs 62
installing 31 DI Mass Connection Board 222, 223
LEDs 51 DI Mass Connection Solution 222, 223
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact
D specifications 149151
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact specifications 144,
DeltaV
145
environmental specifications 89
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated specifications 145, 146
help on using DeltaV applications 87
installing 11

466
Index

DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact specifications 147, Ethernet interface
148 DeltaV Application Station 37
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated specifications 148, 149 ProfessionalPLUS 37
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140 Ethernet switches 37
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143 Explorer, See DeltaV Explorer
Dimensions Extender cables
1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender 106 installing 26
2-wide horizontal power/controller carrier 94 Extending system power 377380
4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carrier 107 Extension cables
4-wide VerticalPLUS power carrier 103 specifications 96
4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller carrier 102 External power
8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier 108 adding 99
8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carrier 105
H1 carrier 110 F
H1 carrier enclosure 110
Fault-tolerant server
I.S. 8-wide horizontal carrier 113
installing 47
I.S. LocalBus isolator carrier 114
Fiber Switches
I.S. power supply carrier 112
LEDs 54
DIN rail spacing for vertical carriers 426
Fiber-optic cable
DIN rails
specifications 295
installing 16
Fiber-optic cables 38, 39
DO 32-channel cards
Fiber-optic media converters, See Media converters
LEDs 65
Fiber-optic switch
DO 8-channel card
environmental specifications 89
LEDs 64
Fieldbus H1 cards
DO Mass Connection Board 226, 227
LEDs 65
DO Mass Connection Solution 226, 227
Fieldbus H1 carrier
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side specifications 161,
dimensions 110
162
enclosure 110
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side
environmental specifications 89
specifications 157, 159
Fieldbus H1 carrier enclosure
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated
dimensions 110
specifications 159, 161
Fieldbus H1 specifications 163, 164
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side specifications 151,
Fieldbus H1 terminal block 197
152, 154
Four Port Fiber Switch
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated specifications 155157
environmental specifications 89
Documentation
specifications 272, 273
hazardous area 87
FP20 Smart Switch
NAMUR 87
LEDs 80
Download commands 82
ftServer 4500 47, 255
Fused I/O terminal blocks 196, 197
E
Enclosures G
power dissipation 371
GPS network time server
selecting 367
setting up 46
Ethernet cable
Ground isolation 3
installation rules 294
Ground wiring
Ethernet cable specifications 294
for bulk power supply;Bulk power supply:ground
Ethernet cards 255
wiring 43
Ethernet hubs 37

467
Index

for carrier 19 AO 8-Channel 420 mA (HART)


for workstations 36 installation notes 131133
Grounding terminals 14 specifications 131133
wiring diagram 131133
H AS-Interface
installation notes 134136
Hazardous area installations
specifications 134136
documentation 87
wiring diagram 134136
Hops
DeviceNet
number allowed 37
installation notes 137, 138
Hubs
specifications 137, 138
environmental specifications 89
wiring diagram 137, 138
network example 3
DI 32-Channel 24 VDC Dry Contact
installation notes 149151
I specifications 149151
I.S. 16-Channel Terminal Block 232 wiring diagram 149151
I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block 231 DI 8-Channel 120 VAC Dry Contact
I.S. AI 8-channel cards installation notes 144, 145
LEDs 74 specifications 144, 145
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART specifications 188, 189 wiring diagram 144, 145
I.S. AO 8-Channel HART card DI 8-Channel 120 VAC Isolated
LEDs 75 installation notes 145, 146
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (HART) specifications 189, specifications 145, 146
191 wiring diagram 145, 146
I.S. DI 16-channel card DI 8-Channel 230 VAC Dry Contact
LEDs 76 installation notes 147, 148
I.S. DI, 16-Channel specifications 192, 193 specifications 147, 148
I.S. DO 4-channel card LEDs wiring diagram 147, 148
LEDs 77 DI 8-Channel 230 VAC Isolated
I.S. DO, 4-Channel specifications 194, 195 installation notes 148, 149
I.S. LocalBus Isolator 451 specifications 148, 149
I/O card keying 233 wiring diagram 148, 149
I/O cards DI 8-Channel 24 VDC Dry Contact
VIM 2 card 186, 187 installation notes 138140
I/O Cards specifications 138140
AI 16-Channel 4-20 mA HART wiring diagram 138140
installation notes 128, 130 DI 8-Channel 24 VDC Isolated
specifications 128, 130 installation notes 142, 143
wiring diagram 128, 130 specifications 142, 143
AI 8-Channel 1-5 VDC wiring diagram 142, 143
installation notes 126128 DO 32-Channel 24 VDC High-Side
specifications 126128 installation notes 161, 162
wiring diagram 126128 specifications 161, 162
AI 8-Channel 4-20 mA wiring diagram 161, 162
installation notes 120, 122 DO 8-Channel 120 VAC/230 VAC High-Side
specifications 120, 122 installation notes 157, 159
wiring diagram 120, 122 specifications 157, 159
AI 8-Channel 4-20 mA HART wiring diagram 157, 159
installation notes 120, 122 DO 8-Channel 120 VAC/230 VAC Isolated
specifications 120, 122 installation notes 159, 161
wiring diagram 120, 122

468
Index

specifications 159, 161 specifications 177179


wiring diagram 159, 161 wiring diagram 177179
DO 8-Channel 24 VDC High-Side Serial Card 2 Ports RS232/RS485
installation notes 151, 152, 154 installation notes 180
specifications 151, 152, 154 specifications 180
wiring diagram 151, 152, 154 wiring diagram 180
DO 8-Channel 24 VDC Isolated Series 2 AI 8-Channel 4-20 mA HART
installation notes 155157 installation notes 120, 122
specifications 155157 specifications 120, 122
wiring diagram 155157 wiring diagrams 120, 122
Fieldbus H1 Series 2 AO 8-Channel, 4-20 mA HART
installation notes 163, 164 installation notes 131133
specifications 163, 164 specifications 131133
wiring diagram 163, 164 wiring diagrams 131133
I S AI 8-Channel 4-20 mA HART Series 2 AS-Interface
installation notes 188, 189 installation notes 134136
specifications 188, 189 specifications 134136
wiring diagram 188, 189 wiring diagrams 134136
I S AO 8-Channel 4-20 mA (HART) Series 2 DI 8-Channel 120 VAC Dry Contact
installation notes 189, 191 installation notes 144, 145
specifications 189, 191 specifications 144, 145
wiring diagram 189, 191 wiring diagrams 144, 145
I S DI 16-Channel Series 2 DI 8-Channel 120 VAC Isolated
installation notes 192, 193 installation notes 145, 146
specifications 192, 193 specifications 145, 146
wiring diagram 192, 193 wiring diagrams 145, 146
I S DO 4-Channel Series 2 DI 8-Channel 24 VDC Dry Contact
installation notes 194, 195 installation notes 138140
specifications 194, 195 specifications 138140
wiring diagram 194, 195 wiring diagrams 138140
installing 29 Series 2 DI 8-Channel 24 VDC Isolated
Isolated Input installation notes 142, 143
installation notes 166, 167, 170 specifications 142, 143
specifications 166, 167, 170 wiring diagrams 142, 143
wiring diagram 166, 167, 170 Series 2 DO 32-Channel 24 VDC High-Side
Multifunction installation notes 161, 162
installation notes 170172 specifications 161, 162
specifications 170172 wiring diagrams 161, 162
wiring diagram 170172 Series 2 DO 8-Channel 120 VAC/230 VAC High-Side
number supported by single subsystem 117 installation notes 157, 159
overview 117 specifications 157, 159
Profibus DP wiring diagrams 157, 159
installation notes 173 Series 2 DO 8-Channel 120 VAC/230 VAC Isolated
specifications 173 installation notes 159, 161
wiring diagram 173 specifications 159, 161
RTD ohms wiring diagrams 159, 161
installation notes 174, 176 Series 2 DO 8-Channel 24 VDC High-Side
specifications 174, 176 installation notes 151, 152, 154
wiring diagram 174, 176 specifications 151, 152, 154
Sequence of Events wiring diagrams 151, 152, 154
installation notes 177179

469
Index

Series 2 DO 8-Channel 24 VDC Isolated control network cable 40


installation notes 155157 controller 31
specifications 155157 DIN rails 16
wiring diagrams 155157 Ethernet cable 294
Series 2 H1 extender cables 26
installation notes 163, 164 getting started 15
specifications 163, 164 I/O cards 29
wiring diagrams 163, 164 I/O terminal block 27
Series 2 Isolated Input redundant I/O cards 31
installation notes 166, 167, 170 redundant I/O terminal blocks 30
specifications 166, 167, 170 requirements 38, 39
wiring diagrams 166, 167, 170 system power supply 32
Series 2 Multifunction tools required 13
installation notes 170172 torque limits 14
specifications 170172 UPS 37
wiring diagrams 170172 wiring guidelines 13
Series 2 Plus Profibus DP workstation 36
installation notes 173 installation notes
specifications 173 VIM 2 card 186, 187
wiring diagrams 173 Installing redundant controllers 395
Series 2 RTD ohms Inter-Zone Control Network 357
installation notes 174, 176 Inter-Zone Server 357
specifications 174, 176 Interface Terminal Block 199, 200
wiring diagrams 174, 176 Intrinsically Safe 8-wide horizontal carrier
Series 2 Sequence of Events dimensions 113
installation notes 177179 Intrinsically Safe Carrier Extenders 452
specifications 177179 Intrinsically Safe components
wiring diagrams 177179 8-wide horizontal carrier 113
Series 2 Serial Card 2 Ports RS232/RS485 LocalBus isolator carrier 114
installation notes 180 power supply carrier 112
specifications 180 system power supply 252, 253
wiring diagrams 180 Intrinsically Safe I/O 449
Series 2 Thermocouple mV Intrinsically Safe I/O cards
installation notes 183, 186 using with non-I.S. I/O 449
specifications 183, 186 Intrinsically Safe LocalBus isolator
wiring diagrams 183, 186 dimensions 114
Thermocouple mV Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply 252, 253
installation notes 183, 186 IP addresses
specifications 183, 186 filtering 37
wiring diagram 183, 186 reserved for DeltaV 354
I/O carriers 2 Isolated Input card
I/O terminal blocks 196, 197 LEDs 67
I/O Terminal Blocks Isolated Input specifications 166, 167, 170
installing 27
wiring 27 K
Icons 82
Keying 117
Installation
2-wide power/controller carrier 18
8-wide I/O interface carrier 19 L
bulk power supply 43 LAN
bussed field power 22, 23, 25 installation requirements 38, 39

470
Index

connecting application station to 43 MD20 Smart Switch


connecting Control Network to 43 LEDs 78
LED indicators MD30 Smart Switch
System Power Supply 50 LEDs 78
LEDs Media Converter
AI 16-channel cards 58 LEDs 53
AI 8-channel cards 56 Media converters
AO 8-Channel card 58 environmental specifications 89
AS-Interface card 60 extending the control network with 299
Controller Firewall 55 specifications 243
controllers 51 Modules, See I/O Cards
DeviceNet card 61 Monitors
DI 8-channel card 62 touch screen 256
DI Mass Connection Board 63 Mounting screws
DO 32-channel cards 65 torque limits on 14
DO 8-channel card 64 MQ controller specifications 239
DO Mass Connection Board 65 Multifunction card
Fiber Switches 54 LEDs 68
Fieldbus H1 cards 65 Multifunction specifications 170172
I.S. AI 8-channel cards 74 Multiple monitors 256
I.S. AO 8-Channel HART card 75 Multiple power supplies 377
I.S. DI 16-channel card 76 MX controller specifications 239
I.S. DO 4-channel card 77
Isolated Input card 67 N
MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches 78
NAMUR installations
Media Converter 53
documentation 87
Multifunction card 68
network time server
Profibus DP card 68
setting up 46
Remote Interface Unit 52
Network topology 298, 299
RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches 80
Nodes 37
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 71
VIM 2 card 72, 73
Legacy 359 O
Legacy 24 VDC to 12 VDC Bulk Power Supply One-wide horizontal carrier extenders 93, 94
specifications 365 One-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders 93, 94
Legacy AC to 24 VDC Bulk Power Supply Online Help 87
specifications 360362 Operating temperature 89
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to
12 VDC power supply P
specifications 363, 364
Plant-wide LAN 37
LocalBus
Power
number of carriers supported 2
extending 377380
LocalBus cable specifications 96
Power dissipation
calculating 371
M Power dissipation for DeltaV products 371
Management station 352 Power guidelines 14
Marine Certified installations 11 Power supplies
Mass Connection Boards 222 using multiple 377
Mass Connection Solutions 222 Power/controller carriers 2
Mass Termination Blocks 216, 217 ProfessionalPLUS 37
MD controller specifications 239

471
Index

Profibus DP card Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140


LEDs 68 Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143
Profibus DP specifications 173 Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side
Profibus DP Terminal Block 201 specifications 161, 162
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side
R specifications 157, 159
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated
Redundant Analog Input terminal block 209
specifications 159, 161
Redundant Analog Output Terminal Block 210, 211
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side
Redundant controllers
specifications 151, 152, 154
installing 395
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated
Redundant Discrete Terminal Block 211
specifications 155157
Redundant H1 Terminal Block 212, 213
Series 2 H1 specifications 163, 164
Redundant I/O cards
Series 2 H1 terminal block 198, 199
installing 31
Series 2 I/O 118
Redundant I/O terminal blocks
Series 2 Isolated Input specifications 166, 167, 170
installing 30
Series 2 Multifunction specifications 170172
Redundant Interface Terminal Block 213, 214
Series 2 Plus Profibus DP specifications 173
Redundant Profibus DP Terminal Block 214, 215
Series 2 Plus terminal blocks
Relative humidity 89
4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block 207,
Remote Access Services (RAS) server 6
208
Remote Interface Unit
Series 2 RTD, ohms specifications 174, 176
LEDs 52
Series 2 Sequence of Events specifications 177179
Remote Interface Unit specifications 240, 241
Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485
Remote network
specifications 180
setting up 45
Series 2 Thermocouple, mV specifications 183, 186
Repeater hops
Setup commands 82
maximum number of 38, 39
Shielding
Reserved DeltaV IP addresses 354
cable 37
RM100 Smart Switch
Shock 89
LEDs 80
Simplex control network 40
Router 37
Single Port Fiber Switch
RTD, ohms specifications 174, 176
environmental specifications 89
RTD, ohms Terminal Block 202, 203
specifications 272, 273
Site preparation 13
S specifications
ScTP VIM 2 card 186, 187
screened twisted pair 3 Specifications
Sequence of Events specifications 177179 2-wide horizontal power carrier 95
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 2-wide horizontal power/controller carrier 94
LEDs 71 4-wide power/controller carrier 107
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 specifications 180 4-wide VerticalPLUS power carrier 103
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART specifications 120, 4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller carrier 102
122 4-wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater carrier 104
Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 8-wide horizontal power/controller carrier 96
specifications 131133 8-wide vertical I/O interface carrier 108
Series 2 AS-Interface specifications 134136 8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carriers 105
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact AI 8-Channel, 15 VDC 126128
specifications 144, 145 AI, 8-Channel, 4 mA to 20 mA, HART 120, 122
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated AO 8-Channel, 420 mA (HART) 131133
specifications 145, 146 AS-Interface 134136

472
Index

cable accessories 295 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC,


controllers 239 Isolated 159, 161
DeltaV Controller Firewall 343 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 151, 152,
DeviceNet 137, 138 154
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149151 Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 155157
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 144, 145 Series 2 H1 163, 164
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 145, 146 Series 2 Isolated Input 166, 167, 170
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact 147, 148 Series 2 Multifunction 170172
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated 148, 149 Series 2 Plus Profibus DP 173
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140 Series 2 RTD, ohms 174, 176
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143 Series 2 Sequence of Events 177179
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 161, 162 Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 180
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side 157, Series 2 Thermocouple, mV 183, 186
159 Series DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 144, 145
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated 159, 161 Single Port Fiber Switch 272, 273
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 151, 152, 154 System Power Supply (AC/DC) 247249
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 155157 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) 249, 251, 252
environmental 89 Status indicators 82
Fieldbus H1 163, 164 Storage temperature 89
Fieldbus H1 carrier 110 Subnet mask 47
Four Port Fiber Switch 272, 273 Switches
I.S. 8-wide horizontal I/O interface 113 environmental specifications 89
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 188, 189 System Checkout
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (HART) 189, 191 LED indicators 50
I.S. DI, 16-Channel 192, 193 System equipment
I.S. DO, 4-Channel 194, 195 DeltaV Controller 2
I.S. LocalBus Isolator carrier 114 DeltaV system power 2
I.S. System Power Supply 252, 253 fault-tolerant server 2
I.S. system power supply carrier 112 I/O carriers 2
Isolated Input 166, 167, 170 I/O subsystem 2
Legacy 24 VDC to 12 VDC Bulk Power Supply 365 legacy bulk power supplies 2
Legacy AC to 24 VDC Bulk Power Supply 360362 LocalBus 2
legacy bulk power supplies 359 power controller carriers 2
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk system identifier 2
AC to 12 VDC power supply 363, 364 Uninterruptible Power Supply 2
Multifunction 170172 workstations 2
Profibus DP 173 System Identifier
Remote Interface Unit 240, 241 installing 36
RTD, ohms 174, 176 System Power Supply
Sequence of Events 177179 alarm contact wiring 32
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 180 description 32
Series 2 AI 8-Channel,4-20 mA, HART 120, 122 installing 32
Series 2 AO 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 131133 LED indicators 50
Series 2 AS-Interface 134136 wiring 32
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 145, 146 System Power Supply (AC/DC)
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140 using multiple 377380
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143 System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) 249, 251, 252
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 161, 162
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High- T
Side 157, 159
Technical Service 88
Terminal block keying 117

473
Index

Terminal block usage Series 2 Plus Profibus DP 173


AI 8-Channel, 15 VDC 126128 Series 2 Redundant AI, 8-Channel,4-20 mA,
AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 128, 130 HART 120, 122
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA 120, 122 Series 2 RTD, ohms 174, 176
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 120, 122 Series 2 Sequence of Events 177179
AO 8-Channel, 420 mA (HART) 131133 Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 180
AS-Interface 134136 Series 2 Thermocouple, mV 183, 186
DeviceNet 137, 138 Thermocouple, mV 183, 186
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149151 Terminal blocks
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 144, 145 10-Pin Mass Termination Block 218
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 145, 146 16-Channel Analog Input 205, 206
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact 147, 148 32-channel 204, 205
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated 148, 149 4-wire I/O 196, 197
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140 40-Pin Mass Termination Block 220, 221
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143 Fieldbus H1 197
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 161, 162 Fused I/O 196, 197
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side 157, I.S. 16-Channel 232
159 I.S. 8-Channel 231
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated 159, 161 I/O 196, 197
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 151, 152, 154 Interface 199, 200
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 155157 Mass Termination 216, 217
Fieldbus H1 163, 164 Profibus DP 201
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 188, 189 Redundant Analog Input 209
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (HART) 189, 191 Redundant Analog Output 210, 211
I.S. DI, 16-Channel 192, 193 Redundant Discrete 211
I.S. DO, 4-Channel 194, 195 Redundant H1 212, 213
Isolated Input 166, 167, 170 Redundant Interface 213, 214
Multifunction 170172 Redundant Profibus DP 214, 215
Profibus DP 173 RTD, ohms 202, 203
RTD, ohms 174, 176 Series 2 H1 198, 199
Sequence of Events 177179 Thermocouple 203, 204
Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 180 Thermocouple terminal block 203, 204
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 120, 122 Thermocouple, mV specifications 183, 186
Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 131133 Tools
Series 2 AS-Interface 134136 for DeltaV installation 13
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 144, Torque limits 14
145 Touch screen monitors 256
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 145, 146 Troubleshooting
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140 status indicators 82
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143 Troubleshooting guide 84
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 161, 162
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High- U
Side 157, 159
Uninterruptible Power Supply 2
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC,
UPS
Isolated 159, 161
connecting 241
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 151, 152,
Using multiple bulk power supplies 382
154
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 155157
Series 2 H1 163, 164 V
Series 2 Isolated Input 166, 167, 170 Vertical carriers 399
Series 2 Multifunction 170172 VerticalPLUS carriers 399

474
Index

Vibration 89 RTD, ohms 174, 176


VIM 2 card Sequence of Events 177179
installation notes 186, 187 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 180
specifications 186, 187 Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 4-wire
LEDs 72, 73 (Simplex) 120, 122
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, 2-wire
W (Redundant) 120, 122
Series 2 AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART, 2-wire
Wiring
(Simplex) 120, 122, 142, 143
bulk power supply input 43
Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 131133
bussed field power 22, 23, 25
Series 2 AS-Interface 134136
I/O terminal block 27
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 144,
system power supply alarm contacts 32
145
system power supply input 32
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 145, 146
Wiring diagram
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140
AI 8-Channel, 15 VDC 126128
Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143
Wiring diagrams
Series 2 DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 161, 162
AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 128, 130
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, and 4-20 mA, HART 4-
Side 157, 159
wire 120, 122
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC,
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, and AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA,
Isolated 159, 161
HART, 2-wire 120, 122
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 151, 152,
AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA (HART) 131133
154
AS-Interface 134136
Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 155157
DeviceNet 137, 138
Series 2 H1 163, 164
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 149151
Series 2 Isolated Input 166, 167, 170
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact 144, 145
Series 2 Multifunction 170172
DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated 145, 146
Series 2 Plus Profibus DP 173
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact 147, 148
Series 2 RTD, ohms 174, 176
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated 148, 149
Series 2 Sequence of Events 177179
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140
Series 2 Serial Card, 2 Ports, RS232/RS485 180
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143
Series 2 Thermocouple, mV 183, 186
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 161, 162
Thermocouple, mV 183, 186
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side 157,
Wiring guidelines 14
159
Workstation
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated 159, 161
environmental specifications 89
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side 151, 152, 154
grounding 36
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 155157
installing 36
Fieldbus H1 163, 164
multiple monitor 256
I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART 188, 189
network cards used in 255
I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA (HART) 189, 191
Workstation diagnostics 83
I.S. DI, 16-Channel 192, 193
I.S. DO, 4-Channel 194, 195
Isolated Input 166, 167, 170 Z
Multifunction 170172 Zone 2 installations 11

475

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi